With a rich cultural heritage, stunning natural landscapes, and a diverse range of experiences all waiting to be explored, Europe has so much to offer a traveler. With such a wide range of fantastic things to experience, it might seem an impossible task to create a “to-do” list. But fear not! I’ve compiled a list of some of my favorite European travel experiences for you, and I hope this will inspire you to think outside the box and make your trip even more special.

From exploring an underground cemetery in Naples to a date with Dracula’s castle in Romania, or viewing a vast collection of 20th-century art in Venice, there’s something for everybody on this list. So, let’s get packing for some experiences of a lifetime.

1. Northern Lights

Finnish Lapland

Seeing the ethereal northern lights in Finnish Lapland is definitely an unforgettable experience. Lapland, located in the Arctic Circle, is one of the best places in the world to see the lights. They are otherwise known as the aurora borealis — a natural phenomenon that occurs when electrically-charged particles from the Sun collide with particles in the Earth’s atmosphere to create a stunning display of colors and patterns in the night sky.

Finnish Lapland is one of the most magical places you can visit. While you are here, visit Santa Claus and check to see if you’re on his naughty or nice list, see reindeer, try husky sledding, give skiing or snow-shoeing a try, sleep in a glass igloo, have a traditional Finnish sauna, and of course, turn your eyes to the sky and hopefully catch a glimpse of the magical northern lights.

In Lapland, the northern lights are visible from late August until early April, with the best time to see them being in the darkest months of the year, November to February. It’s important to find a location with clear skies and minimal light pollution, and be sure you have your camera ready. No one warns you that you often can’t see them with the naked eye and that most photographs of the Northern Lights are taken with special camera setups and a long shutter speed. Also remember, most cell phones will turn off in the cold.

Pro Tip: The northern lights are visible roughly 200 nights a year in northern Lapland, while in southern Finland, they’re only visible for around 10–20 nights a year. Take a northern lights tour to help you get to the best views.

2. Fontanelle Cemetery

Naples, Italy

Home to around 8 million human bones (mostly skulls) is the Fontanelle Cemetery beneath the bustle of the Naples streets. It is an old quarry that became a burial site in 1656 when the plague wiped out 250,000 of the city’s residents, and again in 1837, when cholera epidemics struck, at which time Fontanelle became Naples’s main burial site.

In the 19th century, the cemetery became overcrowded, and the bones of the deceased were moved to caves where they were arranged on shelves. In the early 20th century, the cemetery became a place of devotion for the poor of Naples, who believed that the souls of the dead could intercede on their behalf. The cemetery was maintained by a group of women known as the “pezzentelle,” who cared for the skulls and prayed for their souls.

A visit to Cimitero delle Fontanelle is free and offers an opportunity to both learn more about the history of Naples and to experience the eerie beauty of the underground catacombs.

Pro Tip: Ignore the somewhat pushy guides at the entrance to the cemetery. Instead, book a tour in advance if you don’t want to go it alone.

3. Glaciers

Svalbard, Norway

Norway’s Svalbard is a beautiful and remote archipelago deep inside the Arctic Circle. The region is known for vast expanses of ice and snow, majestic mountains, and stunning glaciers. Visitors can marvel at massive glaciers — tinged an otherworldly blue — that cascade down from the mountains and into the icy waters below. The sound of creaking ice and the sight of frozen landscapes stretching as far as the eye can see will leave a lasting impression on anyone fortunate enough to witness the majesty of Svalbard’s glaciers.

Despite its remote location and extreme conditions, Svalbard is a remarkable place and a popular destination for adventure tourism. It features activities such as dog sledding, snowmobiling, and glacier hiking, as well as the northern lights, which are visible here from October to February.

Svalbard is also home to the Svalbard Global Seed Vault, the world’s largest secure seed storage facility, where seeds from around the world are stored to protect against the loss of plant species in the event of a global catastrophe.

Pro Tip: Book a journey on an expedition ship, like the Quark Expeditions’ Ocean Adventurer, to get up close to glaciers, fjords, icebergs, and more.

4. Bran Castle

Bran, Romania

Bran Castle, in the Transylvania region of Romania, dates back to the 14^th century and is known as the home of the infamous vampire, Count Dracula, a fictional character created by Bram Stoker. The castle is a stunning example of medieval architecture, with a unique blend of Gothic and Renaissance styles, and its towers, turrets, and battlements giving it a dramatic and imposing appearance. Inside, visitors can explore the castle’s many rooms, including the eerie dungeons where prisoners were once held.

Bran Castle features an impressive collection of medieval weapons and armor, as well as artifacts from the region’s cultural heritage. Another unique feature of the castle is the torture room, with its displays of all sorts of medieval torture devices. The models are accompanied by drawings and gruesome descriptions of exactly how they were used. (You do have to pay a little extra to enter this part of the castle, and if you’re a little sensitive, you may want to skip it.) 

Whether you’re a history buff, or just a fan of horror stories and vampires, a visit to Dracula’s Castle is a great experience.

Pro Tip: As one of Romania’s tourist hotspots, expect the castle to be busy all year round. In the summer months, the entrance line can be long. To avoid long queues, arrive as early as possible, or book a tour that offers a skip-the-line ticket option. Most people wanting to visit Bran Castle base themselves in Brasov, a popular ski resort and hiking town in the Carpathian Mountains. It’s only 30 minutes to Bran Castle from Brasov by car, and you can take a tour from here that includes Bran Castle and Peles Castle (one of the most beautiful castles I’ve ever seen). If you’re short on time and can’t stay over in Brasov, it’s easy to take a day trip from Bucharest.

5. Art Along The Grand Canal

Venice, Italy

The Grand Canal is the main waterway in Venice and one of its iconic landmarks. Located on the banks of the Grand Canal is the Peggy Guggenheim Collection, a museum of modern art housed in the Palazzo Venier dei Leoni, a magnificent palace built in the 18th century.

The palace was originally designed by architect Lorenzo Boschetti but was never completed to his specifications. Over the years, various owners made changes and additions to the building, resulting in an eclectic mix of architectural styles and a stunning example of Venetian architecture. Its location along the Grand Canal makes it one of the most scenic and picturesque buildings in Venice.

Peggy Guggenheim purchased the incomplete building in 1949, living there until her death 30 years later. She filled its rooms with her vast collection of modern and contemporary art, including works by Jackson Pollock, Salvador Dalí, Pablo Picasso, Max Ernst, Joan Miró, and Alexander Calder. The building’s interior is just as impressive as its exterior, with ornate staircases, frescoes, and intricate details throughout. The museum’s galleries are spread over three floors.

Pro Tip: You can visit the Peggy Guggenheim Collection using the My Special Venice card, a digital card valid for 365 days that allows you to visit some of the most extraordinary cultural sites in Venice at reduced prices.

6. The Princes’ Islands 

Istanbul, Türkiye 

The “Princes’ Islands” (Adalar in Turkish) are a group of nine, small islands located in the Marmara Sea, a short ferry ride from Istanbul’s Kabataş ferry dock. Of the nine islands, only four are open to the public: Büyükada (the biggest and most popular), Burgazada, Heybeliada, and Kınalıada. The islands are known for their stunning natural beauty, charming villages, and unique history, with many of their buildings dating back to the Ottoman era. Mainly car-free, the islands are known for their horse-drawn carriages (phaetons) and visiting really feels like you’re stepping back in time.

The Princes Islands have evolved from a place of exile during the Byzantine era to a popular destination for tourists and Istanbulites alike looking for an escape from the hectic city. Each island has its own unique character and attractions, from the beautiful beaches of Büyükada to the secluded serenity of Heybeliada. On Büyükada, you’ll find grand old mansions, secret swimming coves, and colorful local markets, with one of the main attractions being the historic Greek Orthodox Monastery of St. George dating back to the 6th century. A walk up to Büyükada’s highest peak, Yücetepe, gives you incredible views all the way to Istanbul, far away on the horizon.

Pro Tip: Both regular ferries (operated by Şehir Hatları) and “sea busses” (fast ferries operated by IDO) will get you to the Princes’ Islands. The sea buses are the fastest option but operate at irregular times and focus on locals commuting to and from work, stopping at all the islands, and taking around 55 minutes. The regular ferries are slower (can take up to 100 minutes) but cheaper and depart more frequently. Make sure you catch one of the first ferries of the day to beat the local crowds, and on arrival, check when the last ferry departs back to Istanbul. Alternatively, join a day tour with lunch from Istanbul.

I hope I’ve whet your appetite to explore some of the special places and experiences that Europe has to offer. Happy traveling!

When confronted with the word “desert,” most of us think of barren, boring places not worth seeing. But just because deserts are dry places — by definition, they receive no more than 10 inches per year — that does not make them boring, and indeed, some of them can be truly stunning.

Also, deserts come in various guises. There are four officially recognized types of desert. These range from the one most of us think of first — hot and dry and sandy, such as the Sahara — to semi-arid deserts, coastal deserts, and even cold deserts. All offer different landscapes and thrills, and pretty much the only thing these have in common is the lack of rain.

Having spent quite a few years living in desert countries such as the United Arab Emirates, Oman, and Qatar, I have come to love deserts, especially the pretty ones with seemingly endless sand dunes stretching to the horizon. Second only to the open ocean, they offer a calmness, a serenity, and a restfulness that few other landscapes do. Plus, if you really want to, you can have adrenaline-rush fun in them.

Here are some firm favorites, in no particular order.

1. Empty Quarter

United Arab Emirates (UAE)

Stretching across Saudi Arabia, touching Yemen, Oman, the UAE, and running its course in Qatar, the Empty Quarter is the largest sand desert in the world, and one of the most magnificent natural wonders of the Middle East. It is easily reached from Abu Dhabi. This is the place where I first truly appreciated how magnificent, how seemingly endless a desert can be, and how small and insignificant you feel standing there. And how vulnerable. 

Unless you are going with other drivers who know how to stay safe in the desert, take a tour with professionals. I recommend the Liwa Desert Safari tour.

Pro Tip: While the tours always offer you drinking water, bring extra, and bring a good hat. Not a pretty hat, but a useful sunhat. The sun is a formidable piece of nature that should not be taken lightly.

2. Sahara

Morocco

While the Sahara is widely acknowledged as the desert — after all, ṣaḥrāʾ means “desert” in Arabic — it has also turned into a bit of a tourist circus. Easily reached from Morocco, there are camel safaris, 4WD drives, camps in the desert, and opportunities to have your picture taken wearing the royal blue Tuareg headscarves. To get away from the touristy camel ride belt, you will need to go on a longer tour, deeper into the desert and touching on some of its other terrains.

I am not poo-pooing the common Sahara experience. You still get the sense of the desert and can have lots of fun, but you need to sneak out for a look at night if you want serenity.

3. Namib

Namibia

You know those eerie images of stark, leafless trees standing in front of a bright orange sand dune? That is the Namib desert, a coastal desert stretching along the Atlantic coast of Namibia. 

It is pure magic. The landscapes are otherworldly, and you might encounter animals, such as elephants and lions, wandering along the beach and even taking a dip in the ocean waves. Then you have the spooky Kolmanskop, a deserted, once very rich town that is being reclaimed by the sands. So many magnificent sights, and a true adventure.

Pro Tip: This is road trip country, either self-driving or part of a tour. There are many options, from private to larger groups and from budget to luxury.

4. The Red Centre

Australia

Driving up to, or flying into Ayers Rock Airport in the Northern Territory, you get the idea why this centrally located spot in Australia is called the Red Centre. The ground, made up of sand, rocky outcrops, and vast stretches of flat desert sprinkled with coarse vegetation, is dark red. Obviously, the one spot that stands out in this landscape is Uluru, the holy monolith that adds that touch of magic and mystery to this already alien landscape. But there are other unique rock formations, as well as hikes through the desert. There are also local Indigenous peoples to learn from, telling their tragic history through wonderful stories. And so much more.

Pro Tip: Staying overnight gives you the pain of choice, as accommodations range from the utterly luxurious to the very budget-friendly.

5. White Desert

Egypt

From a red desert to the White Desert. Part of the Sahara but at the Egyptian end, the White Desert offers a landscape not seen elsewhere. White mushroom-like outcrops dot an area of around 166 square miles in northwestern Egypt, 500 miles from Cairo. 

While the desert looks like it’s made from salt, it truly is white sand and wind-sculpted rock, bleached by the sun and contrasting against the brown sand underneath. And while it looks like nothing could possibly live here — apart from in the oasis some 30 miles to the south — you might be lucky enough to spot gazelles, jackals, and the rather cute fennec fox with their big ears on your visit.

Pro Tip: Due to the distances involved, all tours tend to be a few days long, but they’re worth the effort.

6. The Highlands

Iceland

When you think of Iceland, well, snow and ice come to mind, right? Climbing over glaciers and finding mini icebergs on black beaches. So, with snow and ice around, there must be enough precipitation, surely? But indeed, there are not only cold deserts here on this northern Island, but also the largest area of volcaniclastic sandy desert on Earth. 

The Highlands of Iceland are a harsh region on this already harsh island. Despite the regular rain and snowfall in the country, The Highlands area is a desert because the rain does not get absorbed by the topsoil — instead, it goes straight through the porous layers without any potential plants getting a look in.

Pro Tip: Only accessible during summer, and then only with serious off-road vehicles and driving skills, you can enjoy this northern desert with tours setting off from Reykjavík.

7. Tabernas Desert

Spain

So, we’ve discussed hot and dry, coastal, and cold deserts. This one, in Spain’s southeast, is a semi-arid desert. Like Iceland’s desert, the Tabernas receives some rain, but in such a way that when it falls, it runs off and does not penetrate the ground, making it officially a desert. Instead, you have a rugged, high-lying landscape, dotted with some vegetation (such as sea lavender) and a sparse animal population that includes lizards and the hardy Algerian hedgehog.

Looking like the quintessential Wild West, this region is also Spain’s answer to Hollywood, with films such as Once Upon a Time in the West, A Fistful of Dollars, Lawrence of Arabia, and more recently, the TV series Game of Thrones, having been filmed here.

Pro Tip: This is a great hiking country, with guided hikes available.

8. Singing Sand Dunes

Qatar

Some of Qatar’s dunes sing. Yes, sing. Not too far from the Inland Sea, complete with its flamingos and adrenaline-fueled activities such as dune-bashing and sandboarding, lies a quieter spot, the so-called Singing Sand Dunes of Qatar. The very rare combination of horseshoe-shaped standalone dunes and sliding sand let the dunes sing, or more aptly, moan. Often, if the wind is right, they do it all by themselves — otherwise, a person sliding down on his or her bottom will get an impressive result. They are pretty and fun, and they’re not on the main tourist drag, so you might just get an entire dune to yourself.

Pro Tip: If you don’t have a sled, bring a sturdy shopping bag with you and sit on it when you slide down, using the handles as not-terribly-effective steering. Better than a bare bottom any day.

9. The Gobi Desert

Mongolia And China

The Gobi Desert is a cold, sandy desert with areas of brushland lying between Mongolia and China. It measures some 1,000 miles across and 500 miles from top to bottom. 

It is difficult to get to unless you happen to find yourself on the Trans-Siberian Express. So far, I have not managed to get there yet, but it is on my bucket list. For my next big birthday, Mongolia is on my wish list, and there are several ways to see more, including taking in the Dunhuang oasis in China, which is an awful lot less remote than it looks at first glance.

Pro Tip: Did you know that there are also well-known Singing Dunes in the Gobi in Mongolia? It is known as the Khongor Sand Dune. That is also on my to-do list — then I can compare the noise the Mongolian dunes make with the moaning of the Qatari dunes. Any excuse to travel to a desert.

I’m not suggesting that you should write off going on safari to South Africa, Kenya, or Tanzania, nor that you should erase the Egyptian pyramids or the Moroccan medinas from your bucket list. But there are many great countries on the African continent that don’t get the attention they deserve, and it is these unique gems that deserve a place on your bucket list.

Here are my suggestions for five unique African countries that should be on your radar.

1. Zambia

This magnificent African country sitting right in the heart of the African continent has been my adopted home for the last 30 years. Zambia is well off the beaten path when it comes to safaris and tourism. There are many people out there — members of my extended family included — who have no idea exactly where it is and would struggle to point Zambia out on a map. Indeed, somewhere around 50 percent of the visitors who set foot in the country, only come to visit the famous Victoria Falls — but there is so much more to discover here.

National Parks And Protected Game Reserves

Around 30 percent of Zambia is part of a national park or protected game reserve, and there’s an abundance of wildlife here. You definitely don’t have to worry about it being crowded — unlike elsewhere on the continent. Plan a sensational safari in South Luangwa or Kafue National Parks to see herds of elephants, packs of wild dogs, prides of lions, and much more. Go down the Zambezi River in a canoe in the Lower Zambezi National Park. Visit Victoria Falls, known locally as Mosi-oa-Tunya (The Smoke That Thunders) plunging a misty 590 feet into the narrow Batoka Gorge below.

See The Big Five And Victoria Falls

Zambia is named after the Zambezi River, the fourth biggest in Africa, and is a completely landlocked nation. The country is renowned for its copper and emeralds, as well as the famous Victoria Falls, which at 5,600 feet wide is double the height of Niagara Falls, and the largest curtain of falling water in the world. All of Africa’s Big Five (lion, leopard, elephant, rhino, and buffalo) can be found here, as well as an array of adventure activities, including white water rafting, canoeing, helicopter flights, and bungee jumping, just to name a few.

Zambia is also home to a couple of really special “orphanages.” Chimfunshi Wildlife Orphanage is a chimpanzee sanctuary home to around 130 adult and young chimps, and the Game Rangers International Elephant Orphanage rescues, rehabilitates, and releases orphaned elephant calves. Both are worth a visit if you have the opportunity.

2. Malawi

Malawi is often referred to as “The Warm Heart of Africa” because of the friendliness of its people. This sub-Saharan landlocked country is nestled between Zambia, Tanzania, and Mozambique.

Lake Malawi, a UNESCO World Heritage Site, is the second largest lake in Africa (the largest is Lake Tanganyika in neighboring Zambia). The lake is surrounded by sandy tropical beaches and boasts countless bays and islands. Its crystal clear waters are home to over 600 rare species of fish — making it perfect for snorkeling, boating, and scuba diving. But Malawi is more than its diverse natural landscapes. Travelers could spend weeks here exploring.

Here are some of the top places to visit in Malawi.

Lilongwe

Travelers often skip African cities for the wilderness, but Malawi’s capital has a number of activities and attractions to keep you occupied. Shoppers will love the many local markets. Alternatively, a hike up Nkhoma Mountain will earn you panoramic views over the city. A visit to the Lilongwe Wildlife Centre, the country’s only animal sanctuary, is a must.

Lake Malawi National Park

The tropical waters of Lake Malawi are teeming with colorful fish, sandy beaches, and rocky islands.

Majete Wildlife Reserve

This is a great place to spot the Big Five and at the same time support a conservation success story. Poachers and human encroachment had destroyed the wildlife in the park, but in 2003, the non-profit conservation group African Parks partnered with the Malawi Department of National Parks and Wildlife and reintroduced black rhinos, lions, giraffes, and more. Almost two decades later, flourishing wildlife brings visitors to the park.

The Shire Highlands

Visit southern Malawi where farmers grow tea and coffee. First cultivated here by the British in the 1900s, tea plants thrive in the elevation of the Shire Highlands thanks to its cooler climate. Tour Satemwa Tea and Coffee Estate and relax with a cup of earthy oolong or natural-processed arabica.

Mt. Mulanje

Fit and adventurous travelers can organize 4-day treks 9,824 feet up the slopes of Mt. Mulanje with local guides.

Liwonde National Park

Here you’ll find hippos and crocodiles in the Shire River, and elephants, zebras, kudus, leopards, and lions on the nearby plains.

3. Cape Verde

A stunning volcanic island chain, Cape Verde (also called Cabo Verde) comprises 10 islands and 5 islets 310 miles off the coast of West Africa, of which Sal and Boa Vista are the most known to tourists — predominantly for their beaches. Besides Sal and Boa Vista, there are eight other islands: Santiago, Fogo, São Vicente, Santo Antão, Maio, Brava, Luzia, and São Nicolau. Cape Verde is famous for its warm tropical climate, volcanic islands, wonderful musicians, and delicious cuisine. Americans may not have heard much about Cape Verde, but for many Europeans, the islands are a popular winter escape that’s relatively close to home.

The Cape Verde islands have no shortage of activities: driving tours of the sand dunes, hiking, water sports that include kite surfing and diving, and of course, lovely secluded white sand and black sand beaches. The Cape Verde islands are also rich in culture and festivals.

What Each Island Offers

Each of the islands has its own charm. Santo Antão is home to stunning nature, mountains, and lush vegetation, Fogo is known for its volcano, and São Vicente is the cultural heart of the archipelago. Maio, Brava, and São Nicolau are hardly visited and are great places to discover authentic Cape Verdean culture. Santa Luzia is uninhabited, and Santiago, the main island, has a bit of everything. Island hopping is a great way to experience the Republic of Cabo Verde.

Pro Tip: The islands are home to the third-largest population of nesting loggerhead turtles. Sal is one of the three islands where most of the turtles nest. From July to October, you can spot these creatures as they come on land to nest.

4. Senegal

The West African nation of Senegal, officially the Republic of Senegal, offers a unique blend of bustling urban markets, beautiful beaches, and wonderful nature reserves. This former French colony has several major cities, including the capital Dakar and the historic Saint-Louis, as well as over 300 miles of coastline on the Atlantic Ocean. Northern Senegal is famous for its birdlife with many sanctuaries and reserves, including the Djoudj National Bird Sanctuary, which attracts birdwatchers from all over the world.

Dakar

The capital of Senegal is home to numerous African art museums and monuments to enjoy — be sure to pass by the curious Soviet-style African Renaissance Monument and the acclaimed Museum of African Arts. Be sure to also visit Plage de Virage, a popular spot with local surfers.

Gorée Island

Just off the coast of Dakar is Gorée Island, home to Maison des Esclaves and its Door of No Return, a museum and memorial to the victims of the Atlantic slave trade. Many African Americans like to visit the place for the history it holds.

Saint-Louis

In 1659, French traders established Saint-Louis on the island of Ndar. The town was the former colonial capital of Senegal and is steeped in history. In 2000, the old town was recognized as a UNESCO World Heritage Site. As you cross the Faidherbe Bridge from the mainland, it’s like stepping back in time, as you find yourself surrounded by Saint-Louis’ colorful crumbling colonial buildings and sandy streets.

Pro Tip: The Saint-Louis Jazz Festival attracts musicians from all over the world. Founded in 1993, this is one of the largest jazz festivals in Africa and takes place each year in April and May.

Touba

The attractions at Touba are somewhat different from elsewhere in the rest of the country. The town is home to the colossal Great Mosque, looming minarets, and countless other pilgrimage shrines and attractions.

5. Lesotho

The amazing, high-altitude, landlocked mountain kingdom of Lesotho, is completely encircled by South Africa and crisscrossed by a network of rivers and mountain ranges. This unique African country is known for its breathtaking scenery, which includes snow-capped mountain ranges during the winter.

Visiting Lesotho, the sky seems to stretch away forever, with beautiful, dramatic clouds that seem to stretch up to incredible heights before releasing showers of rain in the distance. Streams cascade down mountainsides, and rivers wind around foothills and mountains before forming fantastic gorges. Spectacular sunsets are the order of the day, especially as you often find yourself looking down on the clouds.

Perfect For Nature Lovers

This mystical country has many attractions for nature lovers. Visit the Maletsunyane Falls, hike to Lesotho’s highest point, Thabana Ntlengana, experience the Mohale Dam, and journey to the Kome caves that hold thousands of years of history. The Sehlabathebe National Park in the Maloti Mountains boasts rich plant, animal, and bird life, and if you’re lucky, you’ll spot the rare bearded vulture here. Lesotho also hosts the Roof of Africa motorcycle rally annually and is home to the world’s longest commercial single-drop abseil, the world’s highest pub, the Sani Top Chalet (9,430 feet above sea level), and Afriski, Sub-Saharan Africa’s only ski resort.

Lesotho is one of Africa’s most intriguing and rewarding off-the-beaten-track gems. With its lowest point at 4,593 feet, the country differs from most of its African counterparts, with a cooler climate, snowy winters, and dramatic summer storms. Lesotho remains a country largely untouched by development and tourism, and one of the most unique and exotic places to visit on the continent.

Whether it’s unexpected beach breaks, once-in-a-lifetime experiences in the Saharan drylands, or city-hopping across different nations, there is surely no shortage of landmarks to be visited in Africa.

Twenty-twenty-two was my year for checking off bucket list items! I was finally able to take the 3-week tour my family and I had booked for early 2020: Egypt and Jordan. I had always wanted to see the pyramids, and I was so excited to finally visit in July of this year.

Egypt

After traveling for almost 2 days, we arrived in Cairo. It was nighttime and difficult to see anything out of the tour bus windows. We went to sleep immediately after arriving at our hotel, Steigenberger Cairo Pyramids. In the morning, I woke up, walked to the sliding doors, and pulled back the curtains. There was a pyramid, staring at me In all its morning sun glory! My heart pounded and I ran out to the balcony! It was like a rush! I was finally here, and my first view was of the pyramids! It was truly amazing, and I was awestruck.

Later that day we toured them and had our requisite photo taken with a camel. We dined that night in a rooftop restaurant overlooking Cairo while women baked pita bread in front of us. It was a dream. 

After the pyramids, I found myself thinking I had seen everything that I had wanted to see all my life. But then we took a 5-day Nile cruise. It was incredible! We stopped at each temple on the way. Each pharaoh built his own temple, and they were situated on the water. We would stop at each one, disembark, and go visit with our own tour guide. Some we saw during the day and some were lit in the evening. All of them were incredible and truly put the pyramids to shame. It was truly the trip of a lifetime!

Editor’s Note: Considering a Nile River cruise? Don’t miss Ulrike Lemmin-Woolfrey’s Everything You Need To Know Before Embarking On A Nile River Cruise.

Jordan

Jordan was so much like Israel: Desert and beautiful with brown houses and hotels built into the

sides of the mountains. Great civilian poverty together with rich ancient wealth. We stayed in The Old Village Resort overlooking the city by Petra. Eager for the next day, we all stood outside and marveled at the twinkling lights, feeling incredibly lucky to be there. 

Petra was wonderous and well worth the travel. We felt like we were in the Indiana Jones movies walking through the caverns on dusty paths, twisting and winding for a long time until bam! There was the Treasury! The infamous carved building you remember from the movie. You are not allowed inside, but you can scramble up the opposite side of the mountain and take photos. 

Our Jordanian tour guide informed us that it was built from the top of the mountain, down the cliff, like rappelling off the side of a mountain. The artists were hoisted and sat in swings for hours as they carved. It was a marvel and testimony to man to be able to envision and consummate that building. 

The city of Petra continued further, and our guide told us of The Monastery, which was built 950 feet high, the furthest building in Petra. We walked through the old city, which is now only inhabited during the day by vendors, who sell souvenirs, food, and water. We ran into other people from our tour and someone said, “Hey let’s try to walk to the top of the Monastery.” Eight of us started off. Not many endeavor to accomplish this rough, hard hike so high. The path was so narrow and switched back and forth. Some tourists paid for a donkey to ride up to the top. This was scary as the path was very precarious. One slip and you would fall very, very far down the mountain, with no hope of surviving. 

Incredibly, there were vendors with little shops set up along the terraced side of the mountain! We could purchase water (remember this was July!) and keep walking. We lost only one member of our group, who had to stop hiking and wait for us under a vendor’s cool tarp. We continued up the mountain, stopping to catch our breath several times. The last vendor encouraged us, “You’re almost there.” We turned the corner and stopped. We looked and saw a restaurant far away. We all looked at each other. We really climbed all this way for this?

We walked toward the restaurant, and behold! Immediately to our right around another corner was the magnificent, huge façade of an ancient building with many intricate columns and moldings. This was several times the importance and size of the Treasury. We whooped and hollered that we made it that far, congratulating ourselves and taking photos. It was quite the accomplishment! If you ever get a chance to go, make time and bring good shoes so you can climb to the Monastery!

Dead Sea

The last great bucket list item on our trip was a dip in the Dead Sea. We drove there and had a day pass($60 USD) at the Holiday Inn Dead Sea Resort. They have a private beach on the Dead Sea. It was really cool because we could swim in their pool afterward. A day pass is the way to go because you cannot spend more than 10 minutes in the Dead Sea as the salt content is so high. 

When we arrived, I could not wait to jump in the water. In deference to their Muslim culture, I had brought a modest swimsuit and I waded out. The water was not cool but it was not hot, either. I laid on my back and could not believe my own buoyancy! You really do float. I had brought my book to show that I could float and read without treading water. This was the end of our 3-week tour with E.F. Tours and our group of tourists had bonded so much, we played in that water like it was a pool party!

Pro Tip: Many people ask if I felt safe during my tour, and I would resoundingly say YES! There is a certain safety in a group tour. I would recommend a tour group because the cultures in these locations are so different from ours. Our tour leader stayed with us and became a friend to all. She lived there and guided us confidently. She was interesting and helpful. To me, this part of the world is so foreign and mysterious. I would encourage you to visit.

Want more bucket list trip inspiration? See all our bucket list content here.

If you haven’t heard of Venezuela’s Angel Falls, just picture a real-life Indiana Jones adventure deep in the jungles of South America, and you’ll be off to a good start. Buried deep in the heart of the southeastern jungles of Venezuela is a natural marvel so phenomenal that it has to be seen to be believed. Angel Falls, the highest waterfall in the world, explodes from the top of a pink-hued mesa thousands of feet above an emerald-colored jungle and plummets dramatically into a churning pool of water below. The waterfall, located within Canaima National Park, is impressive in its own right, but what makes it even more special is that it takes passion and determination to get there.

Named not for the celestial being, but for Jimmy Angel, an American bush pilot who crashed his airplane atop the sandstone-capped mesa in the 1930s, Angel Falls has always been a mysterious and mesmerizing place. The mesa, Auyantepui, is buried in lush wilderness with no road access. The only way to see the falls today is from the air, by boat trip up the river through Devil’s Canyon, or by a short hike to the viewpoint of the falls.

It is the trip of a lifetime. However, as with most things that are once-in-a-lifetime, it requires a bit of extra legwork to make happen. Still, for those with the drive to see this natural marvel, the experience is absolutely worth the work.

TRAVEL ADVISORY: The U.S. State Department has Venezuela listed as Level 4: Do Not Travel. We strongly advise that you read their report before considering a trip to Venezuela at this time.

Where Is Angel Falls?

Angel Falls (Salto Ángel in Spanish) is located within Canaima National Park in the Gran Sabana region of Bolívar state. Spanning more than 11,500 square miles in the wilderness of southern Venezuela, the park is a UNESCO World Heritage site and one of the most impressive places in the world. The majority of Canaima is covered with table mountain formations with breathtaking cliffs and beautiful, arching waterfalls, including Angel Falls, which, at 3,000 feet, is the world’s highest waterfall.

Canaima National Park sits on the southeastern border of Venezuela near Guyana (another destination that is definitely worth a Google search!) and Brazil. It is difficult to reach, but its remoteness is part of what makes it so attractive.

Fun Fact: Before it was known as Angel Falls, indigenous Pemon people called it Kerepakupai Merú or Parekupa Vena. In the Pemon language, Kerepakupai Merú means “waterfall of the deepest place,” while Parakupá Vená means “the fall from the highest point.”

How Do You Get To Angel Falls?

First, it’s important to note that it is not possible to reach Angel Falls by car, since there are no roads in the area. The most popular way to visit the Falls is by flying to the town of Canaima, Venezuela. There are no direct flights to Canaima from Caracas, Venezuela — you must first fly to Ciudad Bolívar, Venezuela, or Puerto Ordaz, Venezuela.

Angel Falls Package Tours

Purchasing a package tour that includes the trek to the falls, as well as accommodations, flights, and meals, is the easiest and most cost-effective way to see the natural marvel. Most visitors who visit Canaima do so through these package tours. The tours that include airfare are the most convenient for travelers, since flights tend to sell out far in advance.

Angel-Eco Tours

Booking your tour in advance is key and there are many tour companies to choose from. One that consistently receives good reviews is Angel-Eco Tours, which offers a three-day, two-night Canaima National Park experience. The tour includes assistance getting to and from Canaima from Caracas. On the first two days, visitors tour other sights in the area, and on the third day, they depart for the falls in a motorized canoe from Ucaima Port. The tour features moderate hikes to nearby lookout points. If you’re looking for something more adventurous and challenging, Angel-Eco Tours also offers a nine-day trek that includes Angel Falls and a visit to Roraima, Brazil.

Osprey Expeditions

Osprey Expeditions is another highly rated tour operator that offers treks to Angel Falls and other popular vantage points along the way. The company also assists with airport transfers to and from Canaima.

Hotel Package

Another way to visit the falls is to go through a lodge. Wakü Lodge is one of the better boutique lodges in the region and offers customized packages for visiting Angel Falls. Many of these packages include airfare to and from Puerto Ordaz.

Flyover Tour

You can also book a flyover tour of the falls if the boat ride is too much of a time commitment.

When Is The Best Time To Visit?

Again, we advise you to read the U.S. State Department’s advisory on traveling to Venezuela at this time.

The busiest months of the year to visit Angel Falls are July, August, November, December, and January. This is when prices go up considerably, and you’ll be competing for the picturesque views with other visitors. Visitors who want to make a flyover tour can schedule them year-round, but if you’d like to visit on foot, you must arrive during the rainy season, from June through November. This is because the park has to ensure that the Carrao River level is high enough for the water to make it all the way to the falls. During the dry season between January and May, there aren’t any organized trips to the area, but the park is still accessible.

What Will You See At Angel Falls?

The height of the falls is reason enough to add them to your bucket list. Picture a plummet that is 16 times higher than Niagara Falls! Already you’re starting with something incredible. Beyond that, the Venezuelan waterfall sits in the heart of the wilderness, with no road access, making the adventure to get to it the trip of a lifetime. Buried in the misty, jade-hued jungle, Angel Falls explodes onto the scene, plunging from the mountain above. Most of the visitors to the falls get their first glimpse of them on the short trek from the river that brings all the boat tours in. You’ll emerge from the bush to see bright blue skies; majestic, rose-colored cliffs; and the impressive cascade gushing down the sheer rock face into the verdant valley below.

Where Should You Stay?

Wakü Lodge

Wakü Lodge is one of the most popular places to stay near Canaima National Park; it’s located near the lagoon offering views of the area’s seven waterfalls. There are 19 rooms, one suite, and each room has its own balcony. Wakü Lodge’s tour packages include flights to and from Canaima, lodging, sightseeing, expeditions, and all meals. Visitors can choose a full-day expedition to Angel Falls or an overnight option.

Campamento Canaima

Campamento Canaima is another option for visitors to the park with 120 rooms in stand-alone cottages overlooking the lagoon. The cottages come in doubles, triples, and quads, all with daily room service, hot water, private bathrooms, and spectacular views. A bar and lounge round out the facilities. The hotel offers day trips to the falls as well as flyover tours.

Jungle Rudy’s Ucaima Camp

Jungle Rudy’s Ucaima Camp is yet another lodge with packages for visiting the falls. There are five cabins with balconies, hammocks, private bathrooms, and more. A dining room and salon with a view round out the amenities. Ucaima also has two cabins near the falls for visitors who are making the overnight trip to see them. Both cabins offer outdoor grills and spectacular views of the falls. The lodge’s packages include various amenities, tour services, and extras like a welcome cocktail, insurance, and more.

What Else Is There To Do Near Angel Falls?

There are so many natural wonders and impressive sites on the way to Angel Falls that a trip to the falls is really the cherry on top. This part of Venezuela is home to undulating savannas, palm forests, rivers, towering cliffs, and table-top mountains called tepuis.

Canaima itself is a remote village — its biggest claim to fame is that it is the jumping-off point for exploring Angel Falls. However, the rest of Canaima National Park is beautiful and well worth exploring. At the center, the Laguna de Canaima (Canaima Lagoon), a reddish-colored reflective lagoon, features palm trees and pink sandy banks. The red and pink hues are due to tannins from decomposing plants over the decades. Seven stunning waterfalls tumble from the lagoon and most tours to Angel Falls include a short boat trip and hike that allow tour goers to explore these other falls as well.

The park is also home to Uruyén Canyon and the sacred Kavak Caves, which are thought to have been the site of mystic shaman ceremonies. Angel-Eco Tours offers hikes from Uruyén to Kavak or vice versa. The trip to the waterfalls of Kavak includes hiking, wading, and swimming in the canyons before reaching the powerful waterfalls that tumble in the distance. The hike from Uruyén to Kavak is about 5 miles and takes roughly 3 hours to complete at a leisurely pace. Accessing the caves requires an additional 1.5-mile walk on slightly steeper terrain.

Are you planning that dream European trip? What are the best things to do in Europe, those “once in a lifetime” things, to add to your bucket list? Everywhere you turn in Europe, there is something awesome to enjoy. From famous cities to beautiful villages, cultural attractions, museums, galleries, fabulous food, and fantastic scenery. What are the best things to do in Europe, if you could pick just a few?

Here are my top suggestions — some may be a little unexpected or unusual, but I firmly believe each of these activities deserves its place on my list of unforgettable things to do in Europe.

1. Eat On An Island Near Amsterdam

Eating at Vuurtoreneiland is no ordinary night out in Amsterdam. This is almost an adventurous mini-vacation! If you’re after a once-in-a-lifetime dinner experience, nothing comes close to Lighthouse Island. The island experience starts at the Lloyd Hotel, from where you sail on the historic IJveer XIII across to the small rugged island of Vuurtoreneiland, with just a lighthouse, an old abandoned fort, and a large greenhouse dining room.

The table d’hôte menu is prepared with regional products and old-fashioned cooking techniques. The ethos here is “eating in and from nature,” and a five-course set menu of the freshest regional produce is prepared and cooked entirely on open flames. The food is fantastic and the setting is glorious. During spring and summer, people eat in the summer restaurant, a transparent glass greenhouse, sheltered from wind and rain. In the colder months, dining is done in the winter restaurant, a more intimate and warm experience (with a fire and a blanket).

Vuurtoreneiland can only be reached by ship. The boat trip there and back, including dinner, takes about 5 hours.

Pro Tip: For reservations, use the online reservation portal, and I’d recommend booking at least 2 months in advance. In total, you will be looking at around $100, including the return boat trip, six-course menu, and the fee for contribution to monument maintenance. Add another $45 for wine pairings for your meal (non-alcoholic options are also available).

2. Bike Amsterdam’s Canals

While we’re in Amsterdam, let’s work off our delicious dinner at Vuurtoreneiland with a little exercise. This really is a city on two wheels and for residents, getting around by bicycle is a way of life. There aren’t many capital cities in Europe where you can just rent a bike and ride. Cycle along the famous canals like the Prinsengracht and catch a glimpse of the 17th-century canal houses or ride through Vondelpark, which is particularly beautiful in spring and fall. On two wheels, you’ll not only feel like a local, but you’ll also cover much more ground.

Pro Tip: Don’t forget to use hand signals when turning and don’t stop in the middle of the bike lanes, no matter how photographic the scenery is! If you forget, the locals will quickly remind you of the rules!

3. Walk On London’s Primrose Hill

London is famous for its parks. However, there’s something extra special about a stroll on Primrose Hill. It has a character all of its own and at the summit of this grassy hill are some spectacular views across London. The summit is almost 210 feet above sea level and the trees are kept low so they do not obscure the view.

On the way up, look out for an oak tree known as “Shakespeare’s Tree” first planted in 1864 to mark the 300th anniversary of Shakespeare’s birth. A large crowd of workmen marched through London to watch the planting ceremony. A replacement tree was re-planted in 1964.

Pro Tip: Time your walk for sunset and watch the sky glow orange over landmarks like Canary Wharf, the Millennium Wheel, and St. Paul’s Cathedral in the distance.

4. Enjoy Pintxos In San Sebastián

Spain’s San Sebastián (or Donostia to the local Basque people), is known for its excellent cuisine. Home to countless Michelin-starred restaurants, pintxo bars, food markets, and gourmet food shops, San Sebastián is often called the food capital of the world. Basque-style tapas are known as pintxos and are usually small pieces of bread, topped with a variety of ingredients.

These include anything from Spanish ham, fresh seafood, prawns, and anchovies, to cheese, chorizo, and wild mushroom croquettes. They’re usually speared with sticks and placed along the bar to accompany your drink. At the end of the night, your sticks are counted and you pay your bill. San Sebastián is the king of this style of eating.

Pro Tip: Gorriti Taberna is one of the best pintxos bars in town. It has an authentic neighborhood feel. Open from 7 a.m. to 10 p.m., Monday to Saturday, you should expect to spend about $2-3 per pintxo.

5. Walk In The Foothills Of The Italian Dolomites

The Italian Dolomites, a mountain range located in northeastern Italy, are one of Europe’s most beautiful alpine regions. In the winter months, they are a snowy winter wonderland, renowned for skiing. In summer, they are a mecca for mountain climbing and hiking.

The best months of the year to visit are from late spring and early summer (May-June) when the sun is shining but the temperature is cool enough that you can hike through the Dolomites comfortably, plus there are fewer tourists!

Pro Tip: Hiking trails here open mid-to-late May after the snow has melted. While self-guided hiking is entirely possible, 57 Hours offers a variety of guided hikes in the Dolomites, if you’d rather not go it alone. 

6. Body Scrub At A Hammam In Istanbul

A traditional Turkish hammam (public steam bath) is an unmissable experience for anyone visiting Istanbul. A “bath package” usually includes traditional body scrubbing with a handwoven wash cloth known as a kese, then a foam wash, followed by a massage. There’s no better hammam to visit in Istanbul than Kılıc Ali Pasa Hamam, an architectural masterpiece, the work of renowned Ottoman architect Mimar Sinan that dates back half a millennium.

The hammam was constructed between 1578 and 1583, to serve the forces of the Ottoman navy, reopening to the public in 2012, after a major restoration. Famous for its architectural lines and majestic dome, the Kılıc Ali Pasa Hamam is one of the most striking buildings in Tophane, Istanbul’s harbor district.

Pro Tip: The hammam is open to women in the morning and men in the afternoons. Visitors are provided with a peshtemal, a thin cotton towel to wrap themselves in, and a regular towel to use after bathing

7. One Of Europe’s Oldest Flea Markets In Barcelona

With a distinctive, undulating, reflective roof, designed by renowned architect Fermín Vázquez, Mercat dels Encants, dating back to around 1300, is Barcelona’s largest and best-known flea market. It is also one of Europe’s oldest. With 301 shops and nine restaurants, there’s a seemingly endless number of vendors to visit.

Take your time to explore what’s on offer. You’ll find everything from knick-knacks to gems like vintage furniture, clothes, and books. The furniture in the big hall, to the side of the market, is incredible and well worth a look. Saturday is the busiest day, so avoid it if you’re just a casual browser, and if you’re looking for real bargains, arrive early.

Pro Tip: Open hours are Monday, Wednesday, Friday, and Saturday, 9 a.m. to 8 p.m. Antique auctions take place Mondays, Wednesdays, and Fridays from 7 to 9 a.m., when the commercial buyers are there, and again at noon when the unsold goods drop in price. The market is meant to carry on until the afternoon but most stalls tend to pack up at midday.

8. Drive The Wild Atlantic Way In Ireland

A road trip that certainly deserves a place on your bucket list is Ireland’s Wild Atlantic Way. Driving from Malin Head in the north to Mizenhead in the south is an epic and beautiful drive along some of the most spectacular coastlines in the country.

It’s not a short route at 1,550 miles, but it’s worth it. Check out the Giant’s Causeway and The Dark Hedges in County Antrim, and Ballynahinch Castle in Galway, one of Ireland’s finest luxury castle hotels. Pull over to eat at Wild Honey Inn in County Clare, Ireland’s only Michelin-starred pub, located in a lovingly restored 19th-century inn, in the Burren National Park. There are some great beaches along the way, like Lough Swilly beach near Rathmullan House in Donegal, and Gurteen Beach in Connemara.

Pro Tip: If you take this route, you’ll also tick off the Ring of Kerry, the picturesque villages of Kenmare & Sneem, the Lakes of Killarney, and The Skellig Islands, which are one of the biggest draws of the Wild Atlantic Way.

9. Culinary Hike In The Austrian Mountains

If you’ve never heard of Vorarlberg, here’s one great reason why it should be on your European bucket list. Austria’s westernmost province offers its visitors the opportunity to combine hiking, in this picturesque location, with enjoying deliciously prepared dishes, in excellent restaurants, rustic inns, or local cheese cellars. The average walking time on the numerous routes is 3-5 hours, depending on which route you choose.

However, along the way, you get the chance to take a break and sample traditional Austrian food. On a typical day tour, you walk from breakfast to lunch and then on to dessert. Each course is served at a different Alpe (hut), mountain top inn, or restaurant, and the food definitely gives you the incentive to continue, and breaks up what is quite a workout! You can visit the Voralberg Culinary Hikes website to choose the route that appeals to you.

10. Prague’s Christmas Markets

There’s never a bad time of year to visit Prague — rain, hail, or shine, the city is so charming that the weather is just a backdrop. That being said, perhaps there is no better time of year to visit Prague than December. Christmas markets are wonderfully kitsch and “in-your-face-festive,” and nowhere seems to do them quite as well as Prague.

In the icy evenings, Old Town Square is illuminated with sparkling lights and an impossibly big, heavily adorned tree. The city comes to life with endless Christmas markets, street food, decorations, and of course, warming glühwein at stalls right in front of the medieval Prague Astronomical Clock. If you’re planning a winter escape in Europe, be sure to add Prague to your adventures.

Pro Tip: When your shopping is done, grab a drink at The American Bar in the basement of Tretter’s Municipal House. This is the oldest bar in Prague and the second oldest bar in Europe. Alternatively, try the hole-in-the-wall absinthe bar, Green Devil’s, which offers more than 100 absinthes from around the world, and whose doorway glows green, like a witch’s cauldron.

I hope these suggestions will come in handy when you are planning your next European vacation.

While we have loads of vacation rental recommendations, ranging from quaint cottages in the north to beaches in Florida, South Carolina, Hawaii, and beyond, we’re taking our picks a step further. It’s time for private island rentals!

Yes, that’s right — you can actually rent a private island and have it all to yourself, and we’ve compiled a list of 10 opportunities to do so, all available through Airbnb.com. Each of these islands comes highly rated with a good number of reviews, is the only rental on its respective island, and is in North America.

In the past, there have been a couple of different articles done about private islands, but these articles did not focus on places only in North America. Now, we’ve compiled a fresh list for you to pick from — and odds are, they’re closer to home. Happy vacationing!

Dog-Friendly Home on Private Island, Presque Isle, Wisconsin

Rent Now$1,285/nightly avg

Traveling with a larger party, a group of friends, or hosting a family gathering? This nice-sized home on a 4-acre island that sits on Katinka Lake offers over 2,100 feet of frontage and a granite walking path throughout. With space for up to 16 guests, this is a spacious home that welcomes your furry friends, too!

Note: There are limited railings and the terrain is uneven, something to consider for those with mobility issues. You will also need something to get you across the water. The host can help you secure a pontoon rental if needed.

Bedrooms: 3

Bathrooms: 4

Sleeps: 16

Stunning Log Cottage On Island In Muskoka, Gravenhurst, Ontario

Rent Now$527/nightly avg

This stunning log cottage is just 30 feet from your private dock and waterside deck on an island located in Muskoka. You will love the warm feeling you get in this beautifully decorated cottage that comes with a fully equipped kitchen, laundry, and whirlpool tub.

Outside, you can enjoy the many seating areas that include a hammock and large covered porch that offers beautiful lake views. A canoe and paddle boat are provided for you, but the host recommends you either bring or rent a boat to best enjoy full access to the lake. Note: Weather can occasionally keep you from being able to leave the island for short periods of time, so be prepared prior to your visit.

Bedrooms: 3

Bathrooms: 2

Sleeps: 6

Private Island Cottage On Gull Lake, Richland, Michigan

Rent Now$428/nightly avg

This quaint cottage known as the Island Haus is on a private island that’s a wonderful spot for relaxing and making forever memories. Accessible via a private pedestrian bridge, this is a perfect spot for couples to enjoy some privacy or for families to enjoy together. Located on Gull Lake, you will love the over 600 feet of water frontage, hanging out by the fire pit, or relaxing in the hammock.

Beach towels, two paddle boards, five kayaks, a propane grill, and lots of amenities in the kitchen are provided for your use. If the weather fails to cooperate at any time, take advantage of one of the two screened-in patios or spend some time lounging in the living room that has a smart TV. This one has so much to offer — definitely worth a look!

Bedrooms: 3

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 6

Rustic Cabin On Private Island, Nym Lake, Ontario, Canada

Rent Now$248/nightly avg

Located on Nym Lake, this 1.2-acre island with a rustic private cabin is waiting for you. Featuring Voyageur-inspired decor, a stone fireplace, and a lakeview screened-in porch, you’ll create great memories here at the firepit or watching sunsets on the private dock. The photos posted by the host on the listing suggest amazing views — definitely worth checking out!

Bedrooms: 2

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 6

The Paddle Inn On Heron Hideaway Island, Cassadaga, New York

Rent Now$240/nightly avg

This brand-new cottage, known as the Paddle Inn on Heron Hideaway Island, offers abundant privacy and endless outdoor adventure along with a charming interior. You can head out to the back deck to go fishing, swim in the lake, relax on the covered porch, and take in all the nature you would like while staying in this cute red cabin.

There is a canoe and two kayaks available for your use, as well as a microwave, refrigerator, coffee maker, electric burner, crock pot, dishes, and more!

Bedrooms: 2

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 4

Entire Island With Tiny House Cabin, Swansboro, North Carolina

Rent Now$239/nightly avg

This tiny cabin sits on a completely private island that offers 360 degrees of shoreline, a 40-foot private dock, heat, air-conditioning, and even a boat if you need one! You will also have access to four kayaks, a fire pit, a charcoal barbecue, and a generator. There is even a licensed captain who can get you to and from the island — included in your booking — if you have that need. The host recommends that you prepare for this trip as though you are preparing to camp in a tent — just to be safe.

There are several marinas and a town just across the waterway if you want to leave for dinner or other vacation activities. 

Bedrooms: 1

Bathrooms: 2

Sleeps: 4

Four Seasons Cottage On Private Island, Sioux Narrows-Nestor Falls, Ontario, Canada

Rent Now$226/nightly avg

Situated on a private 10-acre island, this gorgeous four-season cottage is accessible by boat in the summer months and a private ice road during the winter months. This cabin, located in what many consider the “deep north,” comes equipped with fresh linens, kitchen cooking supplies, and more. The photos offer a great view of just how cool this island is. Be sure to read the entire listing to get a full understanding of some of the critters you may encounter during your stay!

Bedrooms: 1

Bathrooms: 2

Sleeps: 4

Rustic Cottage On Private Island, Mallorytown, Ontario, Canada

Rent Now$223/nightly avg

You’re gonna need a boat, as this island is boat-access only. This rustic cottage sits on a pink granite rock island on the St. Lawrence River, offering you peaceful living with boating, fishing, swimming, and more! You will be a short boat ride from the 1,000 Island National Park in this small but well-equipped cottage.

You will have electricity, but there is no running water — so be prepared. The host does supply bottled water, and the kitchen includes a small refrigerator, a wine refrigerator, a small oven, and several other amenities. Note: Read the full description carefully so you can be best prepared for this awesome island experience. 

Bedrooms: 1

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 4

Private Island Retreat Cabin, New Franklin, Ohio

Rent Now$218/nightly avg

Built in 1917, this historic waterfront cabin is a private island retreat! There is one private bedroom with a second bedroom in the open area of the cottage. This island is accessible by land, and there are restaurants and bars within walking and boating distance.

You can bring a boat or you can rent a boat. The host also offers kayak rentals and private boat tours. There is firewood available as well as a gas grill. Book your stay soon!

Bedrooms: 2

Bathrooms: 2

Sleeps: 4

To discover more bucket list travel destinations, check out:

• 22 Luxurious Vacation Rentals To Experience Throughout The U.S.
• Joshua Tree’s Glass House Offers Dramatic Desert Views
• 12 Extravagant Mykonos Villa Rentals You Need To Check Out

Disclosure: TravelAwaits selects the listings in our articles independently. Some of the listings in this article contain affiliate links.

Africa is a mass producer of that most precious of human capabilities: memory-making. If you are looking for a canopy of millions of twinkling stars in the wildest of places to add to your memory bank, look no further than these treehouse and “star bed” destinations in South Africa. And they are not short on luxury either! 

1. Lion Sands, Kingston Treehouse

Sabi Sand Game Reserve

A hot day in December marks my umpteenth trip to the glorious surrounds of the wild and all it has to offer in the form of The Lion Sands River Lodge in the Sabi Sands Reserve. This 65,000-hectare (160,600-acre) reserve borders the world-famous Kruger National Park in the Limpopo and Mpumalanga provinces of South Africa. After a brief tête-à-tête with the blasted GPS taking us to the wrong gate, we arrive at River Lodge just shy of 4 p.m. 

The following day we are dropped off in the middle of nothing at Kingston Treehouse to spend the night. We make our way through rows of magnificent white boulders and across a small drawbridge, and there we find Africa unfolding in front of us. Set amid the pure and untouched nature, we are completely isolated and surrounded by the wild. Kingston is equipped with full bathroom and shower facilities to complete this sensory experience.

The most striking feature of the Kingston Treehouse experience is without a doubt its construction, employing large sheets of glass combined with wood to a spectacular effect. The contemporary decor inside seduces with understated greys and whites. A massive double bed occupies the top half with the lower deck functioning as a lounge/dining/outlook area. It is surrounded by natural boulders, with a unique window to enjoy the ever-changing views.

And no matter what the weather has in store, guests will always have a safe and luxurious setting with a unique window to enjoy the ever-changing views. The tree house towers above the treeline and far below roam all things wild. The staff chuckle at our amazed expressions and then wave goodbye as they pull up the draw bridge. Then we are utterly alone. There is no electricity, of course, and no cell phone reception. We are left with a walkie-talkie in case of emergency but you are actually perfectly safe. Between giddy gasps of wonder, we take photographs.

As the day fades to night, we light the lanterns and then settle down to dinner as what seems like a thousand birds serenade us. We have our own “picnic basket” consisting of a feast of smoked turkey baguettes, biltong and feta pate, salads and cheeses, and for dessert a marshmallow and chocolate fondue! This is all accompanied by some excellent South African wines.

In the distance, we hear lions roar. Later a shy moon appears from the clouds high above us among a million stars and all is right with the world. Together with the slight wind, the feeling of aloneness comes and goes like an ancient echo, like the excitement that comes with the unknown. We chat late into the night, speculating about what could be the cause of each night sound or rumble in the jungle we hear all around and beneath us.

We are collected mid-morning and driven back to the lodge from where we depart. I go through the perfunctory motions, but I feel as though I am sleep-walking, still in a state of animated bliss, my mind and soul held hostage by the once-in-a-lifetime experience I just had.

2. Tswalu, Naledi

Kalahari

The big sky is swollen with bulging dark grey clouds and the visceral smell of Africa infuses me like a long-lost elixir as soon as I arrive at Tswalu, South Africa’s largest private game reserve. It covers an area of over 100,000 hectares (247,000 acres) and it is a sensory revelation. It takes us about 20 minutes to get to the lodge, and from the moment I step into the opulent yet consciously understated reception area and lounge, I know this is not your common-or-garden game lodge. 

The décor and ambiance resonate all that is Africa in terms of color, design, tactile fabric, and proportion. It is outrageously luxurious and remote, located in the so-called “green Kalahari” in the Northern Cape. Currently with only two camps, The Motse and Tarkuni, Tswalu accommodates just 30 people and has the lowest guest footprint in South Africa. The staff members are hand-picked; this is clear. They are discreet and genuinely helpful, but more importantly, they exude an inner friendliness that cannot be taught.

Tswalu’s new back-to-nature star bed experience in the Korannaberg Mountains is Tswalu’s answer to a “treehouse”. It is elevated above a valley with wraparound views, and if you wish to sleep beneath the southern Kalahari Desert’s brilliant blanket of stars in safety and seclusion, you cannot ask for better. Naledi is designed as a romantic sleep-out experience for two adults but is also ideal for a family of four. Everything has been carefully considered so that you have all you need for a comfortable stay.

And don’t think for a moment you’ll be “roughing it.” Guests sleep under a blanket of stars while cocooned in Egyptian cotton on king-size beds. Naledi is a solid structure with a thatched cover, and the natural wooden deck provides the perfect place to unwind.

This is a truly immersive and secluded safari experience, where the sounds of the wild are amplified. Upon arrival, we are treated to drinks and canapes, and a chef prepares a gourmet meal, delivered straight to the deck picnic-style. A few steps from the main Naledi deck is an open-air shower, basin, and toilet on its own timber platform, providing comfort throughout the stay.

A private guide will leave guests with a fully charged, two-way handheld radio for remaining in contact should they need assistance at any time. The night brings with it the haunting sounds of Africa’s desert and is simply blissful. The next morning, breakfast treats accompany warming mugs of coffee, tea, and hot chocolate.

Tswalu Naledi is an astonishing experience that you are unlikely to ever forget. 

3. Tsala Treetop Lodge

Plettenberg Bay

Amidst the treetops of an age-old indigenous forest, Tsala is a lavish celebration of the spirit of Africa. It is ideally situated between the coastal towns of Knysna and Plettenberg Bay in the Western Cape, and traveling there along the Garden Route is a dream.

Tsala’s massive stone-masonry entrance flanked by water leads to a magnificent foyer like something out of an ancient African civilization. The diverse cultures of Africa informed the elaborate afro-baroque decor’s earthy colors, rich textures, and handcrafted fittings, yet everything is somehow simultaneously very sophisticated.

We are warmly greeted at reception and shown to our “house in the sky.” It is truly one of the most romantic spots in the entire world. The 10 treehouse villas are secluded and beautifully furnished, each equipped with its very own splash pool. The tree-house suites are constructed of stone, wood, and glass and comprise of a plush bedroom, an elegant sitting room with a cozy fireplace, and a spacious bathroom fit for royalty. 

Built high above the forest floor to complement the style and architecture of Tsala are six lavish two-bedroomed villas, styled with sophistication and modern touches for pure luxury. A large lounge with a fireplace and dining area and a forest-facing private deck and infinity pool ensure you have everything you need and more for the perfect family escape.

All Tsala’s rooms also have complimentary Wi-Fi, a fireplace, a hairdryer, a personal in-room safe, bathrobes, slippers, international adaptors, umbrellas, laundry and pressing services, fully stocked minibars, tea and coffee making facilities, and under-floor heating and air-conditioning. In other words, the full five-star experience…

And the food, oh the food! Meals at Tsala are exquisitely presented in their glass-walled dining room or at the renowned Zinzi Restaurant. But if you choose, as we did, you may be served dinner in the privacy of your plush cocoon on top of the world. 

For guests wanting to enjoy the morning sunshine with breakfast, a spectacular dining deck, suspended above the forest floor, is the perfect spot. There are also loads of activities on offer in the area such as golf, fishing, boat trips, whale and bird watching, bungy jumping, sky diving, and diving with sharks. Or just lap up your glorious surrounds with a book and a glass of wine. And luxuriate in an in-room massage later, perhaps. Which is exactly what I did…. 

4. &Beyond Ngala

Kruger National Park

World-famous Kruger National Park teems with wildlife and is especially famous for the so-called Big Five — lion, elephant, African buffalo, leopard, and rhino. 

Situated on the border of Kruger National Park, &Beyond Ngala Private Game Reserve offers a wild experience bar none at their Ngala Treehouse. The reserve is home to several large lion prides, and its packs of the endangered African wild dog may also be spotted moving through the reserve. Guests enjoy exclusive game drives and bush walks on 14,700 hectares (36,000 acres) of private wilderness land. One might understandably be leery of spending a night alone in a place where things may want to eat you. But fear not!

Even though this is a remote overnight retreat, it offers guests the ultimate (and very safe!) sleep-out experience beneath the stars. The four-level treehouse sits cocooned in a pristine bush setting and features a choice of two sleeping areas — an enclosed and weatherproof bedroom with a king-sized bed, hot running shower, and flushing toilet on the third level, or an elevated sleep-out platform set beneath a retractable awning on the rooftop.

We arrived in time to toast the sunset with cocktails and snacks after our late-afternoon game drive. A tapas-style picnic dinner was then set up in the safety of an enclosed boma beneath the stars, and goodness, was it delicious! We were left in luxurious solitude for the night, provided with a radio and mobile phone for use in case of inclement weather or other emergencies. 

At one point I could swear I heard a buffalo snorting beneath us, but it may as well have been a leopard for all I know. It was thrilling. I got up for a midnight snack and to stare at the stars. 

While the Treehouse does not offer a full kitchen, a stocked bar and selection of midnight and breakfast snacks, as well as a coffee station, are available for guests. The Treehouse is solar-powered, allowing guests to charge their camera batteries and other appliances. Ngala Treehouse can cater for a maximum of two adults and two children ages 10 to 16 in the two sleeping areas, one of which is the open sleep-out platform.

5. Jaci’s Tree Lodge

Naledi & Madikwe

Jaci’s Tree Lodge’s founder and owner, Jan van Heteren, was profoundly inspired by the Okavango Delta’s characteristically intimate, secluded, luxury camps that seem to grow organically from the earth. These lodges are often built to sit high on stilts and with a focus on ecological construction, they blend seamlessly into their environment. As a result, Jaci’s Tree Lodge is the realization of Jan’s dream — an elevated lodge that appears to float above the ground

Guests are luxuriously accommodated in custom-built treehouse-style suites, boasting magnificent views into the surrounding riverine forest as well as glimpses across the famous Marico River. The Treehouse Suites blend effortlessly into the overarching canopy of lush foliage, making for fantastic birdwatching in a natural environment.

Upon arrival, guests are warmly welcomed at the recently refurbished Jaci’s Tree Lodge Main Lodge, which provides a cool retreat from the heat of African summer days and a cozy fireside sanctuary during chilly winter months. Each of the eight double-occupancy treehouse-style suites features a private outdoor shower, indoor bath, and private viewing decks. Each suite is decorated with Jaci’s trademark African vibrancy, complemented by modern elements, eco-friendly amenities, and a focus on privacy.

The custom-built stilted structures are connected by elevated walkways. The food and service is unbeatable, and the game drives will leave you in awe with so many animal sightings. 

You can also experience a sleep-out under the stars at Jaci’s Naledi Treehouse (not to be confused with the other Naledi). Naledi — meaning “star” in Tswana — is kitted out with a canopied king-size bed and your very own private KolKol wood-fired hot tub! There is an environmentally-friendly toilet, outdoor shower, and exceptional watering hole viewing deck.

This romantic sleep-out experience, enjoyed under starlight and the cover of an impressive tamboti tree, is certainly worthy of a top spot on every safari lover’s bucket list! You are guaranteed to come away from this experience a new person. 

Please note that most star-bed hosts require that you spend at least one night at one of their permanent lodges in addition to your star-bed experience. Contact them for more information.

It can sometimes be a challenge to come up with new and interesting vacation ideas, so when the notion of “houseboats you can actually stay in” came up, my interest definitely piqued. What’s not to like about this unique opportunity to stay on the Bay Area water in beautiful Sausalito?

Described by one of our TravelAwaits scribes as “a laid-back town with a Mediterranean vibe,” there are lots of great things to do while enjoying this amazing destination, including taking a trip on the ferry, hiking in Angel Island State Park, a trip to check out the Bay Model Visitor Center, and so much more!

This list was pulled together cautiously — all of these San Francisco Bay area options are very highly rated with lots of reviews. While this is always part of our criteria, this was especially important given the limited number of houseboats in Sausalito available to rent. So please turn on Otis Redding’s (Sittin’ On The) Dock Of The Bay and enjoy — every one of these looks pretty amazing!

The Yellow Ferry | $825/nightly avg

If you subscribe to the “go big or go home” philosophy, you’re going to want to take a few minutes to check out The Yellow Ferry, touted by the hosts as one of the world’s most spectacular homes. Formerly known as the SS City of Seattle, originally launched in 1888, The Yellow Ferry combines luxury and convenience on the open water in 2,500 square feet of space — including a 1,000 square foot great room that is divided into separate dining and lounging areas. You truly have to see this one to believe it. Note: The Yellow Ferry is part of a tight-knit houseboat community and not available for birthday parties, cocktail parties, weddings, business retreats, or other large gatherings.

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (73 Reviews)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 6 Guests
• Bedrooms: 3
• Bathrooms: 2

Top guest reviews

• Generally, our stay was fantastic! There were, however a few little issues that could’ve made the stay from a 3.5 to a 5! The upstairs toilet could not take any toilet paper. If there was any, it would flood to the rim. Downstairs bathroom, the lever stuck, thus having the water pump run for hours without our knowledge of it! The owner/property manager knocks on the door at 2:30am, assuming that we “left the shower on!” He then told me that he’ll meet me downstairs, through a connecting door only to realize that it was the toilet lever sticking up, allowing the water to run. Easy fix! Another issue, was the newly painted surface to the kayaks and paddleboards. Waited a day before we could go to the dock to access the water toys. It’s a strict check-in time, which we adhered to, but, when we got there, we couldn’t access the water, which we had planned on. The beauty of Sausilito, it’s ambience and the property was very beautiful. The kitchen was excellent! The fireplace and living room area is charming! The dining room area, we couldn’t open all the doors to take in the air of sunset. I would suggest to have the windows cleaned to have a nicer and clearer view. The bedrooms were nice but could use newer bedding and an update on the bedroom decor. Other than that, we had a wonderful stay at the Yellow Ferry! It is a very pretty property!
• Owners are responsive and helpful
• GREAT!
• This is an iconic houseboat in the Sausalito houseboat community and the space is just gorgeous. Huge, fully stocked kitchen with a Wolf range, everything was as promised in the description. I would recommend this for anyone who would like to experience a unique and wonderful lifestyle in a truly beautiful place.
• Thoroughly enjoyed this houseboat. All the comforts of home right on the water. Whenever we’re in SF we’ll be staying here!

View Deal on VRBO from $825

Floating Birder’s Paradise | $250/nightly avg

This gorgeous double-decker floating home has been updated with contemporary finishes. It offers 360-degree views of Richardson Bay, Tiburon, Mount Tamalpais, and San Francisco. Take in the panoramic views from the top deck. Cormorants, coots, ducks, egrets, geese, grebes, gulls, herons, loons, kingfishers, pelicans, plovers, sandpipers, and terns make this houseboat a veritable birder’s paradise. Two bikes are provided, which you can use on the nearby hiking/biking trails and cruise around town, or take the ferry into the city. Public transportation is within walking distance.

Dine at excellent nearby restaurants or grill up dinner on the boat’s barbecue — the kitchen has everything you need. The TV is ready with Netflix, etc. There is even a full-sized washer and dryer. Unfortunately, insurance prevents children from staying at this vacation rental as it is located directly on the water.

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (6 Reviews)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 4 Guests
• Bedrooms: 2
• Bathrooms: 1

Top guest reviews

• My wife and I stayed on the houseboat over a long weekend to celebrate our anniversary, and we’re sure glad we did. Holly was very generous and kind, and great to work with — and the houseboat itself was in great shape; well taken care of, and in a perfect setting off the beaten path. Sausalito does see its crazy amount of tourists, and my wife and I were shocked the first evening, while sitting on the porch, at how quiet it is! We were lucky and had great weather, albeit a little hot, but nothing a fan and open windows couldn’t handle! We look forward to returning — thanks again for everything!
• Had a great stay at the Boathouse at Xmas time. Really loved it,very comfortable and cosy and the owners even left us a xmas tree.!! Close enough to downtown Saulsalito for all the restaurants and stores and great to cycle to Mill Valley. Lovely views and great to watch the boats coming in and out of the marina nearby. House boat was immaculate and very clean, really enjoyed our stay. We will be again soon.
• The photos of this houseboat are beautiful but did not do justice to the incredibly lovely home we found. It is perfect with exceptional furniture and decorations, great shower and complete kitchen. We loved the location, great scenery, fascinating wild life and panoramic sunset views. It far exceeded our expectations. Wonderful base location for trips to S.F., Tiburon, Wine Country and to explore Sausalito and local area. Owners were so gracious and helpful and provided everything needed for our comfort.
• I come to the SF area every summer to visit family and the idea of staying on a houseboat in Sausalito appealed to me. After researching properties online and narrowing my search to 3-4 my sister graciously drove down to check out my choices before I booked.It soon became clear that this houseboat had everything I was looking for. The owners are wonderful; they were in touch before and during my visit – just to make sure all was going well.The house has been lovingly restored and living spaces are airy, with lots of natural light. All rooms are well furnished, comfortable and the kitchen is well appointed.Sausalito is a vibrant community, with lots to do and see. Restaurants and a grocery store are a short stroll away and you can easily walk downtown to restaurants, shopping and the SF ferry terminal.My 2 week stay was peaceful and relaxing in a way that only time on the water can be. I hope to stay here when I come to visit next summer!
• Highly recommend this beautiful property. We spent a romantic get-a-way on this well appointed and peaceful houseboat. Could not have relaxed more but with the best food and entertainment just a walk or ferryboat ride away. The best of both worlds. We could have spent all day and night just staying on the houseboat with no reason to leave. We did take liesurely strolls, eat at fine restaurants in town and also visit some of our favorite places in San Francisco. Friday was jazz and wine in the park with Sausilito residents. We would go back in a heartbeat. The owners are gracious and made us feel welcome. A lovely note and treat awaited us on arrival and they had all of the information we needed conveniently available.

View Deal on VRBO from $250

Floating Home On Richardson Bay | $285/nightly avg

This unique A-frame is a charming 2 bedroom houseboat that is just minutes from San Francisco and only an hour from Napa Valley. Relax in the large master bedroom that features hardwood floors, a fireplace, a large smart TV, and windows that look out to the bay. The fully equipped kitchen has a dining area for six and connects to a living room that has vaulted ceilings, skylights, a gas fireplace, and hardwood floors. Unwind on your spacious deck with some morning coffee or afternoon wine, then relax in the spa — so much to do in this beauty! Note: this is a 30-day minimum rental.

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (21 Reviews)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 4 Guests
• Bedrooms: 2
• Bathrooms: 2

Top guest reviews

• The owners Melinda and her husband gave us a tour of the house on our arrival, and they couldn’t have been nicer. The house was immaculate, and the kitchen and bathrooms seemed to be newly remodeled. The house was fully stocked both in the kitchen and bathrooms. The view of the Richardson Bay was beyond expectations and was fun to watch the tide go in and out. Hope to repeat next year.
• A beautiful A frame houseboat, with all the details you might need! fabulous hot tub, steam shower and easy access to the Sausalito/Mill Valley bike path. We would definitely stay again, this is the perfect spot to relax and be immersed in the beautiful nature of the region.
• We had the best time on the houseboat. Communication was quick and easy, the amenities were all you could want/need, and the boat was comfortable and lovely. My mom, sister and niece all agree it was the best vrbo accommodation and experience we’ve had.
• Sea Chalet is a 5 star property on the water! Absolutely beautiful and peaceful and such attention to detail! Perfect for your stay in the Bay area. Everything is perfect from the steam shower and heated bath floor to the linens to the deck with the hot tub to the fully stocked updated kitchen. Easy parking, close to the ferry to SF, close to downtown Sausalito, convenient to Mill Valley. Kayaking w/ the seals, hiking only 5 min. away, Sonoma and Napa close by. I can’t wait to return!
• What a fun place! Located on one of the prettiest docks of the Sausalito houseboat community, this A-line home offers a wonderful water view (not all of the homes do), a unique community, attractive furnishings and thoughtfully considered amenities. I have rented a number of VRBO/Home Away homes, and this was the most convenient in terms of all the little things that were provided: from a welcoming bottle of wine and chocolates to lots of towels, toilet paper, a well-stocked kitchen and so on. All of your needs are anticipated, and that’s not always the case. We loved our stay, close to the city (9 minutes without traffic during the holidays!) and an easy commute to wine country. But it’s tempting to just sit on the deck, use the hot tub and watch all the great birds! Sublimely relaxing. The only inconvenience would be one affecting anyone with difficulty managing stairs, as the two bathrooms are both on the lower level with the bedrooms. But rest assured that this is a pretty, fully functional and very comfortable rental in a great location! We hope to return…soon!

View Deal on VRBO from $285

Luxurious Houseboat | $314/nightly avg

This luxurious option offers houseboat living at its best! Just 20 minutes from downtown San Francisco and an hour from wine country, this one is ideal for entertaining. The master bedroom comes with a fireplace and an adjoining balcony with a hot tub. The second bedroom has an adjoining sitting room, and the fully equipped kitchen is adjacent to the dining area that seats up to eight guests. The living room is comfortable and features authentic art from around the world, and the porch off of the living room offers you the chance to enjoy amazing sunsets over Mt. Tamalpais. There are great restaurants and shops nearby, and you’re only a five-minute drive from the Golden Gate Bridge! This is a 3,000-square-foot gem that is sure to please.

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (1 Review)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 6 Guests
• Bedrooms: 3
• Bathrooms: 2

Top guest reviews

• We had a lovely stay on the houseboat. I lived on one previously,for 15 years so it was a homecoming for me. Friendly neighbors and of course a wonderful location.
• This is the third time that we have booked a houseboat in Sausalito. While all of our experiences have been positive, this boat was by far, the nicest, decorated with art from around the world, comfortable beds and living area and an amazing deck on top of the house overlooking the bay. The houseboat is walking distance from many businesses and restaurants and a walk or bike ride from downtown Sausalito. The owner was helpful, friendly and accommodating in every way. I can not say enough about the boat, the owner and the overall experience. Thank you Wilford!
• Cosy, quirky and comfortable. Such an interesting home with all the many different artefacts and books around for you to enjoy. They reminded us so much of places we have lived in or travelled through, maybe that is why we felt so at home !Thank you for sharing your home Wilford and also thank you to Gail and Kathy who were so helpful with restaurant suggestions and recommendations on where to visit.We have had a wonderful stay and thank you for the wine !Ian and Jennie Kirk – Cape Town
• An absolute magical vacation for our family of 6. The boys and girls all enjoyed the Kayaks, roof top, and the various quiet reading nooks throughout this very spacious houseboat. A fabulous location to venture off to Napa, the East Bay, and of course all the magnificent sites of San Fran. Loved meeting the owners and learning all about their favorite travel destinations as the HB is filled with treasures from near and far.
• We stayed for 10 heavenly days and enjoyed every second. Wilford & Carole and their floating home haven is a true sanctuary. We kayaked every day and reveled in the hot tub, bedroom fireplace and all the art, and the VERY creatively inspiring environment. Luxury, adventure and the best of being “at home” while away.

View Deal on VRBO from $314

Luxury Houseboat | $314/nightly avg

Experience the very best of houseboat living just 20 minutes from downtown San Francisco. Designed by an architect, this redwood and glass houseboat has been featured in print and on TV. Spread across three floors, the two-bedroom floating home features over 3,000 square feet of living space. A rooftop garden boasts a seating area, dining table, a gas fireplace, and panoramic views of the yacht harbor, Mount Tamalpais, and Richardson Bay. Highlights include a two-story atrium with tropical plants, a fireplace in the main bedroom with a hot tub on the adjoining balcony, a bathroom with a Jacuzzi tub, and a porch off the living room where you can sit and watch the sun go down over Mount Tamalpais.

Kayaks and bicycles are available for guest use. Richardson Bay offers miles of walking paths, while hiking trails overlooking the Pacific Ocean can be reached by car in just 5 minutes. This luxury houseboat is also adjacent to a bird sanctuary. Take advantage of great restaurants nearby, or ask about the catering or personal chef services offered.

There is one catch — the lower floor has an occupied apartment. However, the hosts assure that their “delightful tenant is very quiet, is often not here, and does not have access to or use the rest of the house at all.”

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (1 Review)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 6 Guests
• Bedrooms: 3
• Bathrooms: 2

Top guest reviews

• We had a lovely stay on the houseboat. I lived on one previously,for 15 years so it was a homecoming for me. Friendly neighbors and of course a wonderful location.
• This is the third time that we have booked a houseboat in Sausalito. While all of our experiences have been positive, this boat was by far, the nicest, decorated with art from around the world, comfortable beds and living area and an amazing deck on top of the house overlooking the bay. The houseboat is walking distance from many businesses and restaurants and a walk or bike ride from downtown Sausalito. The owner was helpful, friendly and accommodating in every way. I can not say enough about the boat, the owner and the overall experience. Thank you Wilford!
• Cosy, quirky and comfortable. Such an interesting home with all the many different artefacts and books around for you to enjoy. They reminded us so much of places we have lived in or travelled through, maybe that is why we felt so at home !Thank you for sharing your home Wilford and also thank you to Gail and Kathy who were so helpful with restaurant suggestions and recommendations on where to visit.We have had a wonderful stay and thank you for the wine !Ian and Jennie Kirk – Cape Town
• An absolute magical vacation for our family of 6. The boys and girls all enjoyed the Kayaks, roof top, and the various quiet reading nooks throughout this very spacious houseboat. A fabulous location to venture off to Napa, the East Bay, and of course all the magnificent sites of San Fran. Loved meeting the owners and learning all about their favorite travel destinations as the HB is filled with treasures from near and far.
• We stayed for 10 heavenly days and enjoyed every second. Wilford & Carole and their floating home haven is a true sanctuary. We kayaked every day and reveled in the hot tub, bedroom fireplace and all the art, and the VERY creatively inspiring environment. Luxury, adventure and the best of being “at home” while away.

View Deal on VRBO from $314

Magical Sausalito Floating House | $180/nightly avg

This floating home offers two bedrooms and one bath, a fireplace, and a washer and dryer. Relax on the large outdoor deck to enjoy the beautiful views, or utilize one of the available kayaks and hit the water. Inside you’ll find a table for four off of the kitchen, and room for two more at the counter. The nicely decorated living room has space to entertain and a view of the water — definitely worth a look. The deck is absolutely worth checking out!

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (12 Reviews)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 4 Guests
• Bedrooms: 2
• Bathrooms: 1

Top guest reviews

• We love this place. Very clean and well equipped, this home is perfect for a couple, with room for occasional guests. The neighbourhood of floating homes is quiet and respectful of privacy inspite of the close proximity houses. Anna, our hostess is prompt and efficient regarding any problems that might arise, And, as a testiment, this was our second stay here.
• Thank you – what a great place for our family’s vacation. Unique accommodation with easy access to shopping, city, natural attractions. Great communication from owner – super helpful!
• Thank you – what a great place for our family’s vacation. Unique accommodation with easy access to shopping, city, natural attractions. Great communication from owner – super helpful!
• Loved staying here. The house was just perfect with everything you need. Comfortable, cozy and nicely furnished. Communication with the owner was terrific – so responsive! Hope to go back and would definitely recommend.
• Loved staying here. The house was just perfect with everything you need. Comfortable, cozy and nicely furnished. Communication with the owner was terrific – so responsive! Hope to go back and would definitely recommend.

View Deal on VRBO from $180

Getting Nauti | $180/night avg

Right on the waters of Richardson Bay, Getting Nauti is the perfect houseboat for you and a friend or two. This 600-square-foot houseboat boasts proximity to attractions that will fill your San Francisco itinerary in no time. Hop over to the Golden Gate Bridge (2 miles away) and explore Alcatraz Island, Ghirardelli Square, Pier 39, The Presidio, and so much more.

This small but roomy houseboat sleeps up to three people with space for your pet as well. You’ll have internet access, a TV, and a place to park. Saving you a trek into San Francisco, you can also enjoy some great seafood just steps from the boat at restaurants including The Spinnaker, Salito’s Crab House & Prime Rib, and Seafood Peddler Restaurant and Fish Market.

Dreaming of Sausalito – your dream vacation awaits you

5 Stars (4 Reviews)

• Property Type: House boat
• Maximum Occupancy: 3 Guests
• Bedrooms: 1
• Bathrooms: 1

Top guest reviews

• My husband and I stayed here for 7 nights and had a wonderful time. Many great restaurants within walking distance and very cute town. The houseboat is clean and updated. Has everything for cooking meals in too. The bed is very comfortable. Our favorite place was the top deck. We sat up there every evening to enjoy the beautiful surroundings. Mallory was always responsive to messages and made a great video to show how to find the houseboat and use everything inside. It was a unique experience and I highly recommend it!
• What a wonderful hidden gem. Dog friendly and just right for 2 adults (or 2 adults +1 child). The host was responsive and helpful at every turn of the tides and all the necessary info was included. The small bay is full of harbor seals (including some very young pups) and various birds. Excellent restaurants are quite literally a stones throw away and shopping along the strip can consume an afternoon (as well as your wallet). The Gettin Nauti held up well in a couple of storms and the outside furnishings didn’t take on much water and thus dried out very quickly indeed. The shower is decent size for a boat (the water piping hot and plenty of it) but the head will take some getting used to (hey, it’s a boat). All in all I absolutely LOVED rolling out of bed and into a kayak.Will visit again!
• I have always wanted to try boat life and this was the perfect experience and lived up to all my expectations. I loved waking up to the beautiful view of the water with Sausalito hills in the background. And the view at night is equally as impressive. Mallory was a great host and very good at communication.
• Had an amazing stay aboard the Getting Nauti. Such a cool and unique experience to stay on a boat as opposed to a house.It’s certainly tight quarters on the boat, but all of the space is highly usable. The incredible weather means you’re able to enjoy grilling on the front deck, sip coffee in the morning on the swim deck while watching the cloud bank move over the city, or take in the lights from the observation deck at night.Shower is a little tight, but there are larger facilities available at the front of the marina. Didn’t get a chance to take the kayak out on the water, but had fun watching all of the recreational activities in the bay – including some curious seals.Definitely enjoyed being rocked to sleep each night with the waves and the marina was nice and quiet. Will absolutely see if the property is available if I ever need a space in the Bay Area!

View Deal on VRBO from $180

Cute And Cozy Houseboat

Rent Now$146/nightly avg

Whether on vacation or working from the water, this cute and cozy houseboat Airbnb rental comes with fabulous views of the water, the hills, and offers absolute tranquility — and high-speed internet! You will certainly enjoy the rooftop deck — a great place to relax, read a book, grab a bite, get some sun, or even work. This one comes with a nice-sized kitchen and a full-size refrigerator. There are restaurants and shops within a 10-minute walk. Great price! Note: the boat is secured well to the dock, but does rock gently at times depending on the wind. Those who are prone to motion or sea sickness are advised to take note.

Bedrooms: 1

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 2

Little Luxurious Floating Home

Rent Now$149/nightly avg

Looking for a small but luxurious floating home? Check this one out! Enjoy the beautiful sunsets and iconic views — life on the water with all of the amenities of a house. This one is a great bargain and includes the use of kayaks and bikes. The photos make it appear that you may see lots of wildlife! Note: this host only accepts bookings of one month or longer.

Bedrooms: 1

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 2

Floating Guest Cottage

Rent Now$261/nightly avg

This floating guest cottage is a freestanding home that blends nostalgia with today’s amenities. You’re going to love the sweeping views of the bay, rolling hills, and the majestic slopes of Mt. Tamalpais. The main front room includes a dining table for 6, a sofa, a captain’s chair, and a gas stove. The kitchen comes with a full-sized gas range oven and other modern appliances. Ideal for a couple or a single guest, this is the perfect option if you want to get away but remain close to the conveniences and fun offered in Sausalito. Check it out today — this one is extremely highly rated and in high demand!

Bedrooms: 2

Bathrooms: 1

Sleeps: 4

To find more things to do while floating in and around Sausalito, check out:

• 9 Fantastic Things To Do In Beautiful Sausalito
• 9 Things To Know Before Your First Trip To San Francisco
• From Aquatic Park To The Golden Gate Bridge: 11 Fantastic Experiences On The San Francisco Bay Trail 

Disclosure: TravelAwaits selects the listings in our articles independently. Some of the listings in this article contain affiliate links.

When you think of pop culture locations that people from around the world travel to see, chances are a cornfield in the middle of Iowa won’t immediately come to mind. But thanks to the 1989 blockbuster Field of Dreams, starring Kevin Costner as farmer-turned-baseball field architect Ray Kinsella, the Field of Dreams in Dyersville, Iowa, has become an enormous tourist attraction, drawing movie and baseball fans alike and routinely hosting celebrities and sports stars. Recent attention from Major League Baseball has also reignited interest in the film site and its legendary field. 

Here’s what you need to know about the real-life Field of Dreams and what you can expect to experience when you visit this special spot. Because after all, if you build it, they will come!

1. It’s A Little Piece Of Hollywood In The Heart Of Farm Country

In 1987, the Lansing family of Dyersville got an interesting visit from a member of the town’s Chamber of Commerce. Universal Studios was scouting locations for its new project, wanted to build a baseball field in the middle of a cornfield, and thought the Lansing farm might just fit the bill. After a series of meetings and test shoots, the producers chose the Lansing land, the field was constructed, and filming for Field of Dreams began on the site. The Lansing home also made an appearance in the film as the Kinsella farmhouse.

Dyersville is located 26 miles west of Dubuque, Iowa, part of the Quad Cities metro area. It’s a 4-hour drive from Chicago and a 3-hour drive from Des Moines. The area is served by the Quad City International Airport, which is about 1 hour and 30 minutes away in Moline, Illinois; the airport is serviced by carriers American, Allegiant, Delta, and United. While the area isn’t a major metropolitan center, it’s still quite accessible for those who want to experience this unique baseball site beloved by movie buffs and MLB fans alike.

2. You’ll Ask If It’s Heaven

As you approach the farm, it’s impossible not to feel both nostalgia and anticipation. Half-hour tours of the home are on offer and can be booked online in advance. They cost $20 for adults and $12 for children, but they are a great way to take a peek inside the home, where several pivotal scenes from the movie were shot.

Admission to the field and the surrounding area is free, and you can snap as many photos as you’d like. Plan to take your time, play a few games of catch, get your selfies in, and savor being there. In one of the most famous scenes from the movie, the ghost of legendary outfielder Shoeless Joe Jackson emerges from the cornfield, looks at the diamond, and asks, “Is this Heaven?” You’ll likely wonder the same thing.

Aside from the home tour and field, there’s a great gift shop on-site where you can purchase movie memorabilia and trinkets, baseball-related items, and much more. Be sure to check it out and grab something to remember your visit by.

For the ultimate over-the-top evening, consider staying in the farmhouse itself! If you opt for the luxe Kinsella Experience, you will have access to a homey bedroom on the upper level of the home, be personally greeted by the site’s staff, and receive all sorts of fun items, including an official MLB Field of Dreams baseball. You’ll also get a bottle of wine and a picnic blanket so that you can recreate the scene where Ray and his wife picnic centerfield. It’s not cheap — prices start at $500 per night during the off-season — but you’ll get a one-of-a-kind stay and a great story to tell!

3. There Are A Variety Of Lodging Options

If an overnight stay at the farm isn’t in your budget, don’t fret. There are plenty of other places to stay nearby.

In Dyersville, you’ll find low- to mid-level chain hotel options. Keep in mind that their prices are elevated because of their proximity to the Field of Dreams, and you won’t get a whole lot of bang for your buck. If you’ve driven to the site, or you have a rental car, consider staying at one of the nicer options in the nearby Quad Cities. You’ll pay just as much for a hotel room, but you’ll end up having a more upscale experience.

Nearby Dubuque is home to a variety of bed and breakfasts, most located within the town’s charming and historic downtown district. The Redstone Inn & Suites is a spot with a fascinating past: Constructed as a home for some of the town’s elite, it was used as a tavern before it was saved from the wrecking ball and converted into an inn. There’s also the Hotel Julien Dubuque, with its modern chic, historic touches, array of amenities, and on-site spa.

4. You Can Make It Multigenerational

Our best tip for visiting this iconic spot: Splurge and make it a whole-family trip. Baseball is all about nostalgia. Love for the game and its traditions is sewn into our country’s fabric and is passed down from generation to generation. The Field of Dreams was made famous by an Academy Award-nominated film that has inspired baseball fans for 30 years, so when you visit, invite the extended family to come along.

You’ll see fathers and sons, moms and daughters, and grandparents and grandchildren playing catch, taking terrific family portraits, and making memories that will last a lifetime. Some wear jerseys from their hometown teams; others pose near the corn where the players of yesteryear mysteriously emerged in the movie. It’s a touching and endearing thing to see and experience.

This is a bucket-list trip that will delight the whole family. With that in mind, consider including older relatives, especially if they love the game of baseball. You won’t regret it.

5. The Best Time To Go Is During Baseball Season

While the Field of Dreams and the Kinsella farmhouse are open year-round, Iowa can and often does get pretty cold in the winter. To avoid the crowds, consider a late fall or early spring trek to the site; the temperatures will be bearable, and you’ll still be able to run the bases, play catch, and tour the home.

That said, the place really comes alive in June, July, and August, once it’s warmer. Just like in the movie, the corn is high, the sun is hot, and the boys of summer are up to bat on diamonds — Major League and Little League — across the country. The bottom line is this: Summertime is baseball season, and it’s really the best time to visit this iconic spot dedicated to the game and all the things that make it great.

6. The Site Plans to Host A Major League Baseball Game Again In 2022

As aluded to earlier, the most-quoted line from Field of Dreams is, “If you build it, they will come.” It’s the ghostly, mysterious message that Ray Kinsella keeps hearing, and the one that ultimately compels him to plow over his cornfields and construct a regulation baseball field. It’s also the mantra that Major League Baseball will be banking on again in 2022.

After the success of its White Sox/Yankees matchup in 2021, the MLB will host another primetime game Thursday, August 11, 2022, between the Chicago Cubs and Cincinnati Reds. The league expects a capacity crowd at the 8,000-seat ballpark, adjacent to the actual Field of Dreams. The game will be televised to a national audience, and fans, both in-person and watching from home, will get to see their favorite players once again emerge from the cornstalks. Tickets were only available via a June lottery, so if you haven’t scored them yet, plan on watching the game from home.  

Planning a road trip through Iowa? Here are the best things to see and do in Des Moines. When you’ve seen everything the capital has to offer, make one of these amazing day trips from the city or check out these family-friendly activities in Cedar Rapids.

And why not make the Field of Dreams part of a baseball road trip? Here are the best places to explore baseball history in the Midwest.

Can one even come to France without visiting Paris? The ideal trip to France includes spending time in the City of Light and experiencing these unforgettable things to do and then heading out to explore the other marvels that France has to offer. These 14 magnificent must-have experiences in France offer a glimpse into French culture, history, and her natural beauty. Each experience listed below can be done as a stand-alone exploration of France or used as a jumping-off point for further travel in the area.

Here are my choices for 14 must-have experiences in France.

1. Visit Magical Mont Saint Michel

A Benedictine abbey perched on a pinnacle of rock that has been calling pilgrims for centuries, Mont Saint-Michel is one of the most visited locations in France. It’s no wonder. This UNESCO World Heritage Site rises from the sea, a spectacular sight that takes your breath away both at high tide and low tide.

Read about the tides at Mont Saint-Michel and tips to know before going.

Pro Tip: Wear good walking shoes for walking the cobbled streets. It’s an uphill climb to the abbey.

2. Climb Europe’s Highest Sand Dune At The Dune du Pilat

How will you summit this mountain of sand that has been around for thousands of years? I chose to climb the staircase of 168 steps and then scoot down the mountain of soft white sand in my bare feet. The Dune du Pilat in the Nouvelle Aquitaine region is one of France’s natural heritage sites. It stretches for 1.7 miles and is 328 feet high. The pine scent from the Landes Forest and the salty sea air are welcome companions as you pause on top of Europe’s highest sand dune and stare out to sea.

Pro Tip: The staircase is installed each year from the end of May until early November. The Dune du Pilat is the perfect day trip from Bordeaux.

3. Wander Through Lavender Fields In Provence

It’s one thing to see photographs. But standing in a vibrant purple field of lavender as it gently sways in the wind is something else. Row upon row of lavender stretches out towards the horizon and the delicate scent is unforgettable.

Two of my favorite places to see lavender in full bloom are the Valensole Plateau — where exquisite purple hues greet you — and at the Abbey of Senanque, where the backdrop is a 12th-century monastery. Here are other top locations to find lavender fields in Provence and this guide will help you plan a full trip through Provence.

Pro Tip: Watch out for the bees, they also love the lavender!

4. Visit Monet’s Stunning Gardens At Giverny

It’s a breathtaking experience to see Claude Monet’s impressionist paintings in Paris. His Water Lilies canvasses with their magical use of light, color, and water immerse the viewer in a serene natural setting. Travel to Giverny, Monet’s home in Normandy, to see firsthand where his inspiration came from.

Pink and white water lilies grace the ponds, an explosion of colors and scents greets you in the garden, and walking through the house where Monet lived is all part of the Giverny experience. Be sure to spend time exploring the small town and look for Claude Monet’s gravestone in the church cemetery.

Pro Tip: These articles on How to Visit Giverny and How To Spend a Day in Giverny will help you plan the perfect day trip from Paris.

5. Be Awed By The Luxurious Chateau de Versailles

The Palace of Versailles, a UNESCO World Heritage Site, is the perfect day trip from Paris and a must-have experience in France. In the 17th century, King Louis XIV turned his fathers hunting lodge into an incredible palace with magnificent gardens. The Palace of Versailles was the residence of the king and the seat of France’s government for a hundred years. 

The Palace of Versailles is enormous, so plan to stay the day. For first-timers, know the key places to see such as the Hall of Mirrors and Marie Antoinette’s Palaces of Trianon. Be sure to spend time amidst the spectacular fountains and time your visit for one of the musical fountain shows.

Pro Tip: Here are tips to help you plan your trip to Versailles. Interested in taking a bike tour of Versailles? Here is how.

6. Be Moved By The D-Day Beaches In Normandy

On June 6, 1944, more than 150,000 Allied troops landed along the French coast of Normandy in the largest seaborne invasion in history. The Allied troops landed at five different beaches along a 50-mile stretch of coastline. The Americans landed at Utah and Omaha Beaches, the British at Gold and Sword Beaches, and the Canadians at Juno Beach. Visiting the D-Day Beaches lays this incredible moment in history right before your eyes. It’s impossible not to be moved by the memorials, graveyards, and monuments and to stop for a while and appreciate the young soldiers who gave their lives for our freedom today.

Pro Tip: Here are some things to know before visiting Omaha Beach.

7. Stand Amidst The Carnac Alignments In Brittany

The Carnac Alignments, the largest megalithic complex in the world, are in Brittany, France. The standing stones at Carnac are the best-preserved prehistoric stones in Europe. It’s a true wonder to stand amidst the 3,000 stones that stretch as far as the eye can see. In the off-season, one can wander amidst the stones. In peak season the gate is closed. A little train or open-air bus takes you on a tour of the large area.

Pro Tip: Here is more travel inspiration for the Carnac Alignments and for Brittany, France.

8. Stroll The Ramparts And Beaches Of Saint-Malo

Stroll the granite ramparts of Saint-Malo, a port city in Brittany, and enjoy views over the beaches, the English Channel, and the medieval city. Imagine this fortified town where privateers, pirates approved by the king, once lived. Explore the medieval core of the city under the soaring spire of Saint Vincent Cathedral and then head to the beaches. Saint-Malo has the highest tidal range in Europe, making for golden sandy expanses that stretch for miles.

Pro Tip: Stay a few days and enjoy classic Brittany with crepes, cider, mussels, and the iconic blue and white striped clothing. Here is everything you need to know about spending a full day in Saint-Malo.

9. Travel To The Medieval Citadel of Carcassonne

For history buffs and castle lovers, Carcassonne, a UNESCO World Heritage Site, is a must-have experience in France. With its 52 towers and almost 2 miles of ramparts to walk, the ancient fortified city of Carcassonne perched on a hilltop over the Aude River is impressive. There has been a settlement at Carcassonne for almost 2,500 years, and traces of each period of history can be seen everywhere. There is plenty of exploring to do in the city, and this article will help you plan out the perfect day in Carcassonne. If you are traveling further a field in the Occitanie region of France, don’t miss these beautiful villages.

10. Visit The Fairytale Château De Chenonceau

What’s a trip to France without seeing a château (castle) or two? There are plenty of castles throughout France, but the Loire Valley is the top destination for visiting the best of France’s castles. The elegance of Chenonceau Castle is immediately apparent as it appears to float over the River Cher. This historic monument with its fabulous gardens has been designed, protected, and restored by a succession of women throughout history.

Be inspired to visit these other magical castles in the Loire Valley as well.

11. Play In The Great Outdoors At The Gorges Du Verdon

The emerald green waters glistening in the summer sunshine below the soaring limestone cliffs make a spectacular setting in the south of France. The Gorges du Verdon, one of Europe’s largest canyons, is a veritable playground for those that love the outdoors. Kayak, paddle board, or pedal boat in the magnificent waters. Avid hikers have a plethora of trails to choose from. Visit Moustiers-Sainte-Marie, a designated “Most Beautiful Villages of France,” nearby. 

Pro Tip: Read these tips for visiting the Gorges du Verdon here.

12. Stand Before The Ancient Bayeux Tapestry

You can easily spend a day visiting Bayeux in Normandy, France, or use it as a base for visiting the D-Day beaches. Bayeux is a lovely old town sitting on the Aure River. Since a young child, I had wanted to visit the Bayeux Tapestry, a UNESCO Memory of the World Register. The Bayeux Tapestry, over 900 years old, depicts the story of William the Conqueror and the Battle of Hastings, after which he became the King of England. It’s a stunning piece of embroidery, and examining the scenes of daily medieval life is fascinating. I love thinking of the women (most likely) who created this for posterity.

Pro Tip: The Bayeux Tapestry is presented beautifully in a darkened room where no photos are allowed to be taken.

13. Wander Through The Christmas Market In Strasbourg

What finally got me to Strasbourg, although it had been on my list for a while, was the famous Christmas Market, Christkindelmärik. France’s oldest Christmas market — which started in 1570 — has over 300 stalls set up in the city’s squares. The twinkling lights and Christmas decorations make for a magical experience. The variety of marvelous goods at the stalls makes it hands down the best Christmas market I have ever been to.

Don’t miss Place Kleber, where the enormous Christmas tree stands, and be sure to taste Bredele, the buttery Alsation Christmas cookies.

The lovely center island of Strasbourg, in the Alsace region, is a UNESCO World Heritage Site. Be sure to stroll through the quaint area of La Petite France where half-timbered houses line the canals.

Pro Tip: It was much colder than I anticipated because it is a very damp cold. Dress warmly.

14. Climb The Steps At The Pilgrimage Hotspot Of Rocamadour 

Rocamadour, a UNESCO Heritage medieval site, has been attracting pilgrims, miracles, and visitors since the year 1105. Situated in the Lot region of France and perched on a cliff, the town of Rocamadour has seven medieval chapels carved into the cliffside overlooking the River Alzou. Climb the 216 steps of the Grand Staircase (or take the elevator) and be sure to visit the Chapel of Notre Dame housing the famous wooden Black Madonna and the Chapel of Saint-Michel with its stunning frescoes and the crypt of Saint-Amadour.

Pro Tip: Since you are right here it seems appropriate to savor the local specialty, creamy Rocamadour goat cheese. It’s the perfect addition to a picnic.

You’ve heard of students spending a semester abroad, but have you heard of adults spending a semester at sea? Semester at Sea is the perfect way for adventurous adults over 30 to explore the world.

This is not a vacation — this is traveling. Semester at Sea is not a relaxing cruise, it is an opportunity to learn about communities from all over the world as part of a diverse, intergenerational group.

Ready to open up your world and make your life richer? Learn more about Semester at Sea and how you can join others who love to learn and travel on the upcoming Fall 2022 Voyage below.

About Semester at Sea

What Is Semester at Sea?

Semester at Sea has offered life-changing voyages for nearly 60 years. If experiencing personal growth while traveling the globe sounds like your jam, then Semester at Sea is for you! It is called Semester at Sea because the experience lasts up to 100 days and you are traveling with students who are earning college credits on-board.

Spotlight Voyage

If 100 days sounds like a lot to you, there is an option to board the ship for a single segment of the voyage. Called a Spotlight Voyage, generally, these partial trips last between 30 and 45 days.

Not A Cruise

Although you do travel by ship, Semester at Sea is not to be confused with a cruise. Consider it more of a floating university campus, complete with faculty, resident directors, and a hired staff member dedicated to ensuring a great experience for Lifelong Learners.

See Several Sights

Exciting, educational itineraries include stops at once-in-a-lifetime sights such as the Taj Mahal, the Great Wall of China, a safari, the Panama Canal, the Amazon rainforest, Pearl Harbor, the Galapagos archipelago, and much, much more.

MV World Odyssey

About The Ship

At 590 feet, the MV World Odyssey offers both indoor and outdoor dining, a sun deck for group fitness activities, pools, and 10 deck areas. It also has a theater, an auditorium, a library, a gym, and a spa where you can treat yourself to a massage, haircut, pedicure, or facial. There is one fine-dining restaurant and one bar/lounge area that does not allow students.

Cabins range from individual rooms to suites, with interior and exterior facing windows. Most Lifelong Learner cabins have ocean views with a French balcony. There are also nine classrooms on-board because Semester at Sea is also a…

Floating College Campus

On a Semester at Sea voyage, you will be living, eating, and studying with 550 undergrads, as well as 100 faculty and staff members and their families. There are also 180 crew members from all over the world on board. Lifelong Learners typically reside near other adult passengers, but interact with students in the dining halls, in classes, and in port.

Lifelong Learning Program

Retirees, professionals, and adventurous travelers over 30 are invited to study with bright, enthusiastic undergraduate students from around the world in Semester at Sea’s Lifelong Learning Program. This means you get to study around the ports that you’ll be visiting, take classes with students, and join undergraduates and professors on in-port excursions. Lifelong Learners are also invited to mentor students and lead evening seminars in their area of expertise. Have a family you don’t want to leave behind for so long? Sail as a Lifelong Learner Family!

Lifelong Learners Become Lifelong Friends

Amazing Community

Many Lifelong Learners who come for the travel and educational experience are surprised by the amazing community they find on-board. As you get older, it gets harder to make friends, but a Semester at Sea — with an eclectic and diverse group of students, faculty, and staff, and their families and other Lifelong Learners — gives you an opportunity to create close bonds.

You never know who you’ll meet! Our CEO knows someone who met their spouse aboard a Semester at Sea ship. Whether you form a relationship that lasts a lifetime or just find a travel buddy, experiencing what the world has to offer with a group of people who also treasure learning and exploring is the most rewarding part.

Solo Travelers Welcome

Since you can make friends on-board, you don’t need a travel partner to come with you on a Semester at Sea. Solo travelers can see the world safely with others and experience things they might not get to experience independently.

Single and double occupancy accommodations are available. And, single occupancy is not double the cost as it is on some cruise lines.

A Semester at Sea is a great way to travel solo — you have alone time, but you also have a built-in community so you don’t get lonely.

Extended Family Program 

Lifelong Learners are invited to “adopt” students into a small shipboard family in Semester at Sea’s Extended Family Program. Not only does this help relieve any homesickness the students may experience, but it also lets Lifelong Learners pass on life and career advice to the next generation.

Submersive Learning

On-board Classes

As you can imagine, Semester at Sea academics are amazing, with 30 full-time faculty members. Lifelong Learners have access to participate alongside undergrads in a multitude of courses offered across many disciplines of study. Subjects include world religions, oceanography, comparative politics, and public health. The available courses are announced prior to each voyage. Lifelong Learners typically sign up to participate in two or three classes.

Everyone participates in the Global Studies course. Taught daily while at sea, the course covers the people, culture, and geography of the places visited. All are also invited to attend evening programs. These lectures include topics related to upcoming ports, current events, and areas of faculty expertise.

Hands-On, In-Country Learning

What better way to learn about the world than by immersing yourself in each country? Each Semester at Sea voyage stops at 10–12 destinations, with an average of 5 days spent in each port. You are welcome to explore each port country independently or join students, professors, and trusted local experts on excursions.

A sample of one of these in-country, faculty-led programs is the Cheetah Outreach Project and Wine Tasting. Come face-to-face with majestic cats at the Cheetah Outreach project in Cape Town, which rescues and rehabilitates South African cheetahs.

From exploring a Moroccan desert on camelback to learning how to make fresh pasta in an Italian cooking class, Field Programs give Lifelong Learners the opportunity to see, learn, and experience more in each country. Field Programs can last a day, several days, or the entire port stay.

Every semester, the Field Office offers a catalog of a couple of hundred programs that you can browse and register for a few months before embarkation. Examples include everything from spending time at nonprofit organizations in Ghana or elephant conservatory in India to hiking the Great Wall of China or seeing the “big five” mammals on a South African safari. Volunteer and homestay opportunities are available as well.

Ranging from $25–$3,000, there are a variety of field programs available for different budgets and ability levels. On average, a voyager spends around $2,500 on Field Programs. Transportation, accommodations, and most meals are included.

Fall 2022 Voyage

Semester at Sea embarks on its next voyage in just a few months, but there’s still time to sign up! Its Fall 2022 Voyage starts in Amsterdam on September 9. The 105-day voyage stops in 12 cities in 12 different countries on two continents. Explore Portugal, Morocco, Spain, Croatia, Greece, Cyprus, the Suez Canal, Jordan, Kenya, and Mumbai before disembarking for good on December 22 in Dubai. Check out the full itinerary here.

Fall 2022 Spotlight Voyages

Segment 1: 30 Nights

• Embark: Amsterdam, September 9
• Itinerary: Portugal, Morocco
• Disembark: Spain, October 9

Segment 2: 31 Nights

• Embark: Croatia, October 16
• Itinerary: Greece, Cyprus, Suez Canal Transit
• Disembark: Jordan, November 16

Segment 3: 25 Nights

• Embark: Kenya, November 27
• Itinerary: India
• Disembark: Dubai, UAE, December 22

Rates

Voyage pricing is based on cabin type, as well as double or single occupancy. A variety of cabin options are available, ranging from single to spacious options that accommodate a family of four. Double occupancy rates range from $19,950–$35,950, while single occupancy rates range from $24,950–$53,925; a small price to pay for an unforgettable life-changing adventure! Here is what is included in the cost.

Fine Print

Here are a few requirements you may want to consider:

• Full COVID vaccination
• Yellow fever vaccination (dependent on itinerary)
• Background check

How To Book

Apply now to take part in the Fall 2022 Voyage. Other upcoming voyages include:

• Spring 2023: Asian and European Exploration
• Fall 2023: European and Asian Adventure
• Spring 2024: Asia, Africa, and Europe Exploration

Learn more about how to become a Lifelong Learner here. You can also email LLL@isevoyages.org or call (800) 854-0195. 

Imagine that you’re living in a tiny German town in 1633 when news comes that the Bubonic plague is racing through Europe, leaving millions dead and cities decimated. Knowing that your village is in the path of this destruction, and that some of your friends and neighbors have already become sick, what would you do? To whom would you go for help to avoid the deadly epidemic?

The people of Oberammergau, Germany, once faced this horror, and the entire community turned to God for deliverance. The residents of the Bavarian village made a vow that if their town was spared obliteration by the plague, they would give thanks every 10 years by reenacting the suffering, death, and resurrection of Jesus Christ.

From that moment on, no one in Oberammergau succumbed to the plague. In 1634, the residents honored their promise with the first reenactment of the Passion of Christ. Ever since, from generation to generation, the play has been performed, and 2022 (a COVID postponement from 2020) marked the 42nd production of the now-famous Oberammergau Passion Play. The next performance will be in 2030.

The people of Oberammergau originally performed the play in the parish church. The audience grew, so they moved to the church graveyard. By the 18th century, even the graveyard was too small, so they moved to a nearby field, building a new stage for each performance. Toward the end of the 19th century, a permanent open-air theater was constructed, which has since been enlarged and modernized. The current theater can accommodate more than 5,000 people. The daylong event takes place from May through October, and hundreds of thousands attend.

Some 2,000 residents of the village take part in the play. Only residents may participate, and rehearsals and preparations are conducted for nearly a year prior to the public presentations. On Ash Wednesday, the men of the town grow out their hair and beards to lend authenticity to their roles. Those who do not appear on stage provide support as crew members, costumers, or stagehands or take on other roles to ensure a successful season. Music plays a powerful role in the production and a full orchestra and choir bring it to life. Those who are not directly involved in the play are busy operating shops, restaurants, hotels, and other businesses to accommodate visitors from around the world.

What To Expect From A Trip To Oberammergau

Oberammergau is a Bavarian village of some 5,000 residents located about 50 miles south of Munich. The facades of many of the village’s buildings are painted with frescoes called Lüftlmalerei. A bit of mystery surrounds the name. One theory is that the originator of the paintings, Franz Seraph Zwinck, was known as the Lüftlmaler, or “air painter.” Another theory is that Zwinck had to work quickly because the fresh air made the paint dry rapidly. Whatever the reason, the beautiful artwork that adorns the buildings often depicts events portrayed in the Passion Play. It gives the town a fairy-tale quality and reminds passersby of the village’s deliverance and its promise to God.

Oberammergau is also well known for its woodcarving heritage. Many recently carved figurines are sold in shops around town, and historical examples of the craft are on display at the Oberammergau Museum, which also offers tours of the Passion Play Theater. One of the favorite activities of playgoers is looking through all of the Nativity carvings in the shops during the play’s intermission.

We went to see the Oberammergau Passion Play in 2010. The small town was full of activity, and there were people everywhere. We attended a performance in June, when the weather was quite comfortable. It got cool in the evenings, so we brought jackets with us, and they came in handy during the later hours of the performance.

The play itself took place in two parts. Everyone left the theater for dinner during the 3-hour intermission. You can arrive earlier and walk around the town a bit before finding your way to the theater, but plan to hit the sack once the play is over.

The plot covers everything from Jesus’s entrance to Jerusalem to his resurrection. Important events such as the Last Supper and Jesus’s arrest, interrogation, condemnation, and crucifixion are portrayed. The performers speak in German, but you can buy an English translation of the text to follow along. The play’s text evolves from production to production as does the music, which forms an integral part of the experience.

Between scenes, live actors make tableaux vivants, or “living images,” motionless representations of biblical events. Accompanied by music, these are intended to provide time for contemplation.

During the intermission, you will need to have a meal. There are several establishments in the village that cater to the large crowds. Each one has its own character, but all are part of the Passion Play experience. We ate at the Ammergauer Haus, a community center that was set up to serve a full German meal. We sat at large tables with other playgoers and exchanged pleasantries as best we could, since people spoke various languages. The menu offered soup and salad to start. Entrées included roast beef, wild salmon, and Bavarian dumplings. For dessert, there was warm apple strudel with custard or red fruit jelly with whipped cream. Beverages included German beer, international wines, and soft drinks. It was a fun experience, though a bit odd having so many people in the same space at one time.

The Passion Play is not only a theatrical masterpiece, but a unique cultural experience, a chance to get a sense of the mystery and history of this event. Seeing the sun set and the moon rise behind the stage is affecting. Add to that the live animals and hundreds of people reenacting events as their ancestors have for some 400 years, and it’s hard to remain unmoved by the experience. To be honest, we were tired after such a long day. But we would recommend the experience to anyone who asks if they should go.

While the Passion Play is an incredible experience, the town of Oberammergau is also full of history and magic. Visiting the shops and watching the townspeople deal with the onslaught of visitors can be an enlightening experience. Thinking about the history of the play, the promise that the current residents’ ancestors made, and the fact that several hundred years later they continue to honor that promise is humbling. We enjoyed the time we spent meeting the townspeople, whose shops were full of goods for people from all over the world to take home with them. We recommend that you take at least a little time to get a sense of these special people with such a unique heritage.

Planning A Visit To Oberammergau

It’s never too early to start saving for the 2030 event. Numerous tourism organizations can provide you with a package that includes accommodations, tickets to the play, and meals. We went that route, and it made things much easier. People plan a year or more in advance to get the tickets and itinerary they want, so start planning early!

The town itself is a lovely village, though quite busy during the Passion Play season. Attending the play is a major commitment, but if the idea appeals to you, then you will not want to miss it. It is a truly mystical experience that will stay with you for a lifetime.

Explore more of TravelAwaits’ Germany content:

• 5 Unique German Festivals That Celebrate This Underappreciated Vegetable
• 9 Amazing Castles To Visit Along Germany’s Rhine River
• 7 Fabulous Experiences In Germany’s North Sea Islands

Africa’s wild and wonderful natural spaces have compelled generations of adventurers to seek them out. But gone are the days when going on safari meant roughing it in the wild. With a wide array of opulent safari lodges to choose from, today’s safari-goers have little more to worry about than ticking off the Big Five and deciding whether to order red or white with dinner; all without losing the romance and adventure of days gone by. It’s here, in some of the far-flung corners of incredible African reserves, that you’ll find some of the world’s most luxurious safari lodges.

If you’re looking for luxurious lodges with incredible service, comfort, and indulgence, you could do a lot worse than checking yourself into one of the best and most luxurious safari lodges from my list below. Note that because I simply can’t decide which lodges are the best, I’ve gone alphabetically by country!

1. Mombo Camp

Okavango, Botswana

The award-winning Mombo Camp sits amongst the trees on Chief’s Island in the game-packed Moremi Reserve. This is ultimate luxury in the best game viewing area of Botswana’s Okavango Delta. Mombo really raises the bar for safari lodges with its combination of fantastic game viewing experiences and the incredible luxury and service in camp. Nine plush tents with private plunge pools will have you relaxing in no time at all. In between game drives, relax in your thatched gazebo and watch buffalo and impala graze on the flood plains below. At night dine under the stars.

The camp is committed to conservation, with much of the power provided by a solar farm and a portion of your rates going toward their preservation projects.

Pro Tip: Little Mombo, situated on Chief’s Island, is a smaller and more intimate camp than its sister and has its own dining and lounge area and a sparkling pool.

2. Angama Mara

Masai Mara, Kenya

Two 15-tent camps dot the edge of an escarpment about 300 yards above the game reserve at Angama Mara. The location on a hilltop overlooking the plains is breathtaking and unbeatable, with the views over the Great Rift Valley so sensational that you’ll be tempted to just stand and stare, without ever leaving your room. The floor-to-ceiling glass-fronted suites, with handcrafted and designer furniture, and the Masai Mara plains stretching out below you as far as the eye can see, make this a really special place and an exciting addition to the classic tented camps in Kenya.

Each day’s activities are tailored around you: enjoy a morning of game viewing with a delicious picnic breakfast, or opt for a lie-in and catch up with the wildlife later. Add to this exceptional food and drinks, an organic garden where lunches can be enjoyed, the Maasai beading workshop, the spa pavilion with the most well-equipped gym of any lodge in Kenya, a beautiful pool with plenty of sun loungers, a robust activity list, and doting staff, and you have the perfect place to stay for the ultimate and memorable safari experience — ideal for couples or families seeking an African adventure.

The lodge is perfectly complemented by Angama Safari Camp, an exclusive-use mobile tented camp sited deep in the Mara Triangle, and amidst the mega herds during the Great Migration.

Pro Tip: Another draw here is the spot where Meryl Streep and Robert Redford had that iconic photo taken, used to promote the film Out of Africa. Nowadays guests can enjoy a gourmet picnic in this exact location and create their own romantic memories.

3. Mahali Mzuri

Masai Mara, Kenya

Said by many to be the best safari lodge in Africa, the Richard Branson-owned Mahali Mzuri brings together every element you could ever wish for in your safari experience. Set within the private 33,000-acre Olare Motorogi Conservancy (part of the Masai Mara ecosystem but outside the national park boundaries), the 12 luxury tents, interconnected by walkways, sit on the edge of a gentle rise, looking out over the beautiful landscape. You’ll have a front-row seat, not just to the migration, but also to the abundant game you can see all year round, with monkeys scrabbling in the trees, giraffes wandering through to nibble on acacia trees, and perhaps a leopard stopping to drink from the rocky stream that runs below the camp. Being outside the national park means you get all the richness of wildlife to yourself, with no other cars in sight and no jockeying for position when out on a drive or the annoying chatter of other safari-goers.

Mahali Mzuri means “beautiful place” in Kiswahili, and the camp definitely lives up to its name.

4. Little Kulala

Sossusvlei, Namibia

Situated in a private reserve with exclusive access to the iconic Sossusvlei sand dunes and salt pans in the Namib Desert, the world’s oldest desert, Little Kulala has 11 climate-controlled, thatched “kulalas” (meaning sleep) which blend perfectly into the desert landscape, each with their own private plunge pool and rooftop bed for star-gazing. The décor is stunning and takes its inspiration from the incredible surroundings with neutral colors, gorgeous textures, and expert use of the natural light.

You can choose from a range of activities here including nature walks/drives, hot-air balloon safaris, and eco-sensitive quad biking excursions. Desert adapted wildlife, such as ostrich, springbok, and gemsbok eke out a harsh existence in the surrounding landscape, and larger carnivores, like the spotted and brown hyena and occasionally cheetah, are sometimes present.

5. Bisate Lodge

Volcanoes National Park, Rwanda

Built within an eroded volcanic cone, Bisate was the first lodge in Rwanda to combine world-class luxury with a once-in-a-lifetime gorilla trekking experience. The lodge’s one-of-a-kind design pays homage to traditional hut design, while the sumptuous interiors offer comfort, warmth, and luxury with fantastic amenities like cozy fireplaces and a well-stocked wine cellar. Bisate Lodge is one of Africa’s most talked-about camps, not only because of the great mountain gorilla viewing opportunities but because of its incredible design, with the rooms resembling giant bird’s nests.

6. Londolozi Private Granite Suites

Sabi Sands, South Africa

This elegant and luxurious lodge only has three suites, with stone walls, polished concrete, and a color scheme of charcoal, silver, and elephant gray, and it offers complete exclusivity. Each of the suites at Londolozi Private Granite Suites opens out onto a heated infinity pool and magnificent views over the granite rocks of the Sand River. Sabi Sands is known as one of Kruger’s finest private concessions and is renowned for leopard sightings. Londolozi was the first game reserve in the world to be given Relais & Châteaux status, and this place could definitely be your ultimate luxury safari experience.

It’s not all about luxury though; Londolozi is involved with community upliftment, rural education, and healthcare programs. The creation of protected areas has also meant that rhinos and other iconic species can roam freely here. These are just some of the ways your safari is having a positive impact on local people and wildlife. 

7. Royal Malewane

Thornybush Private Reserve, South Africa

Royal Malewane strikes the perfect balance between stylish splendor and relaxed retreat. Situated in a private concession within the Greater Kruger National Park, this famous safari lodge hosts no more than 20 guests at a time, in luxury and style. Six suites, each with a private infinity pool, offer total seclusion with stunning views, while the lodge itself has an atmospheric library, curio shop, and dining and sitting areas with fantastic outlooks over the bush. There are also two completely private suites each sleeping four for an even more exclusive safari experience.

There’s also the self-contained Africa House, just a few minutes’ drive from the main lodge, which is the perfect accommodation option for families or friends with space for up to 12 people. With private chalets and impeccable service, game drives that deliver great wildlife, a butler service, unforgettable culinary experiences, and, of course, their award-winning safari spa, it’s no wonder high-profile visitors celebrities such as Nicolas Sarkozy and Bono have chosen to stay here.

8. Singita Sweni Lodge

Kruger National Park, South Africa

Located in South Africa’s Kruger National Park, Singita Sweni epitomizes the very definition of safari luxury. The lodge is located on 33,000 acres of private concession land on the banks of the Sweni River, with hippos, crocs, elephants, and other wildlife often to be spotted meandering past the lodge. Located far away from the crowds that are often associated with Kruger National Park, Singita Sweni Lodge offers an intimate setting with its seven large and luxurious suites, each designed to bring the feeling of the outdoors in. Large floor-to-ceiling windows, big wooden decks, and a combination of modern décor and natural elements are all incorporated into the design.

The lodge has a strong focus on sustainability, and an ethos of a minimal footprint and touching the earth lightly. Menus are designed around seasonal produce, with many of the ingredients sourced from local suppliers. The lodge is also involved in a number of local conservation and social initiatives, including a solar power plant, which has meant the lodge saves on close to 1,000 tons of carbon emissions each year. This is an eco-lux safari experience and definitely a one-of-a-kind destination.

9. Ngorongoro Crater Lodge

Ngorongoro, Tanzania

With views from the rim of the world’s largest intact caldera enough to take your breath away, Ngorongoro Crater Lodge is not just a stunning location; it also somehow captures the romance of its location with its timeless elegance and design. Circular clay buildings with thatch roofs create a warm and inviting space, while opulent furnishings, with brocade sofas, gilt mirrors, and beaded chandeliers, all transform the rooms into truly beautiful spaces. Located right on the rim of the ancient volcanic Ngorongoro Crater, the lodge offers not only some of the best views in Africa but also the opportunity for a fantastic safari, as the crater floor is teaming with wildlife.

10. Singita Grumeti Reserve

Serengeti, Tanzania

Singita in the Grumeti Reserve, Tanzania, offers a variety of accommodation options with something for every style: crystal chandeliers and gilded frames at Sasakwa Lodge, rattan chairs and campaign tables at Sabora Tented Camp, and breezy furnishings and woven basket-style light fixtures at Faru Faru Lodge. Each is special in their own way.

Sasakwa Lodge is a great choice for families or groups who enjoy the bush but still want to have all the luxuries of a five-star establishment. With impeccable service and exceptional facilities, this grand Edwardian-style manor house and stone cottages offer a private slice of the Serengeti and boasts antiques, glittering chandeliers, and plush sofas that invite you to sink into them and gaze out across the Serengeti plains; but even these opulent interiors can’t compete with the incredible views stretching out across the seemingly endless plains.

Faru Faru Lodge is built on a gently sloping hill and positioned on the great migration route that’s traversed annually by more than two million wildebeests. Informal, unconventional, and surprising at every turn, Faru Faru has seven one-bedroom suites, one family suite, and a two-bedroom suite with a private pool. With close proximity to the river and plains, guests have the unique opportunity to enjoy a close connection with the wilderness.

Sabora Tented Camp strikes the perfect balance between classic tented safari and timeless modernity and is located right on the Serengeti Plains, allowing guests to immerse themselves in the setting and enjoy Sabora’s understated yet tailored luxury. With superb game viewing opportunities all year round, Sabora’s nine tented suites are set on the Great Wildebeest Migration route.

11. Time + Tide Chinzombo

South Luangwa, Zambia

Zambia’s South Luangwa National Park is one of Africa’s hidden treasures, boasting incredible untouched natural beauty, great walking safaris, and crowd-free big game viewing. Set in this relatively unexplored reserve on a sweeping curve of the Luangwa River, lies the sophisticated and elegant Chinzombo, with just six gorgeous villas, designed by award-winning architects Silvio Rech and Lesley Carstens. Time + Tide Chinzombo is one of Zambia’s most exclusive safari lodges. The beautiful and luxurious villas combine a modern architectural feel with natural materials such as leather, reeds, and canvas

 Each villa boasts its own private plunge pool and is situated on an elevated deck with views of the river and the abundant wildlife that visit its banks. A boat ride across the river gives guests direct access to the game-rich national park. Chic and remote, this is definitely one for your bucket list. 

12. Nyamatusi Camp

Mana Pools, Zimbabwe

The beautiful Nyamatusi is a wonderful luxurious haven in one of the wildest parts of Southern Africa, Mana Pools, on the banks of the mighty Zambezi River. The camp comprises six spacious, luxury canvas suites with private plunge pools and air-conditioning, essential for those hot dry season months. The focus at Nyamatusi is on experiencing the area through walking safaris led by an experienced professional guide. Fabulous game viewing opportunities abound, especially African wild dogs and elephants, and if you want to try your hand at the iconic tiger fish, then you’ve come to the right place. A carefully curated wine cellar will doubtless enhance your safari along with the excellent meals. 

And there you have it, my favorites amongst the many outstanding and luxurious safari lodges in Africa. I hope I’ve inspired you to take a luxurious African adventure of your own.

The Kingdom of Bahrain is an island country located in the Persian Gulf. It originally consisted of 50 natural islands, but 33 newer artificial islands bring that number to 83. Bahrain sits between Qatar and Saudi Arabia but has no land border with either other than the King Fahd Causeway that connects Bahrain to Saudi Arabia. Bahrain is a true desert country with mild winters, very hot summers, flat land, and is over 90 percent covered with desert. That does not mean that there isn’t much to see or do in Bahrain; very much the opposite. For one, it’s a paradise for bird watchers; 330 species of birds live and breed there, mostly in the nature reserve of Hawar Island.

Bahrain is the location of one of the oldest civilizations in the Middle East, Dilmun. Many monuments, sites, and museums document that past. Until the last century and before the oil boom, pearl fishing was the main industry, and you can still see pearl fishing shows (traditional sailing vessels) and buy some of the best pearls in the world in the capital Manama’s fabulous souk (bazaar).

Bahrain developed the first post-oil economy in the Middle East, investing heavily in banking and tourism. The latest attraction to open is the world’s largest underwater theme park, Dive Bahrain, but there are many more theme parks to enjoy. There are desert tours and the unique Tree of Life, a 400-year-old tree that grows in the middle of the Sakhir desert without any visible source of water.

Bahrain’s international airport is located on the island of Muharraq, connected to Manama by a bridge. In fact, all the islands are connected by bridges and a good road network, so driving around is easy.

Fans of motorsport should note the date of March 20, 2022, when the Formula 1 Grand Prix takes place in Manama.

I love Bahrain because of the great variety of nature adventures to be had and because of the many monuments and sites that reflect Bahrain’s interesting history.

1. Dive Bahrain

If you are a diver, here is an experience like no other in Bahrain’s latest attraction, DIVE BAHRAIN. Don your gear and plunge into the world’s largest underwater theme park, spanning an area of 100,000 square meters close to the international airport in Muharraq.

Fittingly to the location, an entire decommissioned Boeing 707 has been submerged in the water so you can dive in and out. There were concerns that the metal could contaminate the water, but the plane’s surfaces have been cleaned with bio-friendly detergent. To take into account the pearl fishing past of Bahrain, a reconstructed traditional pearl merchants’ house has been submerged together with sculptures made from eco-friendly materials to further the growth of coral reefs and the preservation and development of marine life. Diving this extraordinary underwater theme park is like exploring a different, silent world where one surprising view follows another.

2. Hawar Islands, A Bird Lover’s Paradise

The Hawar Islands are an archipelago of some 36 islands that are located in the Gulf of Bahrain just off the west coast of Qatar. Most of the islands are uninhabited, but they belong to Bahrain. The islands are most famous for their vast colony of Socotra cormorants, one of the largest in the world. There are also plenty of beaches where the birds love to rest and which are the best places to see these rare and graceful creatures.

There is a resort on the main island, the Hawar Beach Hotel, where you can spend the night in comfort and also book boat trips to the other islands or bird watching tours. The journey by boat from the Bahrain main island takes approximately 45 minutes and departs from Durrat Marina Yacht Club.

In 2024, a brand new resort will be opened on the west coast of Hawar, the Mantis, run by the hotel group Accor. The priority of this project is to maintain the biodiversity of the islands, which is why it will be surrounded by a wildlife sanctuary. It’s not only the cormorants and other migratory birds which make the trip to Hawar so exciting, but also watching Arab oryx and sand gazelles.

3. Follow The Call Of The Desert

Over 90 percent of Bahrain is covered with desert, so, this fabulous four-hour desert tour gives you an unforgettable experience of the landscape as well as of some historical sites.

The tour starts at the Bahrain International Circuit, located in the middle of the Sakhir desert, and is accompanied by a tour guide. It leads you past the Royal Camel Farm, the first oil well, and, the wonder of nature that is the Tree of Life, a 400-year-old lone mesquite tree that grows in the middle of the desert without any visible source of water.

The next stop is the A’Ali Royal Burial mounds that take you back 4,000 years to the ancient Dilmun civilization. Wandering the streets in the afternoon when it is cooler, you will be surprised how many of these cone-shaped burial mounds you will discover.

There is yet another extraordinary thing to contemplate in the village of A’Ali: the distinctive pottery and the artists who make it using generations-old methods, sometimes even some using the burial chambers as kilns. After the end of the tour, you are returned to your hotel, not left in the middle of the desert.

4. Qal’at Al Bahrain, Fortress And Birds

The Bahrain Fort, located 6 miles from Manama, is a majestic sight. It is one of Bahrain’s UNESCO World Heritage Sites and is even more exciting if you visit at dusk. Looming out of the desert is a 40-foot-high mound, or “tell,” with the Portuguese fortress on top. The mound was formed by civilization after civilization (according to at least seven excavations) dating from 2300 BC to 1700. It was the capital of the Dilum civilization, was followed by many others, and has served as a trade port, residential area, religious center, and the location of several palaces and necropolises. Over time, the entire site was covered with sand and excavations only began in the 1950s and 1960s by Danish expeditions.

The Portuguese fortress on top is massive, with huge walls and a tower at each corner. The fact that so much more needs to be uncovered makes a visit even more exciting. As for the birds: adjacent to the tell lies a long beach which is where migrant and local birds like to rest and nest. Among them are the white reef egret and Bahrain’s national bird, the white-eared bulbul.

5. Al-Fateh Grand Mosque

The Al-Fateh Grand Mosque is one of the largest mosques in the world and is located in Juffair, a suburb of Manama. If you have never visited a mosque, this one should definitely be on your agenda because of its sheer dimensions and splendor. The mosque can accommodate 7,000 worshippers at a time. The huge dome is made from fiberglass and is the largest fiberglass dome in the world. The sparkling central chandelier is from Austria, the carved doors are made from teak wood imported from India, and the marble floor and part of the walls are from Italian marble.

The mosque is the site of the Bahrain National Library, and tourists and visitors have access to the books for free.

The mosque is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m. and can only be visited accompanied by an official tour guide. No visits are allowed during prayer time, on Fridays, or on public holidays. You can take pictures of the mosque but never of people praying. As for the dress code: no shorts or mini skirts are allowed and women need to cover up with an abayah (which is provided at reception). You also have to take your shoes off.

6. Wahoo Waterpark

It’s hot in Bahrain, so what better way to cool off than at Wahoo Waterpark? It’s conveniently located in the center of Manama so you haven’t got far to travel to refresh yourself after you have explored the many stunning sights of the city (on foot, of course). You’ll find the first indoor-outdoor water park in the Middle East with temperature-controlled pools. There are kiddy pools, slides for excitement, a wave pool and a lazy river, and in the middle on a tropical island, a sailing vessel overlooking the entire park. If you are hungry and thirsty, there is a nice restaurant too.

7. Succumb To Gold Fever In Gold City

A bride’s dowry is still paid out in gold in Bahrain; that’s why gold plays such an important role in the local culture. It is also a reason why Bahrain sells the purest gold, 22–24 carat. Gold City is a separate building from Bab Al Bahrain souk, exclusively occupied by gold merchants and jewelers and located on Government Avenue in the center of Manama. From elaborate necklaces and bracelets in traditional or modern design studded with pearls and diamonds to more modest bangles, ingots, and coins, the array of merchandise is dazzling and an experience not to be missed, even if your budget does not allow for big pieces.

You will want to visit Bab Al Bahrain nearby. Different from Gold City, the building marks the entrance to Bahrain Souk, where you can find any number of interesting shops, textiles, rugs, spices, and, of course, small enticing coffee shops. A special treat is the Kingdom of Perfume, where you can find popular brands from all over the world. The great experience – unless you are allergic to perfume – is sampling the locally made perfumes adapted to your taste and preference and made just for you.

I couldn’t see that perfect, snow-capped conical volcano peak that Cotopaxi Volcano in Ecuador is so famous for, but as I strolled the dirt trail around a high-alpine pond, I wasn’t too upset about it.

For one, I was trying to catch my breath. At roughly 19,000 feet, Cotopaxi National Park outside of Quito, Ecuador is one of the highest spots in this South American country. Located in central Ecuador’s Andes Mountains, this national park sprawls over an area of 128.9 square miles, and Cotopaxi Volcano sits at a whopping 19,347 feet, making it the second-highest peak in the country.

If you aren’t used to the altitude, the thin air can take quite a while to acclimate to. Luckily, I brought my altitude sickness pills, so the altitude sickness wasn’t as rough as it usually is for me.

Coming from Oklahoma, which is relatively flat in areas, high altitude does a number on me, but thanks to the wonders of modern medicine, I was hiking with little to no problems in one of the most gorgeous spots in the Ecuadorian Andes.

I had already spotted a couple of the infamous wild horses that roam this national park, a few wild llamas, and countless birds, including the Andean Gull, a type of seagull that makes its home in the high peaks of the Andes mountain range.

In January, the weather was cool at this altitude, but not as cold as I expected. The famous conical peak of Cotopaxi, however, was obscured by the heavy low clouds that threatened rain. 

Nevertheless, hiking among the scrubby high-alpine landscape and watching the variety of birds was a treat, and I only wished I had several days to backpack through this Ecuadorian treasure.

As a guest of Hurtigruten Expeditions’ inaugural cruise to the Galapagos Islands, I had the opportunity to enjoy one of the add-on options for the cruise itinerary — a day exploring Cotopaxi National Park.

After all, if you are in or near Quito, Cotopaxi is the one national park in Ecuador that should not be missed.

High And Mighty

Cotopaxi is a stratovolcano, and it’s still considered active with the last eruption occurring in 2016. It’s part of the Pacific Ring of Fire volcano chain, but Cotopaxi has the distinction of being one of only two volcanoes in the world with a nearly symmetrical cone shape that is always covered in snow. The other one is Mount Fuji in Japan, and both are some of the most picturesque peaks in existence.

Cotopaxi National Park also has one of the few glaciers that exists along the equator. The park was established in 1975 to help protect this high alpine landscape from encroachment, and it remains one of the most popular destinations in Ecuador for visitors and local residents alike.

Because of its altitude, Cotopaxi National Park boasts different vegetation zones ranging from humid mountain forest along the lower elevations to alpine areas with little vegetation to the wet sub-Andean plains.

Because of this variety of climates, visitors to Cotopaxi have the ability to see unique plants and animals that only exist in certain conditions. For instance, the park has 200 different plant species, but also an abundance of wildlife, including Andean wolves, deer, llamas, pumas, hundreds of bird species, and the tiny and tough marsupial mice.

The views in and around Cotopaxi National Park are worth a day or more exploration in and of itself. 

Because it is located so close to the metropolitan cities of Quito and Latacunga, Cotopaxi National Park is one of the most visited parks in the country. Although Cotopaxi is one of the highest active volcanoes in the world, while in the park, you can also see two smaller volcanoes: Morurco and Rumiñahui.

Pro Tip: I am not a doctor by any means, but if you also suffer from altitude sickness, you might want to ask your physician to prescribe altitude sickness medications before you go. You can find all kinds of supplements online that claim to help you acclimate, but I was prescribed acetazolamide, a prescription medication used to decrease headache, tiredness, nausea, dizziness, and shortness of breath that can occur in high altitudes, and it’s worked well for me.

How To Enjoy Cotopaxi

Outdoor adventures and cultural learning opportunities abound in this national park. I’m a hiking fan, so the variety of trails that weave through this high-altitude wonderland was a treat.

I did a short, flat easy 2-mile hike with Metropolitan Touring’s guides around Limpiopungo Lagoon, a beautiful lake that mirrors the surrounding peaks and is alive with all sorts of waterfowl. If you’re lucky, you might spot the wild horses of Cotopaxi (which we did!), or you might opt to do a horse riding tour with local companies like Ecua Horse Rides.

If you are truly hardcore, you might want to tackle the Mountain Ascent, which includes an 80-minute hike up the base of the mountain to the ascent launch. At the ascent launch, you’ll find a resting place to prepare for the overnight ascent, which takes about 6 hours. Most folks start the climb at 12:30 a.m. so they can catch the sunrise at the summit at 7:30 a.m. 

This climb isn’t one of those technical ones that requires ropes and superhuman strength, but it is still quite challenging. In fact, of all the adventurers who attempt the ascent, only about half succeed.

Another rather difficult trail is the Cerro Ruminahui Trail, a 7.1-mile uphill trek to the summit. This trail has stunning views, but you’ll have to face an elevation gain of 2,828 feet, so it’s definitely rated a difficult hike.

Biking is another popular option for exploring Cotopaxi National Park. Ecuadorians have embraced the cycling craze, and this park caters to those who wish to feel the wind on their faces as they take to the trails. Several companies offer mountain biking tours in Cotopaxi National Park. The popular routes begin at a trailhead near the José Ribas refuge or follow the main road to Laguna Limpiopungo. 

Pro Tip: You’ll have to check in at the rangers’ station at the entrance of Cotopaxi National Park. At this time, proof of vaccination is required and you must wear a mask in all indoor and outdoor spaces.

The park entrance has one of the few restrooms (you’ll have to pay 25 cents for toilet paper) and a small restaurant. But, the best entrance attraction are the local craft vendors who are set up at the entrance, selling everything from alpaca shawls to handmade crafts. I was able to buy alpaca scarves for roughly $8 a piece, and they made for wonderful gifts to bring back home.

How To Get There, Where To Stay

Cotopaxi National Park is roughly 31 miles south of Quito. While many people choose to travel with a local tour company, which provides transportation to and from the park, you can also take a taxi from Quito. Believe it or not, a taxi won’t cost too much and is a lot easier than trying to navigate the roads in a rental or your own vehicle. Other options include a private transfer, taking a train (believe it or not, the park does have its own train stop), or taking a bus. One option is the Cotopaxi Wanderbus, which travels to the park from certain locations in Quito or from these hotels. What’s great about the Wanderbus is that it is a hop-on, hop-off style bus, so if you want to stay the night at the park, you can just hop back on the bus in the next day or so to return to Quito.

The three entrance points to the park include the northern entrance, the Areá Nacional de Recreación El Boliche, and the southern Control Caspi entrance, which is the most popular entrance into the park.

Ecuador uses the U.S. dollar, so paying for rides, activities, park fees, and food is super easy.

Cotopaxi National Park has several campgrounds, but camping there could be a bit tricky. Because Cotopaxi is an active volcano with eruptions causing issues in 2015 and 2016, camping is not allowed if the volcano starts to show signs of activity. If you do want to camp, the easiest way to find the designated campgrounds is to ask guides at the entrance to the park which areas are open. 

Another option is to stay at one of the haciendas, lodges, or hotels just outside of Cotopaxi National Park.

Go There

Ecuador is one of my newest favorite places I’ve visited, and not just for Cotopaxi National Park. The country is easy to navigate, especially if you use a tour company like Metropolitan Touring, and the fact that the U.S. dollar is the national currency made it super convenient. 

If you have the time or if you are on the Hurtigruten Expeditions Galapagos Cruise, I also recommend visiting Mashpi Lodge, a rainforest hotel owned by Metropolitan Touring in the Mashpi Reserve. This 2,500-acre private reserve is protected and located within the Chocó biogeographical region of Panama, Colombia, Ecuador, and Peru, and is home to a staggering 400 species of birds. 

Ecuador is home to 11 national parks, each in different regions and climates of this small country, so don’t limit yourself. That being said, if you have limited time, then Cotopaxi National Park is the one national park in Ecuador that should not be missed.

A Nile cruise is on nearly every international traveler’s wish list. The wonders of ancient Egypt go way beyond the pyramids and the sphinx, with countless treasures lying further south, a stretch away from Cairo, lying either within reach of Luxor or Aswan, which is why most people opt for a cruise between the two cities, stopping off at the most important sites along the way.

Having visited Cairo before, a Nile cruise had been on my wish list for years until I finally found the right ship, which I knew I would enjoy, together with the right duration of cruise and itinerary to suit me. It took a lot of research and some luck to chance upon the cruise that was right for me: very small, few people, historic connections, a touch of the glamor of 1920s- and 1930s-style travel, and plenty of class. I found my ideal cruise on the SS Sudan, the last true paddle steamer on the Nile, the one Agatha Christie sailed on and where she wrote Death on the Nile — and where the subsequent movies were filmed. Small enough to allow for privacy, large enough for comfort, with a five-night, six-day itinerary between Luxor and Aswan.

But what is perfect for me isn’t necessarily perfect for everybody else. Some might want a pool, a shop, more people to socialize with, or maybe more modern cabins, and probably going from Aswan to Luxor, or even cruising the whole way from Cairo to Aswan. Timing is crucial as well, as is deciding what to do at either end. There are many things to consider before embarking on a Nile cruise, so, here I have listed a few points to mull over and research before you book yourself that trip of a lifetime.

Up Or Down River?

Let’s start with some nomenclature you will need to go along the right route: Cruising UP the Nile means you are going south, toward the source of the Nile, cruising DOWN the Nile is sailing toward the estuary in the Mediterranean. But, just to confuse things, UPPER Egypt is in fact southern Egypt, while LOWER Egypt is in the north, by the coast.

Most Nile Cruises, except for the ones setting off from Cairo and cruising all the way up the Nile, actually sail only in Upper Egypt, between Luxor and Aswan.

I am unsure about what the statistics are when it comes to preferences, but all the cruise ships in Upper Egypt either cruise between Luxor and Aswan or between Aswan and Luxor. Both Luxor and Aswan have airports you can fly nto from Cairo, the main international airport in Egypt, so the choice really is yours. That said, personally, I felt that going from Luxor to Aswan was my preferred option, simply because — in my mind — Aswan is so much prettier than Luxor, and from Aswan you can travel to the temples in Abu Simbel, leaving you with the best bit at the end of your journey. But many people would argue the opposite, and there really is no right or wrong.

Hotels At Either End

While many travelers, mostly those who are time poor, head straight from the airport to the cruise ship and, once docked after the cruise, fly straight back out again, I would like to plead for a night or two at either end. Not only does it give you the option of overcoming any jet lag or travel fatigue, but also there are some lovely historic hotels that are worth spending a night in. In Luxor, the famous Winter Palace is a historic hotel, a little frayed around the edges, but with a fabulous garden and a pedigree of former guests that is hard to beat. The only place that can beat the guest list of the Winter Palace is the Old Cataract Hotel in Aswan where Agatha Christie stayed at the end of her cruise, and you can take a tour through numerous suites named after illustrious guests who stayed there over the last century.

What Kind Of Boat

There are essentially four types of boats on the Nile that can take you from A to B. There are modern cruise ships, relatively small when compared to ocean-going cruise ships with around 50 cabins, but many with swimming pools, cabins with balconies, and shops and restaurants on board. There is the SS Sudan, alone in its class, without amenities such as pools or shops, but with only five suites and 18 cabins, plus a superb sundeck, a bar, and a restaurant. Then there are the dahabiyas, beautiful boats with a sail at either end — and even more private with many only catering to around 12 passengers. The dahabiyas come without engines, but often have a tugboat for added speed, and offer the most tranquil and secluded cruises. Lastly, there are the feluccas, small sailboats, where in some cases you can spend one night on board, but generally, these lovely and traditional sailboats are only used for day trips.

Where Are The Stops?

Between the most popular cruise harbors of Luxor and Aswan lie the most amazing sights, most of which are taken in by all the various cruises, because, after all, that is why everybody is there. The main stops are Qena, a little downriver from Luxor, with the Dendera and Abydos temples; Luxor, with the various valleys of tombs; Edfu with the fabulous Kom Ombo temple; and lastly Aswan, with a visit to Philae. On a five-night cruise upriver (so going south), you will stay overnight in Qena, Luxor, Edfu, and two nights in Aswan.

Length Of Cruise

Most cruises between Luxor and Aswan take between three and seven days, the shorter ones skipping Qena and only staying one night in Aswan, the longer ones adding extra nights, usually in Luxor.

If you are lucky enough to have the time to sail from Cairo to Aswan, the itinerary takes a minimum of 11 nights, but more often than not 14 nights, with sightseeing in Cairo included, usually reaching Luxor on Day 11. Despite the current of the Nile, which is evident but quite slow, the cruises up or down the river take the same amount of time.

When Best To Travel

The best time to visit Upper (southern) Egypt is between October and April. That said, I went at the end of October, and the temperatures were still in the 90s Fahrenheit, making sightseeing a bit of an exhausting undertaking. In the summer, these temperatures are much, much worse, so travel then is best avoided. In December and January, the coldest months, the temperatures hover around the mid-70s Fahrenheit. As for rain, the rainy season is between October and April, with a negligible spike at less than an inch of rain in October.

What You Must Pack

Even if yours is a fancy cruise, pack light, pack layers, and pack sensible shoes. It will be hot and sandy whenever you go exploring. In the Valley of the Kings, for example, there is much sand, no shade, and plenty of stairs and steps to conquer, so light clothing but good shoes that keep you firmly on the ground are useful. Bring a light cover for the evening and something nice for the boat. A clothes brush to get the sand and dust off you at the end of the outing and a handheld fan to bring you some air when it gets warm are essential. And, if you like a tipple or two, know that in Egypt imported wine and champagne are extortionately expensive, so, get your full allowance in the duty-free shop and enjoy along the way.

What To Do Before (Or After)

Chances are that you will fly into Cairo, and unless you are embarking in Cairo, some sightseeing is a must. Allow at least two extra days to see the main sights before heading south. And once you are in the south, note that all cruise ships stop at Aswan because of the dams. If you want to see Abu Simbel, you can either fly from Aswan to Abu Simbel or take a tour either by bus or private car, but you will need to book the car in advance. This is because the tourist road caravan sets off first thing in the morning and is escorted by police all the way between Aswan and Abu Simbel because of potential bandits, and all travelers need to be registered and accounted for by the day before at the latest.

What To Read And Watch About The Nile

To get you in the mood and keep you going while you’re there, here are some books and films set in exactly the places you will be visiting, so you can go, “Oh, I know that place!” as you read or watch.

• Death on the Nile by Agatha Christie
• The films Death on the Nile from 1978 with Peter Ustinov, 2004 with David Suchet, and 2022 with Kenneth Branagh
• Some very light but fun mysteries by Elizabeth Peters, with lots of places to be recognized
• The superb old travel book by Amelia B. Edwards A Thousand Miles up the Nile, first published in 1877

One fantastic historical TV series presented by Bettany Hughes is entitled The Nile and is full of information, making for perfect viewing before and after your trip.

Pro Tip: In many places, you will either have to pay for a photography permit, or, at times, won’t be able to take photographs. But don’t let that stop you from carrying your camera everywhere with you!

Love is in the air on Santa Cruz Island in the Galápagos Islands region, and the giant Galápagos tortoises are taking full advantage of the amorous atmosphere. 

We were having lunch at a former cattle ranch located in the highlands of Santa Cruz, and unlike the sometimes barren-feeling islands and coastal areas, the highlands are full of verdant foliage. It’s also where the most amount of giant tortoises roam in their original natural habitat.

Thanks to aggressive breeding programs and conservation efforts, the Galápagos tortoises are on the rebound. Overhunting in the past two centuries nearly decimated the population of these lumbering giants; once, more than 250,000 tortoises called the Galápagos Islands home. That number dropped to a terrifying 15,000, but thanks to breeding programs and education, the numbers have increased to 35,000 today.

Learning about the conservation efforts to save the Galápagos tortoises, who can live up to 200 years, was only one of the experiences that Hurtigruten Expeditions’ inaugural cruise to the eastern Galápagos offered up. I was invited on a hosted trip on Hurtigruten’s inaugural cruise offering to the eastern islands of the archipelago off the coast of Ecuador aboard its fully-renovated ship, Santa Cruz II. 

With only 35 guests aboard, the Santa Cruz II was my floating home away from home, and with stellar cuisine and a staff of highly-educated naturalists and cruise leaders, I couldn’t imagine a better way to explore a location that ranks high on many people’s bucket list.

I just experienced Hurtigruten’s inaugural cruise to the Galápagos Islands, and here’s why I loved it.

1. A Perfect Way To Explore The Galápagos

Our Galápagos National Park naturalist David Guzman halted our hike and pointed up into a tree on San Cristobal Island. I caught a glimpse of bright red feet curled around a branch, my first sighting of the famed red-footed boobys that call the islands home.

“Besides the color of the feet, the difference between red-footed boobys and blue-footed boobys is that red-footed boobys nest in trees. They have articulated feet that make it possible for them to grasp branches,” Guzman said.

Having a trained Galápagos naturalist leading all of our excursions made all the difference to me, and I learned much more about the ecology, the geology, and the history of the Galápagos Islands than I could have ever expected.

Hurtigruten’s daily itinerary offered different options of activities, ranging from light hikes and longer hikes to glass-bottom boat wildlife touring, deep water snorkeling, and visits to places like the Charles Darwin Research Station and a ranch where giant tortoises roam free like they did before hunting nearly wiped them out.

While you are required to stay 6 feet away from any animal, the opportunities to see the famous “Big 15” animals of the Galápagos abound. Sea lions were everywhere it seemed, and these curious creatures made it difficult to keep your distance, especially when the painfully-adorable pups flopped up to you to say hi.

Thanks to our guides, we were able to see 13 of the Big 15, missing only the penguins and the flightless cormorants. We hiked among the marine and land iguanas, snorkeled with the playful sea lions, observed the nests of the three different boobys, and even the Galápagos albatross. We witnessed the mating of giant tortoises, shooed away the fearless and curious Galápagos mockingbirds, counted the diverse little finches that Darwin made famous, and gazed at little black-tipped sharks in the clear waters surrounding the island.

Honestly, the knowledge of our guides and the educational sessions during the days were my favorite parts of this inaugural Hurtigruten cruise. If you are looking for a cruise experience that allows you to be intimately involved in learning and promoting conservation in these unique islands, this is the cruise for you.

2. Newly Renovated Ship

As a guest of Hurtigruten Expeditions’ Galápagos, I was among the first to sail aboard the “new” MS Santa Cruz II. This ship, in partnership with Metropolitan Touring of Ecuador, is custom-built for exploration. It has only 50 cabins and suites, which means a limited number of guests. That limited number creates an intimate and comfortable way to explore these islands without feeling like you’re part of a giant herd of tourists.

The MS Santa Cruz II underwent a multi-million dollar upgrade leading up to the inaugural cruise, and the cabins and suites were roomier than I expected and decorated in a subtle Nordic theme. The beds were ridiculously comfortable, and being swayed to sleep each night by the rocking of the ocean was relaxing and soothing.

The ship has three decks for lounging and enjoying the scenery, a common room library with a coffee station, a group room for activities like games and movies, a pretty stellar bar, and a restaurant area. The sky deck is outfitted with lounge chairs to soak up the sun, and on clear nights, it’s a perfect spot for stargazing.

The Santa Cruz II also has a fitness center, hot tubs, washers and dryers, a Science Corner, and a small gift store. Besides the spacious Darwin Suites, the ship offers family and single cabins, which have all been upgraded with new mattresses and beddings. 

The dining menu features vegan and more vegetarian options at breakfast, lunch, and dinner, and each day also features unique Ecuadorian cuisine options. 

Oh, and the best part? Free wine and beer all day!

Pro Tip: While Hurtigruten cruises are famous for the strong Wi-Fi on their ships, this particular cruise had limited wi-fi, so be prepared for that.

3. Strong Local Relationships

Hurtigruten Expeditions kicked off its inaugural tour by partnering with Ecuador’s Metropolitan Touring, which is widely thought of as creating expedition cruising in Galápagos more than 70 years ago.

According to Hurtigruten Expeditions, this long-term partnership leverages the local knowledge and access to local experiences that Metropolitan Touring has developed over the past 70 years. In addition, Hurtigruten Expeditions and Metropolitan Touring have exclusive access to some of the best landing sites on the Galápagos Archipelago.

“The added itineraries and experiences are the result of what has proven to be a very fruitful partnership for the benefit of our valued guests. Our expanded offering will truly cover all the key areas of the Galápagos, which are all distinctively different from each other, offering guests an otherworldly experience combined with incredible wildlife,” said Asta Lassesen, CEO of Hurtigruten Expeditions, in a recent press release.

One of those uniquely local experiences was a bike ride to visit a local sugarcane/cacao plantation owned by Adriano Cabrera Sanchez. Not only did we learn about sugarcane and farming in the highlands of Santa Cruz Island, but we tasted Mr. Sanchez’s homemade sugar cane moonshine, which he also sells. Trust me, that moonshine is a doozy!

It was the kind of local curated experience that allows guests to interact one-on-one with those who live on the Galápagos Islands, giving a deeper understanding of culture on these islands.

4. Experts In Expedition Cruising

Hurtigruten Expeditions’ inaugural Galápagos “In the Footsteps of Darwin” expedition cruise may have just debuted in January, but already, the company is developing three additional itineraries for 2023 and 2024.

These new itineraries allow guests to choose from four different small-ship expedition cruises. Ranging from four to eight nights, the options include a six-night eastern Galápagos itinerary that I experienced in January, but guests can also choose from a four-night northern Galápagos cruise, a four-night western Galápagos cruise, and an eight-night combination covering northern and western Galápagos. All four options are now available to book for travel in 2023 and 2024.

Hurtigruten Expeditions also offers additional add-on programs to its Galápagos itineraries. For instance, you can add a unique three night pre- or post-program to the award-winning luxury rainforest hotel, Mashpi Lodge. Located in the Ecuadorian Chocó Rainforest, Mashpi Reserve is a private conservation resort tucked within one of the world’s greatest biodiversity hotspots. 

Before embarking on the Galápagos cruise, we were able to spend a day in and around Quito, Ecuador, exploring a Sangolqui open-air market and Cotopaxi National Park, which is only an hour-and-a-half drive from Quito. 

Led by the Hurtigruten and Metropolitan Touring staff, Cotopaxi is one of the highest volcanoes in the world. After a short hike in this high national park, we enjoyed a traditional lunch from one of the region’s best chefs in San Agustin del Callo. 

Pro Tip: The Mashpi Lodge experience includes walking on uneven terrain, so it might be tough for guests with limited mobility.

5. Safety And Conservation

During this inaugural cruise, we visited several conservation facilities, including the endangered giant tortoise breeding center at Cerro Colorado at Puerto Baquerizo Moreno, the Charles Darwin Research Station at Puerto Ayora, and the tortoise reserve in the highlands. 

Conservation and sustainability in travel is a hallmark of Hurtigruten cruises. In fact, thanks to the Hurtigruten Foundation, seven climate and conservation-focused projects around the world are being funded. One of the seven organizations to receive funding is the Fundación de Conservación Jocotoco in Ecuador for its work on the critically-endangered petrel bird on the Galápagos Islands.

The foundation is a collaboration between Hurtigruten and its passengers, partners, suppliers, organizations, and donors. To date, the Foundation has funded more than 41 projects in 11 countries.

Safety is also one of Hurtigruten’s focus areas, from specific protocols on embarking and disembarking, the use of masks in all public areas, and detailed explanations on what one can expect during that day’s itinerary. 

Pro Tip: As of this writing, visitors will need a PCR negative COVID test to enter Ecuador, and masks are required in all indoor and outdoor areas throughout Ecuador. And while you don’t have to be in perfect shape, this particular cruise does have several hikes over uneven terrain, so be prepared with good hiking shoes. 

For more eclectic experiences near the Galápagos Islands, see these stories:

• Ecuador Expands Galapagos Marine Reserve Preserving Crucial Route For Endangered Animals
• Famous Galapagos Islands Arch Formation Collapses Into Ocean
• My Biggest Travel Regret: Flying Home While My Husband Visited The Galapagos

Travel opens you up to so many incredible experiences, and while there’s a whole lot more of the world I’d still like to see, and this is certainly not the definitive list of best travel experiences, I’d like to share with you some of my most amazing experiences and those I think deserve a spot on every traveler’s bucket list. 

1. Watch The Sunrise In A Really Special Place

One of my most memorable sunrises was on Mequfi Beach at the end of a trip through the Quirimbas Archipelago in the Indian Ocean off the north-eastern coast of Mozambique. My husband and I had traveled the 68 miles of the archipelago by plane, sailboat, traditional dhow (wooden boat), and helicopter. We’d spent 2 weeks on the journey and Diamonds Mequfi Beach Resort was the final stop on our itinerary. Keen to savor our last few hours of beach time before flying home, we were up early and down on the beach just as the sun’s first rays of light started to peek over the horizon.

2. Do Something That Terrifies You

After it takes a 360-foot tumble over Victoria Falls, the Zambezi River squeezes through a narrow gorge where it boils up into the biggest, and arguably best, white water rapids in the world. This is not for the faint-hearted, and an average level of fitness is required, but if you are feeling brave this really can be an adventure of a lifetime. I have done this trip numerous times and it’s definitely something I would recommend.

Pro Tip: The best time to raft the Zambezi is when the water levels are lower and more rapids are accessible, from August to mid-October. Go with a good operator like Bundu Adventures.

3. Laugh When You Get Caught In A Well-Known Tourist Scam!

Rome is an expensive city. Even a double room in a moderately priced hotel can be pricy. Traveling to Rome as a family with small children, we found the best value accommodation was one of the many convents that take in paying guests. Traveling on a budget and trying to economize wherever we could, we caught the train from the airport into the city. With our luggage and two small children in tow (one in a pushchair), we made the classic rookie mistake – we asked a local taxi driver how much he would charge to drive us to the convent. He named an exorbitant price. Some haggling ensued. Beating him down to a price that wasn’t quite so eye-watering, we climbed into the taxi. He drove for minutes, and around the corner pulled up outside our destination! An expensive lesson learned. All we could do was laugh!

4. Climb A Mountain

Climbing mountains is something I have been doing for years. I’ve climbed them, guided them, and taken my husband and my children up them. I’ve also taken clients on trips they tell me have been life-changing experiences.

If you are looking for an achievable, yet challenging, mountain to climb, let me steer you towards Tanzania’s Kilimanjaro, where I have been guiding regularly for years. Whether you’ll rate a climb up Africa’s highest mountain a great “travel experience” depends entirely on when you’re asked! Ask a climber making the final push to the summit and they’ll probably say no! At that moment it’s a tough, cold, nauseating, exhausting hell. But ask them 6 hours later, when they’re grinning from ear to ear, standing on the roof of Africa, and their answer will definitely be different.

5. Fly First Class

I’d love to say I have flown in first class, but that wouldn’t quite be true! Years ago, traveling from South Africa to Australia, I got as close to flying first class as I am probably ever going to get. Our travel agent made a mistake with our booking. When the plane touched down in Perth en route to Sydney, my husband and I got off with all the other passengers for a short layover before reboarding. We were surprised to see our boarding passes had us in new seats. In first class! We said nothing, grabbed a glass of champagne from the hostess, and sat down. The hostess, surprised to see us, asked to see our boarding passes. And that’s when the mistake was noticed. We were on the wrong plane; our travel agent had accidentally booked us on a later flight to Sydney! We were allowed to finish our champagne, and then quickly ushered to a pair of empty seats back in economy. Our time in first class was lovely while it lasted!

6. Take An Epic Road Trip, On A Road Less Traveled

The 800-mile, 8-day drive from Kathmandu in Nepal to Lhasa in Tibet, along the China-Nepal Friendship Highway is a seriously memorable road trip. It takes you past the highest peaks of the Himalayas, pristine alpine lakes, incredible Buddhist monasteries, and surreal landscapes.

Pro Tip: The China-Nepal Friendship Highway closed after the 2015 Nepal earthquake, and is now only open for goods transport. The route currently being used is along the Pasang Lhamu Highway, a rough route only advised for very intrepid travelers.

7. Spend Time With The Locals

I traveled with Indian friends to Kodenchery in southern India, where they were taking part in a white water kayaking competition. Not knowing the front end of a kayak from the back, I wasn’t actually taking part in the competition but was somehow persuaded to take on the role of commentator. Kodenchery is not on even the most adventurous traveler’s paths, and I was quite a novelty standing on the river bank, microphone in hand, doing my best to describe the action taking place in the river below. I learned a handful of useful phrases from friendly locals and when I was at a total loss for words, one of the local teachers stepped in as my translator. I somehow made it into the local newspaper and onto the local TV news! I’ve never forgotten my weekend of celebrity in the backwaters of south India.

8. Sleep In A Tent

I’ve slept in many tents in my time, and have many fond memories. My husband, on the other hand, is not a keen camper, only sleeping in a tent when absolutely necessary. Of all the tent experiences I have subjected him to, he tells me the most memorable is waking up one morning in a tiny, ice-covered tent in Ethiopia’s remote Bale Mountains on a trek through to find the endangered Ethiopian wolf. 

9. Sleep On A Boat 

My husband and I were traveling to Tanzania’s Mahale Mountains National Park, on the shores of Lake Tanganyika, to trek with chimpanzees. Most tourists coming to Mahale fly in by charter flight. We decided to travel by boat up the lake from Zambia, spending 3 nights on the MV Liemba, a WWI German gunboat that was converted into a passenger and cargo ferry. We’d managed to secure a “first-class cabin,” which consisted of a rickety bunk bed, a plastic garden chair, and a broken fan — I wouldn’t recommend the trip to any other than the most stoic of travelers. Most of the passengers didn’t have cabins, instead sleeping on the deck. The shared bathroom facilities left a lot to be desired – my husband caught typhoid on the journey home! 

You might not want to choose this boat, but find a boat that suits you, and spend a few nights aboard.

10. Eat Street Food

Street food comes in all shapes, sizes, colors, and flavors. My “sweetest” street food memory is piping hot, fresh jalebis in India. It was a chilly early morning and I was walking, with a friend, through the narrow back streets of a tiny town in the Indian Himalayas, when we came across a guy deep frying these delicious sweets at a makeshift stall on the side of the road. Jalebis are a distant cousin to the donut, with a flour batter, deep fried in circular shapes, and soaked in sugar syrup or honey – they are delicious.

11. Visit An Iconic Site And Appreciate Seeing It In Person

The Eiffel Tower, the leaning tower of Pisa, the Grand Canyon – there are so many iconic sites around the world that deserve a place on your travel list. For me, it’s the Sydney Harbour Bridge. Growing up in Sydney, I never appreciated “the bridge” and must have crossed it a thousand times in my youth, never giving it a second thought. What makes you appreciate it though is climbing to the top! Dressed in a camouflage climbing suit, you, and your trembling knees, climb 1,332 steps to reach the top (burning 504 calories on the way!). At the top, you are rewarded with astounding views over the city. The view is particularly magical at dawn, watching the bustling metropolis come to life far below.

Pro Tip: book your climb with Bridge Climb Sydney the climb will cost you around $128. 

12. Sip Cocktails In A Rooftop Bar With A View

There are a million places around the world to sip a cocktail from a rooftop bar with a view. My special place is the chic rooftop bar at Upendo House, in Stone Town, Zanzibar. It overlooks the azure ocean and the historic House of Wonders (built by the second Sultan of Zanzibar in 1883 with a door so wide he could enter the house riding on the back of an elephant!).

13. Swim In Infinity Pool With A View

Everyone loves an infinity pool. My most memorable is the pool at Africa Bush Camps, Bumi Hills, Zimbabwe, which hovers on the edge of a cliff, looking out over the vast and shimmering waters of Lake Kariba, the world’s largest man-made lake, below.

14. Visit Somewhere With A History So Deep You Will Never Truly Understand It

Lalibela in northern Ethiopia is a place where I’ve stood in awe at the history around me. Known for its distinctive subterranean churches, many of which are joined by tunnels carved out of rock during the 12th and 13th centuries, Lalibela is still a pilgrimage site for Coptic Christians today.

15. Take Local Transport 

My first encounter with public transport in India was taking a sleeper train from Delhi to Dehradun (the gateway to India’s famous hill stations). I was alone and had never been on an overnight train before, let alone one in a different country. I boarded the train just before midnight. Within minutes, my fellow passengers had taken me under their collective wings, finding my berth, teaching me how to fold down my bunk bed, and introducing me to their families. As the train pulled out of the station, in unison they opened their picnic containers full of home-cooked food and offered me all kinds of delicious treats. I’ve never felt so instantly and completely accepted by a bunch of total strangers.

From tiny jewel-toned cities to quiet, sandy beaches where there’s not another soul around, the quaint international islands on our list beckon with the promise of adventure and relaxation. You’ll find unique destinations from across the globe and plenty of spots that would be perfect to tack on as a day trip or weekend getaway. Whether you’re looking to add Antarctica or Australia to your list of continents you’ve visited or explore more familiar scenes in the Caribbean or Mediterranean, there’s a beautiful international island destination that will satisfy any traveler.

1. Saint Helena

This tiny volcanic island in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean beckons adventurers with its black sand beaches, dramatic coastline, and interesting history. A colorful cast of characters have inhabited or visited the island, the most notable being Napoleon, who was exiled there. You can still visit his now-empty tomb and various residences on a tour of the island. Another notable visit would be to Plantation House, which is home to the oldest known land animal, a Seychelles giant tortoise named Jonathan who’s at least 185 years old! The island is also a great spot for hiking, snorkeling, looking for whale sharks, and sipping coffee from one of the many coffee plantations. With so much history and unique sights, you won’t run out of things to do on this 77-square-mile island.

2. Naxos, Greece

Shining white buildings perched on a hill above sparkling blue waters — the very image of a Greek island — is enough to inspire wanderlust! If you’re ready to make a visit a reality, Naxos is the perfect island for you because it’s quieter and less crowded than more touristy Santorini or Mykonos. You’ll find plenty to explore on this island, including the longest beaches in the Aegean, Venetian castles, and the remains of a temple built for the Greek god Apollo. You can spend days exploring all of the ancient ruins on the island, but keep in mind that the terrain is quite hilly and uneven in places, so good walking shoes are a must! After sightseeing, take a dip in the sea and enjoy fresh seafood and other Greek delicacies at one of the many amazing restaurants on the island. Be sure to review all of our recommendations before your Greek island getaway here!

3. Kangaroo Island, Australia

Visiting Kangaroo Island is like visiting a tiny version of Australia with the same unique wildlife, bushlands, and beautiful beaches. There’s plenty to explore on this island and we recommend renting a car when you arrive for your adventures. But watch out while you’re driving, because the local wildlife (including kangaroos!) may just cross your path. There are various wildlife parks you can visit for an up-close look, and since many of the animals you may want to see are nocturnal, you can book a nighttime guided walk. After visiting the animals be sure to sample some of the island’s amazing produce, including honey that’s sought out across Australia. For all of our tips, be sure to see our full list here.

4. Réunion

A tiny piece of France in the Indian Ocean, Réunion Island is home to one of the world’s most active volcanoes, a melting pot of delicious cuisines, and many idyllic beaches. Hiking is a popular activity on the island and you can explore calderas and craters left behind by the island’s volcanic history. You can also take in views of the peaks and craters from one of the island’s many beaches, but be cautious about swimming — in many parts swimming is actually banned because of shark attacks. After exploring, be sure to sample some of the island’s unique cuisine, which is a mixture of French, Indian, Chinese, and African dishes. Visiting Réunion Island is one big adventure, so be sure to check out all our tips before your trip.

5. Mauritius

There’s something for everyone on beautiful Mauritius, and it’s the perfect spot for a romantic island getaway or an action-packed trip. It’s quite a long journey to get to the island, so you’ll want to give yourself plenty of time to enjoy the gorgeous white sand beaches and other scenery. Unlike other tropical islands, there’s no distinct rainy season and the temperature is pretty steady, making this one island you’ll want to visit at any time of the year. You can take in the island’s flora and fauna during a hike or visit to one of the colorful national parks, but the real reason to visit Mauritius is to spend as much time as possible lounging on the island’s picture-perfect beaches. See our full list of the best things to do here.

6. Banwol, South Korea

If purple is your favorite color, you’re in luck because there’s an island just for you! In Banwol, South Korea, everything on the island is painted purple. You can enter the island via a purple bridge and if you turn up wearing purple, the island’s entry fee is waived. The reason for the color is part of a government initiative to boost tourism, and the island’s abundant purple campanula flowers provided the monochromatic inspiration. The island can only be explored by bike or by foot and during your visit you can stay in a purple hotel and eat in a restaurant that only serves purple food. To learn more about this unique island, check out our article here.

7. Prince Edward Island, Canada

Literary fans will love taking a trip to Prince Edward Island and exploring locations that provided the inspiration for Anne of Green Gables. You can visit landmarks that play a big role in the book and in author Lucy Maud Montgomery’s life, including Green Gables Heritage Place which is staged to reflect key details from the book. In addition to the literary sites, you can also enjoy visiting lighthouses, beautiful coastal drives, and strolling along waterfront boardwalks. The island is also renowned for its delicious seafood, including local lobster and of course mussels. For all of the sites to visit on your literary adventure, be sure to check out our full list.

8. Ko Lanta, Thailand

Situated off the coast of Thailand is the island district of Ko Lanta, where you’ll find a riot of beautiful colors in the surrounding coral-fringed beaches and tropical rainforests. You can rent a motorbike to explore the island where you’ll see soaring limestone cliffs, caves, and waterfalls. Explore the crystal clear waters by snorkeling or scuba diving, and relax on Long Beach, which is the perfect place to take in a sunset. Be sure to check out all our recommendations for Ko Lanta and for the rest of your visit to Thailand here.

9. Procida, Italy

If you’re looking for a rainbow of colors, the Italian island of Procida is calling your name. Its beautifully painted pastel buildings in a riot of hues contrast nicely with the deep blue ocean waters surrounding it. In addition to the breathtaking views, you can also explore numerous ancient Greek artifacts and learn about the island’s history as an outpost for the shipping industry. The island was also recently named Italy’s Capital of Culture for 2022, the first time an island has won the honors. Recipients of the award take on numerous projects to highlight cultural heritage and increase tourism, so 2022 may be the perfect time to visit this colorful island!

10. Vis, Croatia

Croatia is known for its Rivas, wide promenades that hug the coast, and are full of shops and restaurants. The Riva on Vis island is no exception and is teeming with coffee bars, restaurants, boutiques, and other places to sit back, relax, and enjoy a meal or drink with a gorgeous view of the water. You can also venture into the interior of the island to visit a beautiful waterlogged sea grotto known as the Blue Cave. The island also has a complex military history, including a submarine tunnel you can visit and explore. If you’re planning a visit to Croatia, be sure to check out all our must-see spots here.

11. Madeira, Portugal

A true hidden gem that even the Portuguese don’t visit often, Madeira is an island paradise worth visiting. The hilly terrain of the island offers some unique ways to get around, including gondola rides up the hills to take in sweeping views of the island, and wicker sledge cars that can transport you back down the winding roads. The island is easy to explore on foot and is filled with unique walking trails and cobblestone streets — just be sure to take along a sturdy pair of walking shoes! After all the walking, you’ll want to chow down in one of the many delicious restaurants and enjoy a glass of the island’s famous fortified wine. For all of our recommendations, see our list of all the reasons why Madeira is Portugal’s best-kept secret.

12. Ile De Re, France

A retreat for the Parisian upper class, Ile De Re is comparable to the geography of Martha’s Vineyard, with its salt marshes and sand dunes. The best way to explore the island is by bike, and it’s easy to rent a bike on the island for your stay. In addition to wonderful restaurants, cafes, shops, and museums, you can also take a boat cruise from the harbor to see a fortress built in 1661 in the middle of the sea. Ile De Re is also known for its wide, sandy beaches, which welcome surfers and naturists alike. See all our recommendations for Ile De Re and nearby La Rochelle here.

13. Ambergris Caye, Belize

If you’re seeking outdoor adventure, then a visit to Ambergris Caye, Belize, should be at the top of your list. The island is accessible via a 13-minute scenic prop plane flight from the Belize City Airport. One of the most popular activities on the island is scuba diving to explore the coral reefs and the Blue Hole, a martini glass-shaped limestone sinkhole that’s about 480 feet deep. You can also enjoy the outdoors and beautiful landscape while snorkeling, biking, and sailing. Venture into the island’s interior to explore Mayan ruins or go on a jungle safari or hike to see local wildlife. For more outdoor experiences on Ambergris Caye, be sure to check out our full list.

14. South Georgia

If Antarctica is on your bucket list, then a visit to tiny South Georgia Island off the coast is a must. On the island, you’ll enjoy scenic hikes that bring you up close to wildlife including albatrosses, penguins, elephant seals, and more. You can also spend time on a boat at sea watching for whales and taking in views of the dramatic coastline. Because tourism to Antarctica is limited to avoid the impact travelers have on the continent, you’ll need to plan ahead and choose an expedition through the International Association of Antarctic Tour Operators. Here are 9 reasons why the extra planning is worth it for a visit to this spectacular island.

15. Mustique, St. Vincent and the Grenadines

Once only reserved for royals, anyone can now plan a trip to the private island of Mustique, part of the Caribbean archipelago nation of St. Vincent and the Grenadines. This island is just 2.2 square miles and is a secluded getaway still beloved by celebrities and royals alike. During your stay, you can rent a luxury private villa and enjoy horseback riding, hiking, and lounging on the perfect white sand beaches. Sailing and snorkeling in the crystal clear waters are also popular, and the scenery can’t be beat. The island’s warm hospitality and quiet pace will draw you in, and make you feel like you’re getting the royal treatment, too!

Ready to explore even more quaint international islands? Be sure to check out our list of top islands from last year. If you’re looking to keep your travel within the U.S. there are plenty of quaint islands to be found as well!

When islands in Europe are mentioned, especially when it comes to vacation hotspots, then the Greek Islands win every time. Followed, usually, by the Balearics, the Canaries, and a few Italian islands, such as Sardinia or Capri. Admittedly, these are all gorgeous islands, and extremely popular with travelers, but not only does their popularity take away from their appeal, but also there are so many more beautiful European islands that are worth a visit. And, best of all, they are not overrun with tourists and allow you to discover parts of Europe you might not have considered before.

Being a dedicated island fan, I have selected a few in this roundup that might just spark your interest and entice you away from the crowds. Here are islands that have that little something different, are off the beaten path, or are popular, but not at the time I recommend visiting.

Ready for some island hopping?

1. Guernsey, English Channel

The bailiwick of Guernsey is part of the Channel Islands, and although a British Crown Dependency, the island is a delightful mix of all things French and English, lying some 30 miles off the coast of Normandy and 70 miles off the coast of England. The small island with a grand total of 65,000 inhabitants is perfect for hiking, with a coastal path spanning 110 miles of varied terrain. The island is historic, with a beautiful natural landscape that has inspired painters and writers. It has cute small villages and towns full of restaurants serving the freshest seafood, but most of all, it invites you to slow down and explore at a more relaxed pace.

Pro Tip: Rent a car at the airport and explore the island first, before enjoying the rest on foot. 

2. Rügen, Germany

Do you know the painting Chalk Cliffs on Rügen by German Romantic artist Caspar David Friedrich? The artist is an ancestor of mine, and I was taken to see it at a museum when I was young. To me, it sums up the island of Rügen in the Baltic Sea perfectly. Beautiful white cliffs, lush countryside, all surrounded by the sea, which is lovely and warm in summer, not too salty, and often freezes over in winter. A former society sea bath resort, the island is dotted with old grand hotels, and one of the prettiest piers in the world, the Sellin Pier, which has a white restaurant on a platform reached by a short wooden pier. While the island has perfect beaches for swimming in summer, this is an all-year destination that invites visitors to don comfortable shoes, grab a map and go out exploring.

Pro Tip: There are easy train connections from Hamburg or Berlin, that take you to the island in three to four hours.

3. Ile de Ré, France

Probably my favorite island in Europe, the Île de Ré, oozes French charm at every turn. Just a bridge away from the medieval city of La Rochelle with its quaint harbor, it seems a million miles away from anywhere. Endless beaches, towns with tiny harbors full of colorful traditional fishing boats, good food, houses with shutters in pastel colors, and even its own breed of donkey, the Poitou donkey, that looks very shaggy with its dreadlocks. Quite often you see them wearing trousers, which is not a gimmick but protects them from mosquitoes.

Rent a bike and explore the lighthouse, the windmills, the salt flats, and don’t forget to buy some of the famous Île de Ré coarse sea salt.

Pro Tip: As much as I love this island, the French love it even more, and come in August when you can barely step for people. However, visit in September and all the tourists with kids have disappeared, yet all the restaurants are still open, and the beaches empty.

4. The Princes Islands, Istanbul, Turkey

I love that when on a city break, you can take a short excursion and land somewhere completely different for a day. The Princes Islands are made up of nine small islands in the Sea of Marmara, four of which I believe are open to the public. The Islands are a mere 1.5-hour ferry ride from the heart of Istanbul. Arrive on the main island and you’ll notice straight away how quiet it is. No cars, just the clippety-clop of horse-drawn carriages, and the hum of electric trams and buses. The islands are wooded, and quite hilly, crammed full of prime real estate, and narrow beaches, always packed with locals on the weekend. There is not much to do in the way of sightseeing, but they offer such a contrast to bustling Istanbul, and the ferry ride is just lovely, that they are well worth searching out.

Pro Tip: If you are unsure which ferry to take or which island to choose, try a guided day trip from Istanbul, with a tour and lunch on the main island.

5. Texel, Netherlands

Texel is the largest of the Dutch North Sea islands, one of the Frisian or Wadden Islands which stretch from the Netherlands to Germany and up to Denmark. These islands lie in the large mudflat area called the Wadden Sea, a UNESCO Natural World Heritage Site because of its unique ecosystem. They vary in size, with Texel being large in comparison, at 15 miles long and 5.5 miles wide. Basically sand dunes overgrown with grass, the islands are a haven for wildlife, especially birds and seals, and the beaches are beautiful. That said, the tide goes out a long way, and when it comes back in, it comes in fast, so when out Wadden walking, always take care. Texel has several small communities but with lots to offer, from cheese sampling to wine tasting (yes, this island in the North Sea has a vineyard!) and there are some good restaurants, offering, not surprisingly, great fresh seafood.

Pro Tip: Stay at the Strandhotel Noordzee, right in the sand dunes and with great views.

6. Formentera, Spain

When everybody heads off to Mallorca or Ibiza, may I suggest instead visiting Formentera, the smallest of the Balearic Islands? Reached by a rather scenic ferry ride from neighboring Ibiza, little Formentera is not half as busy as its more popular neighbors but instead has empty beaches with turquoise waters, lighthouses, great walks, and superb scuba diving. San Francesc is the largest community on the island with its 3,000 inhabitants but has a surprising number of good restaurants, cafes, and shops, catering to incoming day-trippers and yachts arriving from across the Mediterranean Sea.

Pro Tip: This island is a perfect size to be explored by bicycle or scooter. Just don’t forget to pack a picnic and a beach towel.

7. Stockholm Archipelago, Sweden

Some 30,000 islands make up the Stockholm archipelago, some only large enough for a small beach hut, others sporting villages and ferry ports. Each one though is charming and offers the sort of getaway you don’t get in many places. Many Swedes own a beach house on one of the many islands off the Swedish coast and use them at weekends or over the summer months. Most are basic, without electricity or amenities, and you have to get there by paddle boat, bringing your supplies with you — and taking the leftovers off the island when you leave. But when it comes to peacefulness, then it doesn’t get much better.

Pro Tip: You can take day trips to various islands from Stockholm which will give you an idea of just how lovely this part of Sweden is. But even better, why not rent a tiny house on one of the islands and do as the locals do? 

8. Comino Island, Malta

While Malta is a large island with a stunning, historic capital, Malta is also an archipelago, with only three of the islands inhabited: Malta, Gozo, and Comino. Although at last count, Comino only had a reported population of three. A popular day-tripping spot from the two larger islands, little Comino is a nature reserve and famous for its Blue Lagoon, and so popular because in Malta itself good beach bathing is at a premium due to the rocky coast.

Pro Tip: Best reached by boat from Malta, an organized boat trip also gives you the chance of seeing some other coves and beaches on the island.

9. Elba, Italy

The island of Elba officially belongs to Tuscany in Italy. Need I say more? The third-largest island of Italy, and famous for playing host to Emperor Napoleon during his exile in 1814 from France. Elba is historic, with plenty to see, surrounded by the beautiful Tyrrhenian Sea, offering plenty of watersports. Elba is large enough to give you a chance of a road trip and explore before settling down in a more relaxed seaside resort. The best thing is, while the Italians know about this place, foreign tourists usually head to the better-known islands, making Elba a little quieter.

Pro Tip: While on your Tuscan Road Trip, take the roughly 1-hour ferry ride to Elba from Piombino, and add a couple or three days of R&R on Elba.

With cruises departing South America and heading directly to Antarctica, the trip time is shortened but you miss the tiny island of South Georgia. With the even shorter version — flying to King George Island off the Antarctica Peninsula and beginning your expedition from there — you also miss South Georgia. But including South Georgia in your itinerary offers wildlife viewing and on-land experiences that make your expedition to the 7th continent a trip filled with adventure, discovery, and once-in-a-lifetime experiences.

Before we look at the nine reasons why South Georgia should be part of your expedition to Antarctica, let me give you a little bit of information about what to consider when you research your cruise. 

In keeping with the 1959 Antarctic Treaty, the continent is shared by countries around the world. Its primary purpose is to provide a place of collaborative scientific research. And 29 of the 54 countries that signed the treaty have research bases in Antarctica. 

Tourism to Antarctica is regulated in order to lessen the impact travelers have on the continent. The expedition you choose should be part of the International Association of Antarctic Tour Operators (IAATO). IAATO limits the number of people on any given landing to 100. They also regulate the landings and lengths of the visits so the land and wildlife are not adversely impacted. You’re ferried from ship to shore on a Zodiac boat. If the ship you choose for your expedition has fewer than 100 guests, you’ll be able to participate in every shore landing offered.

Here are the reasons why the tiny island of South Georgia should be part of your Antarctic adventure.

1. You’ll Have Boots On The Ground

Except for typically one trek on the Antarctic Peninsula, the majority of excursions to destinations in Antarctica involve sightseeing from Zodiac boats. With South Georgia, you’ll be exploring on foot, with easy hikes and up-close experiences with wildlife (curious penguins walk up to you). 

Short hikes take you to nesting areas or viewing platforms from where you’ll see stunning panoramas of the beaches and the Scotia Sea — a part of the Southern Ocean.

2. You’ll See Albatrosses Take Off

Several types of albatrosses inhabit South Georgia and the small islands that surround it. While viewing wandering albatross from the ship’s deck, the birds look big but not enormous. You’ll get an up-close view of them on Prion Island, just off of South Georgia’s north shore. The wandering albatross’s wingspan is the largest of any living bird on the planet, reaching 11 feet. To get airborne, they have to get a running start. Once they are airborne, they can glide for several hours without flapping their wings. Individual albatrosses have been tracked and found to cover 12,000 miles over the course of the year. They breed on South Georgia and other subantarctic islands beginning each November.

Black-browed albatrosses, with about 7.5-foot wingspans, are found on South Georgia. A huge colony of 400,000 breeding pairs nest on the Falkland Islands but a very respectable colony of 70,000 breeding pairs lives on South Georgia so you’ll see them on your visit. Dove gray downy chicks hatch in their mud nests in late December and early January. 

These are just two species of albatrosses on South Georgia. You’re likely to spot more albatross species between South America and Antarctica. You’ll also see petrels, skua, cormorants, kelp gulls, Antarctic terns, and Antarctic prions.

Pro Tip: Albatrosses are considered threatened and near-threatened depending on the species, due to fishing and pollution. To find out more about conservation efforts, visit the Agreement on Albatross and Petrel Conservation’s website.

3. You Might Spot Macaroni Penguins

In 18th century England, “Macaroni” referred to high society, sophisticated young men who toured Europe and adopted a taste for Italian pasta and fine European clothing, including wigs and feathered caps. The verse, “Yankee Doodle came to town riding on a pony. He stuck a feather in his hat and called it macaroni,” was a way the British Army put down the less well-dressed colonials during the Revolutionary War.

Upon seeing penguins on the Falkland Islands with a flamboyant splash of yellow and orange feathers on their heads, English sailors named them Macaronis. Their habitat extends from South America to the Antarctic Peninsula. 

The world’s largest population lives on South Georgia but colonies are remote. Your best chance of seeing them is when they enter the water in search of krill — the shrimp-like crustaceans that make the Macaroni’s feathers orange.

4. You’ll Experience The Chaos Of A King Penguin Colony

South Georgia is home to some of the largest King penguin colonies in the world, too. A short walk from your Zodiac landing on Salisbury Plain or St. Andrews Bay gets you to King penguin colonies with 100,000 plus breeding pairs that are trumpeting, courting, waddling, and, in the case of the juveniles — whistling — to their parents. The noise is deafening, and the smell of guano is quite strong, nevertheless, the experience is unmatched. 

IAATO requires visitors to stay at least five meters (16 feet) away from any wildlife. Curious juveniles, called oakum boys, have brown downy feathers and can be seen throughout the season, as King penguins breed every 14 months. You will also see molting adult penguins that are land-bound and hungry until they replace their feathers and return to the sea to feed.

Along with King penguins, South Georgia is also home to Magellanic, Gentoo, and Chinstrap penguins.

Pro Tip: Sit or stand quietly when you are near a colony. Curious penguins are likely to approach and break the five-meter rule.

5. You’ll Marvel At Massive Elephant Seals

Gold Harbour, named for the color of the beach’s golden mountain backdrop at sunrise and sunset, is home to King penguins, fur seals, and massive elephant seals. Adult elephant seal males weigh up to 8,800 pounds and dwarf the females that weigh from 900 to 2,000 pounds. Juvenile male elephant seals practice sparring on the beach, otherwise, the entire lot of elephant seals seem content to sunbathe while they’re on land.

6. You Can Retrace Sir Ernest Shackleton’s Trek

No expedition to Antarctica would be complete without learning about polar explorers that attempted and succeeded at reaching the South Pole. Sir Ernest Shackleton’s attempt failed but he was heralded as a hero. After his ship, the Endurance was crushed by ice in Antarctica’s Weddell Sea, Shackleton and his men made their way to Elephant Island. Shackleton went with a small group of his men to find a ship to get his men home. 

Shackleton sailed on a small boat to South Georgia and hiked over snowy, icy, rugged terrain to reach Stromness whaling station in 1916. He returned to rescue all of his men on Elephant Island about 4 months later.

Depending on weather conditions, you can retrace the final part of Shackleton’s trek to Stromness. Stromness became a ship repair yard after whaling ended. Humans left in 1961. Now it’s fur seal city.

7. You Can Send A Postcard 

South Georgia Heritage Trust is based in Grytviken and serves to restore and protect South Georgia. They’ve eradicated rodents that were introduced when Grytviken was a Norwegian whaling station. The rodents were preying upon bird eggs and putting seabirds that nest on South Georgia at risk for extinction.

Buildings, including a white wooden Norwegian Lutheran church, whale processing equipment, and whale oil vats are scattered about Grytviken. Docent-led tours and the museum tell of the whaling station’s history. You can buy a souvenir in the museum shop and mail a postcard from Grytviken’s post office. 

8. You Can Toast Sir Ernest Shackleton

While at Grytviken, you can visit Sir Ernest Shackleton’s grave. He died on South Georgia in 1922 from a heart condition. Traditionally, visitors toast Shackleton with a glass of scotch whiskey, reserving just a bit to pour on his grave. It was his favorite drink.

A short, whitewashed picket fence encircles the cemetery filled with graves of the whaling station workers and sailors. Many succumbed to industrial accidents and many died from typhus. South Georgia’s magistrate William Barlas, was the last person buried here. He was swept into the sea by an avalanche in 1941.

9. You’ll Enjoy Days At Sea

With the extended journey to South Georgia, you’ll be able to relax and enjoy at-sea days. Whether you attend one of the many lectures given onboard, read a good book, watch for whales, dolphins, or seabirds, or play a card game with fellow passengers, a sea day is a chance to relax and enjoy a little downtime before your adventures begin in Antarctica.

Pro Tip: If you’re departing from South America, expeditions to South Georgia and Antarctica include several stops in the Falkland Islands. The best months to make this trip are November through February. To maximize your time on land during excursions, book your cruise on a ship carrying fewer than 100 guests.

Mount Everest. Two words that conjure up dreams of adventure, excitement, and achievement. To actually reach the summit of Mount Everest, on the crest of the Great Himalayas of southern Asia, is a legendary feat that demands huge sacrifices. Everest Base Camp (EBC), at 18,300 feet, is no walk in the park, but it does offer an achievable goal for people with a good level of fitness and determination, and who want a glimpse of the world’s highest peak. The trek to EBC is among the most dramatic and picturesque in the Himalayas. The scenery is spectacular, the trails of a high standard, the accommodation a cultural experience, and interactions with the local Sherpa people will make this a truly memorable trip.

The route to Base Camp is often referred to as “the steps to heaven.” At every bend, the trail provides another incredible photo opportunity, with beautiful forests, dramatic rugged mountains, alpine lakes, glacial moraines, interesting Sherpa villages, and, depending on the season, valleys filled with the gorgeous pink blossomed rhododendrons. For active adventurers who are not afraid to break a sweat, the trek to Everest Base Camp opens a window to the top of the world.

I am going to address some of the frequently asked questions about trekking to Everest Base Camp and give you a few tips to help you really enjoy the journey.

How Long Does It Take? 

It takes between 11 and 14 days for an Everest Base Camp round trip. Most people will do it in 12 days: 8 days to hike from Lukla (where you fly from Nepal’s capital, Kathmandu) to Everest Base Camp and then 4 days to trek back to Lukla. You could shorten the journey by hiring a helicopter to fly you back from base camp, but this adds considerable expense to your trip, and as the return trek is all downhill, all the hard work is done and you can really appreciate the scenery.

How Far Will You Walk? 

The entire trek is an 80-mile round trip. This is the distance from Lukla to Everest Base Camp and back to Lukla.

Probably the more important question actually, is how much altitude will you be gaining? Lukla is at 9,383 feet above sea level and Everest Base Camp is 17,600 feet. That’s a pretty substantial increase in elevation. The closer you get to Everest Base Camp, the more challenging the trek becomes. Once you get up beyond 14,000 feet, you are breathing only 50 percent of the oxygen at sea level, so walking on flat ground starts to feel surprisingly difficult and even small hills start to feel more like mountains!

When Is The Best Time To Go? 

There are two main seasons to trek to EBC: in the fall (October/November) and in spring (April/May).

The climbing season for those attempting to summit Mt. Everest is April/May, but the better season for the trek is during fall since this is when skies are clearest and the scenery magnificent.

Should You Book A Guide, A Trekking Company, Or Do It Alone?

While it is not compulsory to have a guide to trek to Everest Base Camp, and the trail itself is well marked, I believe a local guide will enrich your experience, even if you’re an experienced trekker.

Hiring a guide will cost you around $30 a day. When hiring a local guide, you are providing much-needed employment and also giving yourself the opportunity to learn about the local culture. Many people also hire a porter for about $20 a day. Your porter will carry the bulk of your luggage, leaving you with just a day pack (and a much easier journey).

Alternatively, using a trekking company has the advantage of having everything pre-arranged for you, including flights, accommodation, transfers, meals, guides, porters, insurance, etc. Another advantage of booking with a trekking company is that the guide will have been trained to spot signs of altitude sickness and will be carrying oxygen. I’d recommend White Magic Adventure Travel.

How Fit Do You Need To Be? 

Most days, you will be hiking between 5 and 8 miles, a very doable distance. There are no “technical” sections on the hike, this is just a graded hiking trail. No rock scrambling, no rock climbing, no special skills needed. But bear in mind, it’s not the distance of the daily hikes that makes the trek a challenge, it’s the elevation. Having a good level of fitness will make the whole trip much easier and much more enjoyable. As a rule of thumb, I’d suggest you should be able to easily walk 10 miles a day, several days in a row while wearing a backpack.

How Do You Stay Healthy?

My biggest piece of advice here is to go vegetarian. If you see meat on a menu during your trek, be aware that all meat is carried up by porters from below Lukla, due to the no-killing policy in Sagarmatha National Park. That means by the time you’re eating it, it’s old and probably not that fresh! Another food-related tip is to avoid the yak cheese, it doesn’t seem to sit well in most western tummies! Do bring along some snacks though, because the food can get monotonous!

Secondly, take your time. “Slow and steady” is the key. Altitude sickness can affect anybody, even the super fit. Watch out for signs of altitude sickness, like pounding headaches, dizziness, sleeplessness, loss of appetite, and breathlessness. I’d recommend that before your trip, you get the prescription medication such as Diamox, which helps prevent altitude sickness, but if symptoms persist, turn around and descend.

Stay alert. The trail is relatively wide and well marked but can be treacherous in places. Listen for the bells of oncoming animals, and stand on the inner side of the trail as they pass, so you can’t be knocked off! Also stand aside for porters, who often run along the trails; this is a sign of respect, but also helps prevent traffic jams.

Finally, drink bottled/treated water and forgo alcohol, it dehydrates you, making you more susceptible to altitude sickness. Bathroom facilities can be pretty dire, so some hand sanitizer can be worth its weight in gold. Lastly, cover up — the sun is harsh at high altitudes. Use a good sunscreen and wear a hat, long-sleeve shirts, and pants.

What About Altitude Sickness? 

You may already know to expect shortness of breath and fatigue when trekking at high altitudes. It may still come as a surprise though to discover just how draining hiking at elevation can be. Don’t be surprised if you find yourself out of breath just rolling over in your sleeping bag some nights!

Altitude sickness can start to occur at elevations over 7,900 feet; though most people need to be at much higher altitudes before they really start feeling symptoms. Symptoms of altitude sickness include shortness of breath, headache, nausea, vomiting, and dizziness. Altitude sickness can be a life-threatening condition that, in severe cases, can lead to cerebral edema, pulmonary edema, and even death. The best treatment for altitude sickness is to descend immediately to a lower altitude.

I am not trying to alarm you or scare you off. While you can expect to feel at least some effects of altitude, the eight-day trek to Everest Base Camp is designed to give you enough time to acclimatize.

What Is It Like To Fly To Lukla?

The Tenzing-Hillary Airport in Lukla is found on the list of “The world’s most dangerous airports.” The geography of the airport’s location, combined with often adverse weather conditions and a very short runway, make flying in and out of Lukla a nerve-wracking experience. So come mentally prepared.

How Much Time Do You Need In Nepal?

If the only thing you want to do in Nepal is to trek to Everest Base Camp, you need the number of days for the trek and two days in Kathmandu on either side of the trek, to get over any jet lag and explore the city. So if you plan to do a 12-day trek, then you will need a minimum of 16 days in Nepal.

Bonus Tips

• Accommodations are in basic trekking lodges, known as teahouses, run by Sherpa families. Each lodge has a central communal area with a large stove to provide heat. Bedrooms are unheated and generally have two beds, with mattresses, pillows, and a blanket. You should bring a sleeping bag and I’d recommend a pillowcase. Access to electricity points for charging devices costs extra. Wi-Fi is available in some locations, but connections are generally poor.
• EBC trek is a very popular route and you will encounter many other trekkers and groups on the trail and at the teahouses and at times it can feel crowded.
• If you are travelling with a United States passport you will require a visa for Nepal, this can be purchased on arrival.

Aside from breathtaking scenery, the trek to Everest Base Camp gives travelers the chance to experience local culture and hospitality. You will have the opportunity to visit Buddhist monasteries and shrines (stupas), you will traverse metal bridges strung over deep canyons, you will pass strings of colorful prayer flags, and in the evening, you will enjoy hot Nepali food and delicious chai (tea) around the teahouse fire. To crown it all, you will feel the incredible personal sense of achievement of having trekked one of the world’s most unforgettable hikes.

We all have that bucket list, even if we might not call it that. What about that trip to Paris you longed for since watching Sabrina when you were young or that safari to Africa long-planned but never executed? Dream locations and trips vary from person to person, but each is interesting.

To get a measure of what experiences most of us have been dreaming of and planning during the travel-starved time of the pandemic, the luxury travel specialist, Unforgettable Travel, collated global search data and came up with the list of Top 10 bucket list experiences that were searched for around the globe.

The searches include many places I have visited and even lived in, and I have been lucky enough to have done most of these experiences, so I will give you the lowdown on what the experience is really like and some tips and tricks so that you will get the most of it when you finally get to go.

1. Burj Khalifa

During the 6 years that I lived in Dubai, I saw the designs suggested for the Burj Khalifa in the newspapers, witnessed it being built, attended the opening ceremony, and went up to the viewing platform whenever I had visitors. 

In short? It’s stunning. The view from the 148th floor, some 1,821 feet high, looking down and across the modern architectural marvel that is Dubai, seeing where the desert ends and where mankind conquered it, is truly bucket list-worthy, especially when you follow the experience up with lunch or dinner in the world’s highest restaurant, Atmosphere, on the 122^nd floor.

Pro Tip: While it might look as if Dubai conquered the desert, the heat is still there, so try and avoid it in summer, as temperatures reach around 122 degrees Fahrenheit outside of the air-conditioned bubbles of habitation.

2. Statue Of Liberty From The Water

The Statue of Liberty is not just an impressive statue, it is the symbol of the American Dream, and seeing it from the water is the best way. Seeing Lady Liberty standing on her island brings to mind the countless immigrants who arrived in New York after crossing the Atlantic Ocean. What a longed-for sight Lady Liberty must have been. Today, visiting by ferry or harbor tours from NYC is maybe a little less impressive, but nevertheless a worthwhile trip. The only thing that takes a little away from it is the touristy spectacle, and all those people posing in front of the statue wearing silly green spiked foam crowns, just like I did when I went with my family. I still love that picture.

Pro Tip: The best way to really appreciate the statue and what it represents is to not only take the ferry but a tour that combines the statue as well as Ellis Island.

3. Mount Everest Base Camp

I must say that I am amazed to find this in the top 10, not because Mount Everest is not a once-in-a-lifetime sight, but because trekking up to Base Camp is a huge physical commitment, not one taken on lightly. I have friends who trekked up to Base Camp; some enjoyed it, others had to abandon the trek because of severe altitude sickness despite going up slowly. I went up to Tengboche, a monastery a mere 4 miles from Base Camp, and I did not hike but went up by helicopter. If seeing Mount Everest and experiencing the majestic Himalayas, the herds of yaks, and the beauty of the surroundings are the main reasons for going, then this is a fun alternative. If trekking is the dream, then go for it; it will be a huge achievement.

Pro Tip: You can take the helicopter all the way to Base Camp, too. 

4. Nile River Cruise

This is the one that got away from me during the pandemic. For a big wedding anniversary, I was supposed to cruise down the Nile but had to reschedule. So, I understand why this ranks highly. The Nile is not only a stunning river, but the Egyptian history found alongside it is simply mind-blowing. From the Valley of the Kings to Luxor and Abu Simbel to Karnak, all are sights that are ancient, enormous, and from a period of riches, cultural, religious, and historic, that we can barely comprehend today.

Pro Tip: For those not keen on crowds, and readers of Agatha Christie, book yourself onto the SS Sudan, on which the author sailed and all the Poirot films were filmed.

5. Eiffel Tower

Having lived in Paris for nearly 6 years and visited countless times beforehand, I have been to the top of the Eiffel Tower many times. When I was little, my parents dragged me up, and when I had my own kid, I dragged her up. But later I realized that it is the one place where you see Paris without its iconic symbol. So when I lived there, I told my visitors not to queue endlessly to go to the top of the Tour Eiffel, but instead to either climb the Arc de Triomphe or visit the viewing platform on Tour Montparnasse. On both, you get the views of Paris, but with the Eiffel Tower in the picture.

Pro Tip: Some winters they build an ice-skating rink on the first floor of the tower, complete with a champagne bar, and a hot chocolate and crepe stand. That is worth climbing up for.

6. Las Vegas Strip

Now, this is one experience I have not had, but I know so many people who went and loved it. Despite the Las Vegas Strip not appealing to me on paper, it should be on my bucket list too, just to prove me wrong. What is it that draws people? As the search states, it is the madness that draws people, that combination of neon lights, the absolutely crazy hotels, the chance of winning big money, and, of course, the what-happens-in-Vegas-stays-in-Vegas attitude. Las Vegas really does sound like the perfect escape from normal life.

Pro Tip: Gambling or no gambling, Las Vegas is pricey, so here are some tips on how to save on expenses.

7. Cross The Golden Gate Bridge

Is it not strange how often a man-made object enhances natural beauty? And this is one of them: a beautiful bridge stretching across a vast expanse of water joining two landmasses. Sounds simple, really. But not only is this bridge 1 mile long but also the setting, between San Francisco Bay and the Pacific Ocean, is just stunning. The views from Marshall’s Beach on the south side are amazing.

Pro Tip: Did you know Golden Gate Bridge has a twin in Lisbon, Portugal? The 25 de Abril Bridge in Lisbon not just looks the same but is also painted in the same color.

8. Empire State Building

New York City is one of my favorite cities in the world. Looking at the lights from above is magical. In Paris, I prefer to look at the city with the Eiffel Tower in view. Because NYC is such a tall city, the view isn’t missing anything if you aren’t seeing the Empire State Building because there is so much else to look at. Entering the beautiful entrance hall and the famous viewing platform is just like stepping into a film set. A worthy bucket list contender.

Pro Tip: I know it sounds crazy, but when I was last up there, it started snowing, making it an even more amazing experience. Go in winter!

9. Louvre Museum

There is no doubt that the Louvre is something special. Not only the world’s largest art museum but also a former royal residence of enormous proportions. The museum holds some very special treasures, from the Mona Lisa to the Winged Victory of Samothrace and the Venus de Milo, the art is worth a visit. Note though that even during the pandemic, when I went to the Louvre and practically found myself on my own in the corridors, there was a queue for Mona Lisa, and you get 1 minute before you are pushed on. You will need to manage your expectations because the Louvre gets incredibly busy.

Pro Tip: Go either for the first time slot at 9 a.m. or catch Mona just before they close at 6 p.m.

10. The Colosseum

2,000 years of history sitting slap-bang in the middle of Rome. Who would not have this on their bucket list? And just last month, for the first time in those 2,000 years, the underground passageways the gladiators and animals used to be channeled through have been opened to the public. It’s an incredible sight to see and coupled with Rome and Italy, one that is hard to beat. Did you know the top of the Colosseum used to be covered by a canvas to keep the sun out? As this is no longer there, bring a sun umbrella or wear a hat when visiting in summer.

Pro Tip: The queues to see this Roman icon can be awfully long, so buy a Roma Pass, which will allow you to skip the queue.

The mountain air was crisp enough to warrant a jacket as we trudged in the early morning dew toward the Tarryall River at the Broadmoor Fishing Camp, which borders the 120,000-acre Lost Creek Wilderness, 75 miles north of Colorado Springs, Colorado.

My friend Jill and I were invited to learn how to fly fish on this trout-filled river high in the Colorado mountains, and as hosted guests of Broadmoor, we had a day ahead of us of learning the Zen-like art of fly fishing.

Before this past year or so, I wasn’t what I would call an avid fisherman. Sure, I’ve been out with a pole a couple of times, snagged some red snapper while fishing in the Caribbean, but I’m not a person who even owns her own fishing pole.

I’m changing. After several “bucket list” fishing trips, I now eagerly look forward to feeling that tug on the line when a fish hits. I like how my forearms tense as I grip and reel in whatever sea or river creature I’ve snagged. I love the speckle of sunlight on rainbow trout skin, the artistic dots that line its belly, and I love the feel of the slightly-slimy bodies in my hand as I pose for pictures before letting the trout free to swim another day.

I’ve been lucky to have gone fishing in some of the most astonishing places in North America and around the world, and the adventures I’ve had on the ultimate fishing bucket list stay with me long after these forays into the wild are over.

Whether you are an avid fishing enthusiast or an amateur fisherman like me, here are seven adventures on the ultimate fishing bucket list that all anglers should try.

1. Salmon Fishing In Alaska

One of the most beautiful places in the world to cast a line is the water around Noyes Island in Alaska’s Inside Passage, and one of the best fishing experiences in Alaska is at Noyes Island’s Steamboat Bay Fishing Club.

Located near Ketchikan, Steamboat Bay’s fishing guides take advantage of the salmon-rich waters of the Alexander Archipelago of Southeast Alaska, and anglers who stay at this luxury Alaskan sportfishing resort often brag of the numbers of king salmon, coho salmon, halibut, and lingcod they reel in.

The boats all slide out into the gray misty mornings as sperm whales shoot sprays of water into the air and bald eagles soar in search of their own fish. On most days, the fishing adventure lasts well into late afternoon, and you’ll come back to a family-style catered dinner, sore from epic battles with king salmon and hauling up giant, flat halibut.

While salmon fishing trips are in no short supply in this part of Alaska, it’s Steamboat Bay that makes this trip the ultimate adventure. Steamboat Bay Fishing Club is located on what was once the site of a thriving salmon cannery, but it can only be reached by boat and chartered floatplane from nearby Ketchikan.

After your day of fishing, the staff at Steamboat Bay not only filets all your fish right there on the dock, but they also vacuum freeze it and make all the arrangements to have your treasure flown home with you.

Did I mention the on-site massages, the traditional Slavic sauna, and the open bar? For a truly indulgent and pampered experience in one of the best salmon-fishing waters in the world, head to Steamboat Bay.

Pro Tip: The lodge is only open mid-June through August and books up quickly, and the experience isn’t cheap. While it’s called “the most expensive in all of Alaska,” serious anglers who want a taste of luxury in Alaska’s stunning landscapes will find the splurge well worth it. 

2. Tarpon Fishing In Florida

Every summer, dozens of boats creep out into the waters around Fort Myers and Sanibel, Florida, with the hopes of snagging and conquering what many consider to be the ultimate sportfishing prize: the mighty tarpon.

Anglers from all over the world assemble along the Gulf Coast as part of the annual “Ding” Darling & Doc Ford Tarpon Tournament benefiting conservation education at J.N “Ding” Darling National Wildlife Refuge on Sanibel Island. Teddy Roosevelt, Ernest Hemingway, Thomas Edison, and Al Capone have all ventured here to hunt tarpon. Today, hundreds of fishing adventurers still seek out the challenge of reeling in one of these notoriously hard-to-catch beasts.

I was among the many hopefuls at the annual tournament, but like many others, I didn’t even get a hit. But 88 tarpons were snagged that day, and just watching their bodies break the water as they flip and twist in the air is a sight to behold.

This part of Florida is called “The Tarpon Capital of the World,” and in fact, the first tarpon ever caught was in Tarpon Bay off of Sanibel Island. Many fishing charters are available in Fort Myers/Sanibel, so you’ll have no shortage of guides to bring you out on this ultimate fishing bucket list adventure.

Because tarpon, known as “The Silver King,” can grow to more than 7 feet in length and can weigh more than 300 pounds, it’s vital to have a good guide with the right tackle and equipment to handle this challenge.

3. Fly Fishing In Colorado

For a rustic yet luxurious fly fishing locale, head to the Broadmoor Fish Camp. Located on more than five miles of private waters, this fish camp has some of the best fly fishing waters in Colorado, and each guest can try their hand at casting under the guidance and tutelage of professional Broadmoor guides.

While you’ll spend most of your time under the shadows of the towering mountains and among aspen trees while fishing, guests at the camp stay at one of the seven guest cabins, and when the day is done, guests gather in the Main Lodge prepared meals, drinks, and relaxation. 

This lodge is also an ORVIS-endorsed facility, which means the Broadmoor Fish Camp has “unparalleled service, respect for natural resources, and an experienced, professional staff” approved by Orvis, the leader in fly fishing equipment and excursions.

There’s plenty of other things to do at the Broadmoor Fish Camp besides fly fishing, though. Guests can enjoy hiking, fly tying, cornhole, various games, or just relaxing on the lodge’s wrap-around porch.

Pro Tip: Overnight stays are available, but to book this fly-fishing adventure, you need to go through The Broadmoor website under the “Wilderness Experiences” tab.

4. Deep-Sea Fishing In Nicaragua

Not many people have heard of the Corn Islands on the Caribbean side of Nicaragua, but avid fishing enthusiasts should definitely put this location on the ultimate fishing bucket list. We stayed on Little Corn Island, just a short but wild inflatable Zodiac boat ride from Big Corn Island, and the local fishermen in this small, 1.5-square-mile island know where all the honey holes are.

On our first day of deep-sea fishing, we hired a local with a small motorboat to take us out into the rough waters. Trolling my line from the back of the boat, I reeled in four large red snappers within two hours — enough for a wonderful lunch on the beach prepared by a man in a little hut who cleaned and cooked our fish for us — and we even hooked a barracuda.

The next day, we went out in the afternoon with a guide named Captain Elvis, who brought us to a honey hole that was so active, the entire bottom of the boat was covered in a myriad of ocean fish, which the men take back to their wives on the island. Most of their wives run restaurants on this roadless island, and because there is no real practical way to take all that fish home, most tourists happily turn over their catch to the locals.

The local guides and fishing excursions aren’t fancy, but they are fun. These guides on Little Corn Island have their own gear to use, and you’ll likely reel in tarpon, king mackerel, and even mahi-mahi.

Pro Tip: To get to Little Corn Island, you can take one of the three daily hour-long flights provided by local airline La Costeña from Managua to Big Corn Island, and then take a 30- to 40-minute panga boat ride to Little Corn Island. These boat rides between islands have limited departures weekly and are sold on a first-come, first-served basis, so be sure to purchase your ticket prior to boarding as soon as you can.

5. Spear Fishing In Mexico

While on a recent trip to Isla Mujeres, a small island across from Cancun, Mexico, we booked a morning to go spearfishing in the waters around the island. I was new and clumsy as a snorkeling spear fisherman, but my friend Tim is an old pro and managed to spear several edible delicacies while we bobbed around the waves and shot spear guns.

We booked our fishing bucket list adventure with Sea Hawk Divers, a small family-run business that offers all kinds of fishing charters, whale shark tours, dive tours, and more.

Our guide, Manu, even took our catch of the day and made a fresh ceviche for us, which he served up in the backyard of the shop with some cold beer. Serious fishermen can even stay at the dive shop’s Sea Hawk Suites for a package deal.

6. Ice Fishing In Door County, Wisconsin

I’m not a big fan of deep, bone-crunching cold, but ice fishing in Door County, Wisconsin, may be the “coolest” adventure on this ultimate fishing bucket list. When winter barrels into the Door, ice forms thick enough at Little Sturgeon Bay, Sturgeon Bay, Egg Harbor, Fish Creek, Ephraim, and Sister Bay for locals and visitors to set up shanties at the fishing holes. 

Once just an activity that locals enjoyed, fishing charters are now offering ice fishing tours for visitors willing to try to catch the famous Door County whitefish or walleye. 

Destination Door County has a nice list of local fishing charter businesses that will set you up for your first ice fishing adventure, but be sure to bundle up. It gets dang cold in Wisconsin in the winter!

Pro Tip: Always talk to local sports shops to ask about ice conditions on the lake or river you want to fish. Remember, ice is never 100 percent safe, and you cannot judge the thickness of the ice by appearance only.

7. Tuna Fishing In Louisiana

Venice, Louisiana, is the tuna fishing capital of the world, and it’s where sportfishing experts go for the big catches. But bluefin and bigeye tuna aren’t the only things you’ll catch when you book a fishing charter out of Venice. From yellowfin tuna and red snapper to grouper and even mahi-mahi, Venice has some of the most diverse fishing in the world.

The many charter boats and guide services available in and around Venice guarantee you’ll be able to book the offshore trip of your dreams. It’s located roughly 75 miles from New Orleans, and redfish is so abundant here that Plaquemines Parish hosts numerous redfish tournaments throughout the year. 

But if you’re looking to bag that trophy bluefin tuna or wahoo, your best bet is to book a Venice trip from January through March.

Pro Tip: Having the right guide and captain can make all the difference in your enjoyment of deep-sea fishing in Venice. The Louisiana Charter Boat Association has a handy website that lists all the licensed charters and captains.

There are birthdays and then there are birthdays. Turning 60 is one of the biggies. For some people, it’s a bit of a panic. Your 50s have come and gone and what’s next may be more of a question mark than an exclamation point. That’s all the more reason to celebrate this milestone birthday with a trip to usher in the new decade.

I’ll be joining the 60 club and can’t decide where to go. I’m not sure of my mood. How do I want to greet my 60s? My dilly-dallying means that I won’t actually celebrate in my birthday month, but surely by the end of this year, I will have come to my senses and gotten on with it! I’m leaning toward something cosmic and soothing to the soul, maybe a repeat Sedona trip or something similar.

But in the meantime, I recently had the pleasure of helping a brother-in-law mark his 60th in Las Vegas. A good time was had by all. You’ll see why it makes the list of places you should consider for your big 60th birthday getaway. The main ingredient for this special fete is to stick with what appeals to you. Whether you love the outdoors, adventure, or culture, or something else is your jam, indulge 100 percent right there.

Best For Party Animals

Las Vegas 

What happens in Vegas stays in Vegas. It’s understood that everyone is going to be on their worst (or wildest!) behavior, and it’s not going to be broadcast to the world. You arrive in town with permission to clown, big time. Go ahead, let your hair down, shake off the last five decades, eat, drink, and be merry. You can’t go wrong with places to crash after a night of partying (I recommend the Park MGM). For that one special meal of the trip, reserve a table at The Mayfair Supper Club in the Bellagio. Recall a bygone era amid the elegance, live jazz, and over-the-top cuisine, like Mary’s Organic Chicken, which is fried and grilled and served with sauce remoulade, shishito hot sauce, green bean amandine, and truffle pasta. And of course, you’ll have the view of the infamous Bellagio fountains spraying rhythmically as you dine. The perfect cure for a hangover is brunch at Catch. Go for the smashed organic avocado toast or cinnamon roll pancakes. Between the shows and the clubs, you’ll dance your way into the next decade and have a lot of secrets to keep.

Pro Tip: As much as Vegas is about the Strip, venture off it a bit. I discovered EllaEm’s Soul Food about 30 minutes away from the action. It’s grandma’s cooking and more. Eat guilt-free; work it off dancing the night away. 

Best For The Outdoorsy

Durango, Colorado

How fast can you say Giddyap? If that thought makes you smile, this historic Old West town is for you. Horseback riding awaits you on mountain trails. The adventure of riding across gurgling streams and surrounding ponderosa pines and wildflowers will make you feel like you’re in one of those movies you watch on a Saturday afternoon. If you want adventure without doing the work, take a jeep tour during which you can summit a peak at 12,000 feet elevation. However, if you must prove you’ve still got it even at 60, use your time in Durango to go white water rafting on the Animas River. When you’re ready to exhale, there’s SKA Brewery and Fox Fire Farms, a vineyard and winery where you might catch an outdoor concert.

Best For Cultural Immersion Lovers

Tuscany, Italy

You may have already accomplished much on your bucket list, but how about a celebration at Agriturismo Casetta, a nearly 300-year-old luxury farmhouse in Tuscany with your close family and friends? And the best part is you can enjoy cultural experiences like truffle hunting with the royal descendants of the Mona Lisa, private art tours, and access to some of Italy’s rarest wine cellars. Imagine zipping around in a Ferrari touring vineyards and wine cellars rarely seen by the public or being in the private woods of a 400 A.D. castle with the descendants of Mona Lisa feasting on a white truffle lunch and wines from the estate’s 1,000-year-old cellars. Top it off with private gallery tours with an art historian.

Editor’s Note: Tuscany bound? Don’t miss our Tuscany Road Trip: The Perfect Itinerary Through Italy’s Stunning Countryside.

Best For A Guys’ Golf Getaway

Cabo San Lucas, Mexico

Designed for a foursome of golf buddies who want an extra-special place to celebrate their love of the game and the big 6-0, the Guys Golf Getaway package at Pueblo Bonito Resorts is an option worth putting on the list of possibilities. For sure the main attraction is the unlimited golf at Quivira Golf Club, the Jack Nicklaus Signature course carved into a stunning Land’s End site at the place where the Sea of Cortes meets the Pacific Ocean. You’ll be wowed by the granite cliffs, massive windswept dunes, rolling desert foothills, and panoramic views. Pueblo Bonito Pacifica is beloved for its ocean-desert-mountain ecosystem, Quivira offers more oceanfront exposure than any other course in Los Cabos.

Best For Architecture Enthusiasts And Foodies

Carmel-By-The-Sea

This is one of my favorite places on the planet. It’s proof that good things come in small packages. The one-square-mile, European-style village of Carmel-by-the-Sea is the stuff of fairytales with its architecture, which has been called a Charles Dickens-inspired wonderland. Take a historic walking tour or go it on your own. Here, it’s all about the food. Make it easy on yourself and take a food tour so you can sample the best of the best. There are some 50 full-service restaurants in this little town. It has more restaurants per capita than any other small city in the U.S. What else makes Carmel special? You’ll love exploring the secret passageways, courtyards, and gardens. There are more than 40 of them. There’s plenty of love for vino here, too, with 17 wine tasting rooms, wine bars, and bottle shops.

Pro Tip: Take a side trip to nearby Monterey. Cannery Row is charming, and the aquarium is one of the best.

Best For Lovers Of Slow Travel

Canyons & Deserts Train Trip With Vacations By Rail

You can’t go wrong with a nine-day tour called Canyons & Deserts that features Sedona. Sedona is my sweet spot. It’s the kind of place where you find your center, clear your head, and leave better than you arrived. This trip starts with a full day to explore Las Vegas. Next up, a trek out to Death Valley National Park, hitting all the main sites including the lowest point in North America, Badwater Basin. The itinerary includes Owen’s Valley, surrounded by the Sierra Nevada, White, and Inyo Mountains. A trip like this wouldn’t be complete without the ghost town of Randsburg, where you’ll see the remains of the Old West’s gold rush with preserved museums, antique stores, and saloons. Taking two days across Route 66, you’ll arrive at the Grand Canyon for a motorcoach tour. Then you’ll make your way to Sedona, with its red sandstone terrain, vortexes, and more. Stop in the ghost town of Jerome and board the Verde Canyon Railroad with first-class tickets along the green waters of the river under the lush canopy. With one last day of desert adventure in Sedona, a farewell dinner concludes the adventure before you head to Phoenix the next day for departure. 

Best For The Lavish Beach Bum

St. Thomas, U.S. Virgin Islands

This mountainous island is a sight to behold with its white-sand beaches, green rolling hills, and flora. But St. Thomas stands out for its sophisticated and cosmopolitan vibe, too. Think fine dining, nightlife, and luxurious accommodations. There’s a reason to make your home away from home the newly renovated Ritz-Carlton, St. Thomas. The views over Great Bay, locally sourced cuisine, a luxury catamaran for sunset cruises, snorkeling tours and private events, and a renovated Club Lounge with updated culinary offerings and marine-inspired decor are just part of the attraction. For the ultimate 60th birthday bash, set sail on one of the property’s three luxury sailing catamarans. The Lady Lynsey II is an exquisite 60-foot vessel that offers island-hopping excursions, snorkeling tours, and champagne sunset sails.

Pro Tip: You’ll cheap yourself if you spend at least a day in nearby St. John with its hipster vibe, fab beaches, and great restaurants. What I fell in love with was all the historical sites, including the Catherineberg Ruins, Annaberg Sugar Plantation, and Cinnamon Bay Nature Loop Trail.

Best For Wine Lovers

Sonoma, California 

There’s more to California wine than Napa. I love Napa, don’t get me wrong, but escape to the Russian River Valley’s luxury boutique hotel, the Farmhouse Inn in Sonoma. Set off your celebration with the Farm, Flight & Field two-day getaway. The fun includes a four-hour helicopter tour of the Sonoma Coast featuring stopovers at a remote vineyard and a picnic lunch in an exclusive coastal location as well as spa treatments, a seven-course meal from the inn’s Michelin-starred restaurant, an exclusive wine library, a food-paired wine tasting, and other once-in-a-lifetime experiences. Keepsakes include handmade ceramic teacups from Cristina Hobbs for use in the spa and to take home, an in-room welcome gift, wine amenity, and a Paul Hobbs Winery takeaway risotto/dashi kit with a recipe from the estate chef.

While many people have Machu Picchu on their bucket list, neither my daughter nor I were amongst them. When the opportunity arose, I went because of my interest in travel and photography. She went to humor me. I’d never been particularly enthralled by the photos of Machu Picchu. I mentally understood the importance of an ancient city, captured en toto as if the entire population had suddenly been run off. 

But standing on the terraces, overlooking the Citadel, and walking within it, where a city of people lived, loved and died hundreds of years ago, I understood the mystical and spiritual nature of the place as no photograph could quite capture. 

Which makes this the perfect time to plan your trip so you can, too. With forethought, you can maximize your time at this UNESCO World Heritage Site. 

A Quechua phrase meaning “Old Peak,” Machu Picchu, the best surviving representation of an Incan City, built in the middle of a cloud forest around the 15^th century, sits 2,430 meters high in the eastern mountain range of the Peruvian Andes. 

Its mysterious abandonment, estimated just 80 years after construction, adds to the dramatic pull to this remote, high altitude location and has contributed to its becoming one of the New Seven Wonders of the World. 

Yale archeologist Hiram Bingham rediscovered Machu Picchu in 1911 and brought publicity to this deserted city, untouched by the Spaniards’ conquest, opening a new door to imagination and contemplation over what happened to the original inhabitants. 

Visitors have the option to trek the 26-mile Inca Trail, with porters (think Sherpas) to haul what’s needed or use the combination of plane, train, bus, and shoe leather to explore the surrounding area and reach this spirit-filled destination. 

The Incas worshipped the life-giving properties of the sun and worshipped the sun god’s wife, the moon. Harmony and mysticism somehow embraced the duality of the culture, and transformed the architecture. 

The structure reveals complex irrigation systems, farming terraces, and living quarters for royalty, nobles, and servants. It showcases the incredible engineering required to move stones — many weighing over 50 tons — from a distance … completely without wheels then constructed so tightly without any form of mortar that it’d be difficult to get a razor blade to fit between. The perfectly interlocked stone roofed with straw is characteristic of this period.

If you’re part of a photography group, as I was with the Great Escape Photography Expedition, your tour package is likely to include the afternoon before and then an early morning photo session. That’s your best chance for sunset and sunrise photos. If you’re as lucky as we were, you’ll get what photographers call the “mustache” photo … clouds wafting across Huayna Picchu in the dawn.

In addition to a tour of the Citadel, there are several other things to do while in this UNESCO World Heritage Site. The more you know about them in advance, the better you can plan your journey to maximize your experience.

1. Huayna Picchu

Also known as Waynapicchu, this mountain stands guard over the Inca Citadel. This hike is the most desired experience in Machu Picchu, so be certain your tour company makes reservations months in advance. It’s another 300 meters above the Citadel with slopes up to 60 degrees. Many consider it to be one of the most amazing short walks in the world. 

Only 400 people can access their trails each day. Plan your attack on the Citadel so you can see it all. Be warned, if you wind up at the exit accidentally, they will not let you retrace your steps.

Climbing to the top of this summit is challenging. The roads are steep, and the cliffs appear dangerous. If you stick to the well-marked paths, though, the more treacherous parts near heart-racing ravines have safety ropes to hold onto.

This mountain has zigzagging paths and staircases carved from stone. When it rains, it’s common to see visitors descend on their bottoms – slipping down to the next step one bump at a time, rather than risk a dangerous fall.

2. Temple Of The Moon

As the Incas built stone paths, they built a stone cave called the Temple of the Moon, less than 400 meters from the summit of Huayna Picchu. It’s open faced and shallow wherein the center stands a throne carved from rock with steps nearby that lead deeper into the cave. 

3. The Citadel

The Citadel has two parts, Hanan (upper part) and Hurin (lower part), consistent with the principle of Dualism popular in Andes Society. They recognized that nearly everything, from cities to mountains, to astronomical features, had a complementary side, including Mother Earth (Pacha Mama) and the Rain (Pacha Tata) peacefully coexisting.

4. The Temple Of The Sun

The Temple of the Sun is a semicircular building erected on a huge solid granite rock. The natural cave beneath it is thought to have been the Royal Tomb. Inside the temple is a carved stone between two windows, one facing north and the other facing west. The windows’ shade perfectly align during the solstices and equinoxes. 

5. Temple Of The Condor

The Condor symbolized the upper world to the Andean people. As you near the end of the Citadel tour, if you don’t know where to look, you will miss the condor. The face is at ground level and the wings are created by two rock walls. The guide may be anxious to keep people moving forward. Allow the crowds to pass and take your photo (but don’t do what we did … don’t stand in the window to try to get a better photo).

6. Temple Of The Three Windows

On the west side of Machu Picchu, at the very heart of the urban sector in the main plaza, stands the Temple Of The Five Windows, of which three remain.

The three windows are said to represent each part of the world: the heaven (Hanan-Pacha), the present surface (Kay-Pacha) and the underground (Uku-Pacha). Sunrise is beautifully displayed within this temple. 

7. The Main Temple

At the highest part of the Citadel, in the main plaza, you’ll find “Wayrana,” Quechuan for “a very windy place.” This three-sided temple leaves room for the wind to enter, and it does! Inside, you’ll find a carved rock that represents the Southern Cross. The temple was used to celebrate rituals for the “creator of everything in this universe.”

8. The Intihuatana

Located in the main plaza, the Intihuatana, Quechuan for “A place where the sun is tied,” is a four-sided, flat-surfaced carved rock measuring 1 x 2 meters. Each side represents a cardinal point indicated by shadow at the solstices or equinoxes. Modern day astronomers consider this stone work as an astronomical observatory and solar clock. 

9. Explore Hundreds Of Man-Made Terraces

Llamas are surprisingly nimble on the steep steps between terraces. While they will take their right of way, it’s worth the climb to the top terrace to peer down at this ancient civilization site. Take someone you love, as I did with my daughter, and have some time and space together, away from your tour group. You may be surprised by the new perspective.

10. Stairs And More Stairs

Most people don’t realize the sheer number and volume of stairs throughout the site. The altitude change is a shock to most systems. Be prepared to stop and rest regularly, and drink plenty of water. 

11. Hike To The Intipunku

The hike to Intipunku, Quechua for “Sun Gate,” took us nearly three hours round trip. It’s another 290 meters above the Citadel. Many find the steep path challenging. Complete this hike before your tour of the Citadel. Be sure not to underestimate how long it takes so you won’t be late. 

Called the Sun Gate because the sun’s rays pass there during the summer solstice, it was used as an entrance gate by the Incas. More than anything, when you reach it, you’re likely to feel the same sense of accomplishment we did conquering the hike.

12. Hiking The Machu Picchu Mountain

The actual Montaña Machu Picchu faces Huayna Picchu. Moderately difficult, this hike takes an average of 4 hours, round trip. The wide paths made of stone are easier to climb than those on Huayna Picchu, but its highest point soars to 3,082 meters (10,111 feet) or 600 meters above the Citadel.

At the Machu Picchu exit, look for the table where they keep a passport style stamp. It adds to the memory of this grand adventure.

Further Reading:

• Huacachina: The Unexpected Desert Oasis In The Middle Of Peru
• 9 Things To Know About Peru’s Incredible Culture

True traveler confession: This is the only time my exploring bucket-list expanded solely because of social media envy. My friend posted a photo standing in a place that did not look at all like home. It was mid-summer and she was bundled up in layers and mittens, shivering on the edge of some body of water, posted under two huge arching bones.

It looked cold, distant, and amazing. Her picture inspired a quest to stand in the same place: Utqiagvik, Alaska — often known by its former name of Barrow. The northernmost city in the United States is about 2.5 times closer to the North Pole than it is to Washington, D.C. When you get there, you’ll find fewer than 4,500 residents, two hotels, and a place unlike any other in the country.

Intrigued? Start planning now because this is not a spur-of-the-moment road trip. In fact, no roads actually lead all the way to the community on the Chukchi Sea coast. It’s just part of the adventure of a trip, which can last as little as a day but promises memories to last a lifetime. 

Here are seven ways to make the most of your time at the U.S.’s far (really far!) northern border.

1. Enjoy The Journey And The Destination 

I was embarrassed to admit I wasn’t exactly sure where I was going. I could point to it on a map, yet some websites talked of Utqiagvik, while others said Barrow. Which was correct and how did I pronounce it? Luckily, Facebook offers an expert guide to hear for yourself. It boils down to tradition. Though about 60 percent of Utqiagvik residents are Iñupiat Eskimo, non-natives started calling it Barrow because it was easier to pronounce. In 2016, the community voted to make Utqiagvik official. 

Pro Tip: When searching online to plan your trip, search for both names. Community information comes from Utqiagvik; Alaska Airlines flies to Barrow. I’ll call it Utqiavik for the rest of the article to respect the community’s decision. 

Alaska Airlines is one of your only ways to get to this destination. Book the one direct round-trip flight to and from Anchorage; flights from Fairbanks to Utqiagvik connect through Anchorage. 

My pre-pandemic trip was part of a longer Alaskan experience with my family, so we chose a one-day chartered air tour from Fairbanks, which required one refueling stop. We had less time to explore on our own, yet our Utqiagvik tour guide was ready when we landed to take us on an adventure, no other plans needed — and we came home with an “official” Arctic Circle crossing certificate!

If you get to stay longer, you can choose between two hotels: the King Eider Inn and the Top of the World Hotel. Tripadvisor lists five B&Bs. Vrbo has no listings. This tells you something very important about a trip here: This is a small community with few choices. Going in to explore an authentic community where a few thousand people work and live is great. Going in expecting the Sunset Strip could leave you disappointed.

2. Bring Light-Blocking Sleep Masks (Or Flashlights!)

Speaking of sunsets, they don’t happen every day. The sun rises in mid-May and stays up for 83 days. The flip side: It sets in mid-November for 66 days of unrelenting darkness.

February’s average high temperature is -7 degrees Fahrenheit; I went in balmy July, where the high averages 47 degrees. Tour guide Mike Schults, who has spent 13 years showing people the tundra, says he doesn’t recommend tours in the dark. However, he loves the coldest months and says, “50-below-zero cold air slaps you in the face and lets you know you’re alive.”

Pro Tip: Schults, who has no website but can be reached at shults53@hotmail.com or (907) 355-2204, is currently one of the only private tour guides operating in Utqiagvik. Large tour groups are not being scheduled for 2021 as of now due to COVID-19. Check before making plans.

3. Start Your Whale Of A Tale

Remember that picture of my friend from Utqiagvik? It was taken at one of the first stops I wanted. The arch is known as the Gateway to the Arctic and it’s made of a bowhead whale’s jawbone. This whale is one of the oldest and largest mammals on earth — just one can weigh more than 120,000 pounds! These bones prove it. This photo opportunity is a memorable reminder this is a community that has used — and still uses — whales as a critical part of its culture. 

Pro Tip: One other easy photo op in town is a multi-directional signpost. (Just ask and people will direct you there!) Want to know how far you are from Port-au-Prince, Haiti? Easy: 4,886 miles. It’s 3,572 miles from Austin, Texas, and 4,774 miles from Lake Placid, Florida. It may not show your hometown, but it will likely suggest you are a long distance from it!

4. If You Really Want A Whale Of A Tale…

Time your trip to the annual whaling festival, called Nalukataq. Regrettably, my July visit was a few weeks too late to experience what Utqiagvik residents say is a must-see event. The festival is a chance for Iñupiat Eskimos to celebrate the whaling season. It’s held in late June, scheduled around the whale hunts, with traditional dances and food, including a chance to try muktuk, the traditional dish of frozen whale skin and blubber. 

Whenever you visit, you can learn about culture at the National Park Service Iñupiat Heritage Center. This site helps you understand history with artifacts and exhibits, and it gives local artists a chance to practice their crafts. 

Pro Tip: There’s a gift shop here, which is noteworthy because you won’t find many souvenir shopping options in town. This is one of your best bets for treasures to take home. 

5. Go Into A Grocery Store (Really!)

Remember, there are no roads into Utqiagvik, so it’s no simple task to “pick something up.” Everything must come by air — or in summer, by ship — so supply matters. Stepping into a grocery store gives you a sense of what it takes to live in this community. Guide Mike Schults reports orange juice costs $18 a bottle, a quart of mayonnaise costs $23, and watermelon is a luxury at $80. This reality has inspired Youtube videos by tourists wanting to see these prices to believe it. A stop here is a small part of understanding life lived remotely.

Pro Tip: One tourist who checked out the prices bought groceries and donated them to a local food pantry. It’s a great way to learn and leave things a bit better.

6. See A Memorial To A Plane Crash That Shocked The World

In the 20th century, humorist Will Rogers was known around the world for sayings like, “I don’t make jokes. I just watch the government and report the facts.”

In 1935, Rogers and famous pilot Wiley Post were killed in a plane crash 15 miles from Utqiagvik. A National Park Service article about the crash says the news was so stunning, both the House of Representatives and Senate in Washington, D.C. stopped work for a period of national mourning. There are two memorials to the crash victims, one at the crash site and the second in Utqiagvik. You will see the names on one other important place in the community: The Wiley Post-Will Rogers Memorial Airport is named in their honor.

7. Go The Distance: One More Milestone 

Yes, Utqiagvik is the northernmost city in the U.S. But if you want the northernmost point, you need to go nine miles more to Point Barrow. When you do, you can skip rocks or dip your toes in the Arctic Ocean. It is as cold as you’d imagine; water is usually around 30 to 36 degrees Fahrenheit in summer. When you’ve come this far, it’s really worth crossing this final thing off your Utqiagvik checklist. 

Pro Tip: Tourists can not access Point Barrow on their own as it is located on tribal land. You need to go on an approved tour like this one; it offers Polar Bear Plunges for those who want to go all-in to the water! One other note: Polar bear plunges are more than marketing ploys; polar bears really do come into the community. 

When my family talks about adventures, this trip always makes the list. It was eye-opening, unique, and unforgettable — even better than the pictures!

A small chain of underwater volcanoes lies off the coast of Africa, 1,120 miles due west of Angola in the South Atlantic Ocean. Only one of these volcanoes actually breaks the surface though, and this is the tiny island of Saint Helena. Regularly hidden in cloud and mist, the island was uninhabited and undiscovered until the Portuguese stumbled upon it in 1502. Incredibly they managed to keep this extraordinary place a secret for almost 90 years. In 1659, the British East India Company took possession of the island and began a fortification process that has left the island covered in old cannons and crumbling stone forts. In the years that followed, a parade of now famous and infamous people have found their way to Saint Helena, including astronomer Edmond Halley (of comet fame), Captains Cook and Bligh, naturalist Charles Darwin, as well as numerous exiles, prisoners of war and, of course, probably the island’s most well-known exile, Napoleon.

For more than 500 years, the only way to reach Saint Helena was by sea. In its heyday, more than 1,000 ships a year called in. However, with the opening of the Suez Canal in 1869, the island became an isolated and forgotten outpost. Over the last 50 years, only the most intrepid travelers have ventured to her shores. This most isolated of British territories and its people were for years only connected to the outside world by a five-day boat trip from Cape Town. That was until the island’s airport opened, connecting Saint Helena and its population of around 4,000 people with the outside world with twice-weekly flights from South Africa. Nowadays, cruise ships also call in at Saint Helena.

For such a tiny island, there is so much to do — much more than you would expect. My husband and I spent a wonderful week on Saint Helena, doing and seeing everything there was to see and do. Read on for some tips on how best to experience this extraordinary place.

1. Island Tours

We spent our first day on Saint Helena getting orientated, driving the length and breadth of this tiny 77-square-mile island. Deadwood, Longwood, Blue Hill, Man and Horse, Sugar Loaf, Half Tree Hollow, The Gates of Chaos — all places with names sounding straight out of a fairy tale, and perfectly suited to this enchanted island. From the black volcanic sand beach to cloud forests and historic fortifications perched high over churning seas, we saw it all. We lunched in one of the breeding grounds of the so-called wirebird (the Saint Helena Plover), the island’s only surviving endemic bird, and one of the rarest birds in the world. We passed the donkey sanctuary, the golf course, a curious rock called the Bellstone that, when struck, sounds just like an old church bell, ending the day with sundowners at South West Point, we looked down the dramatic coastline and out over water that glistened like liquid silver as the sun sank low in the sky. Driving back to the capital, Jamestown, we watched as sea mist slide over the landscape, enveloping the island in mystery.

For island tours, I can recommend Aaron’s Adventure Tours.

2. History

In 1815, Napoleon, after meeting his “Waterloo,” was exiled to Saint Helena. The former French emperor, who had once ruled an empire that stretched across Europe, died six years into his exile on the island and his various residences and tomb (now empty) were on our itinerary. Also on our must-do list was afternoon tea at Plantation House. Built in 1792, Plantation House is home to both the island’s governor and to Jonathon, a Seychelles giant tortoise, who at 185 years old, is simultaneously the island’s oldest resident and probably the world’s oldest land animal. Jonathon has been on the island since 1882, and he, along with a couple of younger and smaller companions, can be visited as they graze the lawns of Plantation House.

3. Whale Sharks

Saint Helena is one of the best places in the world to see whale sharks. Every year between December and March they can be found here. The island may even be the key to whale shark reproduction in the Atlantic, as the whale sharks here congregate in an equal split of adult males and females. This 50/50 mix of adults is incredibly important because the mating behavior of these animals has never been recorded.

We set out one morning to look for whale sharks, bouncing across the water in a boat. We were out of real whale season, and after looking for some time, were starting to lose hope of success. Suddenly, just below us in the water was a gentle giant, the biggest fish in the sea: a whale shark. We quickly got ourselves into the water. We swam beside her for over half an hour. She was immensely inquisitive and seemed as keen to get a good look at us, swimming slowly in our direction as we back paddled out of her way. No underwater experience I’ve ever had can compare to swimming with my first whale shark.

For whale shark tours contact Dive Saint Helena.

4. Scuba Diving And Snorkeling

In addition to whale sharks, several other special creatures are found in the waters around Saint Helena, including humpback whales, turtles, fantastic colorful fish, and resident populations of dolphins.

Balancing on the edge of the dive boat, my husband and I exchanged glances. Neither of us had dived for more than a year, and yet here we were, on a boat, with a bunch of experienced divers who clearly knew what they were doing. I was feeling a little out of my element as we headed out to sea! I needn’t have worried though. The minute I entered the water, I was surrounded by clouds of brilliantly colored fish. Mesmerized, I forgot all my nervousness. It is easy to love diving at Saint Helena. The clear water was a balmy 73 degrees, and the visibility was somewhere around 65 feet. Before I knew it, my tank was almost empty and it was time to clamber back on board the boat. Wrecks, reefs, islands, and caves abound in the waters around Saint Helena, all within a relatively short boat ride of the capital, Jamestown.

Our final morning on Saint Helena, we decided on a last-minute snorkel in Jamestown Harbour, just a stone’s throw from our hotel room. We clambered down slippery stone steps into the water and just feet from the harbor wall, found ourselves swimming through schools of fish that scattered like confetti, revealing below us a shipwreck. In 1911, the SS Papa Nui exploded and sank in only 40 feet of water right in Jamestown Harbour. The ship laid stretched out on the harbor floor below us. A migratory green turtle swam past, burrfish and groups of goatfish appeared, and there were glimpses of anemones and octopus amongst the tangled wreckage.

For expertly run scuba diving and snorkeling, reach out to Sub-Tropic Adventures.

5. Hiking

Hiking is one of the most popular outdoor activities on Saint Helena. There are numerous popular trails available around the island’s coastline, giving people the chance to experience Saint Helena’s rugged exterior and capture some of the most magnificent coastal and cliff-edge views.

Hiking through a surreal and barren landscape, we headed to Lot’s Wife’s Ponds, one of Saint Helena’s best-known trails. It’s a strenuous but rewarding hike with breath-taking scenery. We encountered breeding colonies of black-faced boobies and looked down over the brilliant blue waters waiting, enticingly, below. Reaching the last stretch of our hike, we clambered down a length of rope that hung casually over the side of the cliff. Reaching the water, we stripped off for a swim. Waves crashed against a natural stone breakwater, leaving the rock pools calm and undisturbed. Rock formations towered above us and tropical fish surrounded us, nibbling on our toes. Octopus, sea urchins, and starfish nestled amongst the rocks below us.

There are also numerous inland hikes to enjoy on Saint Helena. The severe coastal cliffs give way to ridges and valleys with lush green vegetation. We headed inland to the island’s highest point, Diana’s Peak (2,690 feet). We climbed through the cloud forest, a much easier and cooler walk than our coastal hike, and from the top were rewarded with stunning views across the island, from its green heart to its barren edges and the endless ocean beyond.

Terrific guided hikes and walks are run by MY St Helena Tours.

6. Coffee

For a change of pace, we called in at one of the island’s coffee plantations. Coffee, more specifically, the Green-Tipped Bourbon Arabica variety, was first introduced in 1733 from Yemen by the East India Company and is still being cultivated here today, unchanged. We had a guided tour of the plantation and were talked through the process from picking and pulping to hulling and roasting, and ultimately got to drink some for ourselves. Napoleon, after years of isolation and exile, apparently said, “The only thing good about Saint Helena is the coffee,” and whilst my husband, who is a bit of a coffee aficionado, definitely concurred that the coffee was good, we would have to disagree about the “only” part of that statement, as Saint Helena is without a doubt a destination that just keeps on giving.

7. For A Physical Challenge

In 1829, a funicular railway was built to connect Jamestown, up the side of the rather steep Ladder Hill, with Ladder Hill Fort. Just a few steps from our hotel and past the oldest Anglican Church in the Southern Hemisphere are the 699 steps that are all that remains of this railway. The angle of ascent is a taxing 40 degrees, and before breakfast each morning I challenged myself to the climb. I gave it my best shot, but never managed to get near the record ascent time, currently standing at an impressive 5 minutes and 16 seconds! Having only managed to convince my husband to join me a couple of mornings, most days I reached the top of the ladder and looked down over what is regarded as the best-preserved Georgian town in the world, knowing that he was still tucked up in bed, awaiting bacon and eggs!

Pro Tips

Saint Helena is a tiny, wonderful island, a volcanic peak jutting out of the South Atlantic, quite literally in the middle of nowhere. A welcoming island, where people wave, say hello, and have time to chat. A place with something for everyone, from history to hiking, birding to boat trips, diving, snorkeling, whale sharks, and more.

• Getting There: The only airline offering flights to Saint Helena is Airlink
• When To Go: Saint Helena is a year-round destination, but whale shark season is December to April
• Language: English
• Climate: Warm to hot
• Currency: British Pound
• Medical Insurance: Compulsory, proof must be shown on arrival
• Vaccinations: There are no vaccination requirements
• Travel insurance: Essential
• Note: There are no ATMs on the island and credit cards are not accepted in most places beyond the Mantis Hotel (which takes all major credit cards)
• Where To Stay: Mantis St Helena

For more bucket-list trip inspiration, consider:

• 18 Things I Wish I’d Known Before Visiting Madagascar
• 8 Fantastic Islands To Experience In The Indian Ocean
• 10 Best Experiences On The Canary Islands
• 8 Reasons To Visit The Azores Region In Portugal
• Swimming With Manta Rays In Hawaii: 8 Things To Know
• I Finally Checked Tanzania Off My Bucket List And It Was Worth The Wait

“Watch, and you’ll see, someday I’ll be part of your world,” said Ariel. The Little Mermaid didn’t realize humans might prefer to join her under the sea. Her clamshell bed has never looked inviting, but there are two luxurious ReefSuites Down Under on Australia’s Great Barrier Reef, where humans can sleep 15 feet under the sea (no gills or SCUBA equipment required).

Sleep With The Fishes

The suites are part of a $10 million pontoon complex called Reefworld moored over The Great Barrier Reef. The floor-to-ceiling windows give new meaning to the saying sleep with the fishes. Guests can eyeball Maori wrasse as big as divers, spot bright orange clownfish — one may well be Nemo — or watch candy-colored parrotfish perform an underwater ballet.

Way Out Under The Sea

Underwater hotels are a growing trend, although mostly they are nearer to land than Reefsuites is, considering its location on the Outer Great Barrier Reef, around 45 miles from shore. Tourists reach the complex via a 3-hour cruise from Airlie Beach, whilst taking in the beauty of the Whitsundays Islands. Or they can board a two-hour cruise from Hamilton Island.

Most of the other people onboard are daytrippers. The pontoon itself reminded me of a resort’s aquatic facilities with sundecks, freshwater showers, changing rooms, air-conditioned spaces, a bar, and even massage services.

Room check-in is at 3 p.m., so after arriving in the late morning, you can enjoy the pontoon activities that help you experience and learn about the world’s most famous reef. The Great Barrier Reef (GBR) was declared a World Heritage Area in 1981 because of its outstanding universal value. ReefWorld ensures this beauty is more accessible than ever before.

Experiences For Non-Swimmers

Non-swimmers can still get close to the reef by entering the underwater viewing chamber or taking a semi-submersible boat ride. On these tours, guests see the same views as divers do of tropical fish and colorful coral. Another dry option is a helicopter ride over Heart Reef. This short trip isn’t just about seeing this romantically shaped and much-photographed reef. Flying over the Great Barrier Reef is an unforgettable experience. From the air, the reef looks like a mood ring with its ever-changing blue, green, and aquamarine hues.

Snorkeling And Diving

Snorkelers staying at ReefSuites will enjoy designated areas with ropes anchored to the ocean floor so it’s easy to pull themselves along. They can also join a guided Snorkel Safari to learn about the reef and identify the fish that can be seen later from the panoramic windows of the underwater suites.

I enjoy swimming, but being short-sighted, feel insecure in the ocean as I can’t see what’s beneath me. Reefworld provides optical masks, and this made a massive difference to my experience. The GBR is one of the seven wonders of the natural world and this first sighting of the coral gardens and darting fish was one of my most memorable travel experiences.

Certified instructors teach visitors how to scuba dive with as much hand-holding as they need. Experienced divers can venture further out to explore the canyons and the maze of tunnels, where they may encounter giant clams and even a massive Queensland grouper. His name is George, and he may visit you at the window of your Reefsuite later at night.

Your Own Atlantis

After the daytrippers leave, guests have the pontoon to themselves. No need to dive to access your room. Instead, step down the gleaming white stairwell. Unless you feel claustrophobic in large aquariums, you’ll be fine in your air-conditioned suite. The area holds a queen-sized bed and has a full ensuite. The floor is partly glass so you can spot marine life beneath your feet, and the vast window seamlessly connects guests with the underwater world.

Lie in bed for hours mesmerized by the schools of tropical fish that dart and flit and flee. At night, switch on the UV blue light to illuminate the marine life swimming around you. With luck, you’ll receive a visit from George the grouper, who is so massive he will fill your window frame.

At Your Service

Guests are treated like VIPs from the moment they step onboard the catamaran taking them to Reefworld. A sign marks out their Reefsleep Only seating in the air-conditioned top deck. Once at the pontoon, they have dedicated staff looking after them. Beverages such as wine and beer are included in the package.

At sunset, enjoy drinks and canapes with some of the other guests. This is followed by a starlit dinner seated at a long table on the upper deck. A French chef creates dishes from local produce such as beef from Queensland’s Burdekin region, fruit and vegetables from Bowen (Bowen mangoes are to die for), sustainably caught tiger prawns, and reef fish.

Breakfast includes eggs to order and tropical fruits, plus the chance to sip coffee while staring out at the beauty of the reef. Go snorkeling again in virtual privacy before the daytrippers arrive. Checkout time for your room is midday, but you can spend a few hours after that relaxing on the deck before it’s time to leave the pontoon.

Additional Details

Day trips to Reefworld start at just over $200. The two-day Reefsuite experience, including the overnight stay, starts at just over $600 per person and includes all meals, drinks, morning and afternoon tea, a private guided snorkeling tour, and the semi-submersible tour. Where possible, book these experiences for quieter times after the daytrippers leave.

A less expensive stay is on the deck in one of the 12 specially designed waterproof swags (like tents with mattresses). Guests sleep under the stars with a choice of covers to either stargaze or block out the light. This two-day experience offers meals and drinks but not the chance to sleep under the sea. It starts at just under $500 per person.

For additional GBR and Australian adventure inspiration, consider:

• 9 Best Islands Of The Great Barrier Reef
• How To Experience The World’s Highest Cliff Camping
• Australia’s 7 Best Luxury Lodges

Beyond the Edge is the highest commercial cliff camping experience in the world. Your rock-star moment comes when you look down from your portaledge attached to the side of a sheer 1,000-foot cliff face in Australia’s Mount Buffalo National Park.

What’s A Portaledge?

A portaledge is a raft-like deployable platform that juts out from a cliff face. The invention of this lightweight but robust structure enabled professional climbers to scale new heights. I know this because my son is interested in rock climbing and encouraged me to watch The Dawn Wall, the documentary of how Tommy Caldwell and Kevin Jorgeson free-climb Yosemite’s 3,000-foot Dawn Wall of El Capitan. Their 19-day climb was possible because they could use a portaledge as a base camp.

Adventure tourism companies offer the public less extreme but thrilling portaledge experiences. Tourists can enjoy a Cliffnic (lunch or dinner on a sheer rock face) in Colorado. In Germany, adults can experience rock-a-bye-baby cradle sleeps hanging from tree-tops, and in Wales, they can balance on cliff tops over the Irish Sea looking like teabags ready for dunking. But the Beyond the Edge experience ranks as the world’s highest portaledge tourist cliff-face stay.

How To Reach Your Cliff Camping Portaledge

Participants rappel down around 100 feet to the portaledge. Not all guests have climbing experience, so instructors train people in roping and give them plenty of practice until they’re comfortable enough to descend. Guides are at the portaledge to help guests settle in and remain camped at the top, where they are contactable at all times. They equip guests with radios and a whistle and check that their phones are working before the descent.

Who Is This Experience For?

Unleashed Unlimited’s Andrew Dawson, who founded the company with his brother, Howie, has 25 years of experience as a mountain climber. I contacted him to find out about any age restrictions. He said, “The experience requires only a moderate level of fitness and physical ability. Most commonly, participants are in their 30s, but we cater for all age groups.”

Room With A View

One participant described the experience as the “perfect balance of adrenaline rush and total bliss out.” There are phenomenal views of dramatic rock formations, imposing granite tors, and of the Ovens Valley floodplains, where you can sometimes see the Victorian Alps, the southernmost point of Australia’s Great Dividing Range. It’s common to see native birds, and you might even see a wedge-tailed eagle, Australia’s largest bird of prey, swoop past.

The sunset is behind the cliff and often creates a beautiful ambiance with the light it casts across the gorge after dinner.

Portaledges are perfect for stargazing because you’re way out in nature. With little light pollution, you can really appreciate the sparkling night sky. And the portaledges’ fly ceilings are optional. Dawson says most people choose not to have one. Without the fly, they can fully immerse themselves in the view.

“The sunrise is usually one of the highlights,” Dawson says, “as participants are treated to an unobstructed view as the sun pops out over the mountains on the horizon while they enjoy their morning coffee.”

Snap the ultimate photos of all this beauty, but don’t, whatever you do, drop your phone!

Sleeping Arrangements

Don’t argue too much about who gets to sleep on which side of the bed. You have two choices: against the wall or the fall. Initially, it seems like sleepwalkers or those who easily roll out of bed need not apply, but participants are harnessed in and tethered to a rope. In some ways, you are safer here than sleeping on the top of a double bunk — if you could just get the thought of the drop beneath out of your head.

Get Your Life In Perspective

There’s an enormous sense of achievement and a feeling that you can accomplish anything if you can do this. Dawson says the experience is unique as it combines a mix of adrenaline with a peaceful time for reflection and contemplation. The setting offers a silent, private world and has resulted in at least one wedding proposal on high.

Need-To-Know Basis

Yes, nature may call. There are toilets at the top of the cliff and devices on the portaledge.

How To Get Out Of There

It’s back up in the morning, but for those wishing to continue the adventure, there’s an optional descent where you rappel almost 1,000 feet down to the valley floor. This extreme drop is one of the world’s highest commercial abseils. This adrenalin rush is followed by a strenuous, multi-hour scramble through challenging terrain.

Know Before You Go

The Beyond the Edge cliff camping experience runs from November through to May and is weather-dependent. The cost is $620 per person and includes meals. Should you dare to take on The Descent, the experience costs an additional $345 per person with all equipment supplied.

Mount Buffalo National Park is a four-hour drive from Melbourne. The park offers miles of hiking through stunning scenery, wildlife such as wombats and lyrebirds, and flora, including snow gums and wildflowers. Besides rock climbing, rappelling, and hang gliding, the area is a family-friendly snow play, toboggan, and cross country ski area in winter. There’s also plenty of accommodation that doesn’t involve sleeping on a ledge. For more grounded stays with views overlooking wilderness areas, see my picks for Australia’s seven best luxury lodges.

We were gliding effortlessly due east. On the horizon a thin sliver of land was just visible — it was difficult to detect where land ended and the sky started. I was standing on deck with camera in hand. The sun was teasing us, waiting to peek from behind the Italian coastline we were now approaching, ready to usher in the start of another day. The only sound was the gentle flapping of 42 sails in the breeze keeping us steady on course.

After what seemed like an age of waiting, a fiery bright red sun started to rise majestically and lift itself slowly but surely upward into the sky. Still no sound. A few steps to my right stood another man, coffee mug in hand. Over on the left, a beautiful lady was sitting cross-legged, straight-backed, and eyes closed. I wondered if anything she was imagining could be as beautiful, calm, and awesome as the birth of a new day. We didn’t speak — we didn’t need to. We experienced the same awesome splendor of the sunrise another twelve times as we sailed around the Mediterranean with 218 fellow passengers.

All About The Royal Clipper

Star Clippers — a privately owned Swedish company – owns and operates three (soon to be four) tall ships, the largest of these being the 440-foot steel-hulled Royal Clipper which, with five masts and 42 sails, is indeed a regal sight. A framed certificate from the Guinness Book Of World Records, which hangs in the ship’s library, informed us that we were aboard the world’s largest square-rigger.

Anchored a few hundred yards off the shore in Cannes, the majestic clipper simply dazzled as the sunlight bounced off her blue and white hull. Our initial paperwork was quickly completed at the quayside, and we were tendered smartly to the great ship. Onboard, everything was polished wood and mirror-sharp brass fittings. We received our “pass” — a plastic credit card of sorts that would be key to everything over the next couple of weeks; it opened our cabin door and was essential to getting on and off the ship. We learned not to leave home without it!

Our ocean view stateroom was more spacious than we had anticipated: a double bed, a wardrobe, and plenty of cupboard space. A large space under the bed was ideal for storing empty suitcases. A separate bathroom with shower completed our temporary home. The clever use of mirrors made the room seem larger than it was, and with two portholes, it was light and airy. No balconies here nor nine stories of cabins, glass elevators, or thousands of strangers. With almost as many crew as passengers, we all soon got to know each other. The crew, a veritable United Nations of 14 different nationalities from Brazilian to Polish, Belgian to Philippine, was super attentive with a seemingly endless supply of smiles and hellos. Only a few days into the sailing, no-one was a stranger, which made this cruise so much more personal and enjoyable than being just one more anonymous face on a mega cruise liner. Here, quality and attentiveness trumped quantity at every turn.

‘Sailaway!’

That magic moment when the Captain gives the nod to weigh the anchor and set the sails is an experience in itself. Watching the crew set the sails (somewhat disappointingly hydraulically in today’s age — with the push of a button and lots of rope maneuvering) and standing beneath an array of billowing white polyester sails is a humbling moment. You get the feeling you are a very small part of something majestic, something with life and character, and that wild adventures lie ahead. Imaginations were further sparked by the playing of Vangelis’ 1492 “Conquest of Paradise” as we eased away — stirring stuff indeed. We sipped colorful drinks with imaginative names including Hugo, Yellow Bird, and names I can no longer recall but that relaxed my legs and apparently my brain as we left land behind.

Shore Excursions

This 1,500-nautical-mile odyssey quickly moved from the south of France to our first stop in Livorno, Italy, where the ship docked long enough for shore excursions to Florence (a 90-minute drive and time enough to get only a first glimpse of this Renaissance masterpiece), Pisa (a 30-minute drive and long enough to explore the UNESCO World Heritage site that includes that most famous of wobbly towers), and a trip to a local beach. Like any cruise, shore excursions were optional and cost extra. You could join an organized excursion or plan your own and explore independently. Planning ahead to schedule private tours is a great option and one we used in both Pisa and, later, Valencia. There’s nothing like a local to guide you to the best watering holes and eating places off the beaten path.

Additional Stops

The next stop was a beach in Corsica. Dropping anchor about a half-mile off the coast, we were tendered to the beach and told this would be a “wet landing.” I had visions of D-Day, storming out of waist-deep water and taking the beach with our beach towels and umbrellas and declaring it “Ours!” Actually, we landed in no more than a foot of water and were pulling off our clothes before we had even hit the sand.

Our itinerary continued on to Elba (it was great to see where Napoleon was exiled — there are worse places to be sequestered for sure), Menorca, Mallorca, Ibiza (it’s not all drunk Brits in the street), and the Spanish mainland ports of Valencia and Barcelona. In many of these ports of call, there were optional organized excursions to local towns and cities or a jaunt to a local beach.

Back On Board

Returning hot and sweaty from one of the excursions, we approached the ship on our tender and could see the marina platform at the back of the ship was open for passengers to swim, kayak, float, or paddle off the back of the ship. We boarded, had our keys scanned, and made our way straight to the back. It’s amazing how quickly you can remove your clothing and change into swimming gear almost without breaking stride. We were on the marina deck and ready to jump into the calm, warm, and inviting sea. A maximum of 25 people were allowed in a roped-off area at any time behind the ship and our eagle-eyed crew looked out for our safety. Now this is the way to cool off after a very hot and sweaty walk around town. We climbed out of the water, toweled off, and stopped off at the “we never close” bar before collapsing on our sun loungers.

Our favorite location was at the stern of the ship where you could watch land slip away or the sun dip below the horizon. At other times, we would sit by one of the two small pools or by the small sea-water pool on deck. With a rainbow-colored drink in hand, we would exchange war stories with new friends and put the world to rights. There was no fighting over sun loungers as there were always enough. We hadn’t a care in the world and didn’t want the sun to go down — ever. The sky was cloudless and a gentle warm breeze caressed our bodies. This was our idea of heaven.

Life at sea was far from boring — there is an endless list of activities to keep you from eating and drinking your way around the Mediterranean — though this is an easy temptation. Feeling peckish one evening, I headed to the restaurant for a midnight snack only to bump into a fellow passenger. I ended up back at the bar and never did get my snack. We started each day with 45 minutes of yoga on the deck. By the end, I became proficient at the inverted cow position (or something) and felt good about myself. I admired a couple who ran laps along the deck each morning and thought “Why?” I reflected on life in general during a meditation session, watched fascinated as our Michelin-starred chef demonstrated another culinary delight. I was crowned ping pong champion and climbed the rigging to the crow’s nest to experience a once-in-a-lifetime bird’s eye view of the sea. I was educated in the engine room and danced the nights away to well, anything, really. I was pampered with a massage on the open deck and saw playful dolphins, a fin whale, and stars I could not name. We ate five delicious courses each evening with exquisite wines selected by our onboard sommelier and learned how to make a toga out of a bedsheet. Clearly, my life had been missing something.

Sailing on this beautiful tall ship is a truly unique experience that combines comfort, delicious food, exquisite wines, and activities you simply cannot do on a large liner. The crew-to-passenger ratio ensures personal, individual attention, which makes you feel special and truly spoiled. By the end of the sailing you know (even if you cannot remember) everyone’s name and chances are, you will have shared a breakfast or dinner table with most of them, too. Although it’s really difficult to get lost on this ship, it’s still possible to have your own space. There are tables for two and quiet spots tucked away on deck. If that fails, there’s always the Crow’s Nest.

Utah’s stunning landscape is far from a secret. The state’s “Mighty 5” pack of Zion, Bryce Canyon, Capitol Reef, Canyonlands, and Arches national parks has long been a staple of family road trips and bucket-list adventures.

But Utah’s splendors do not end at the national parks. They extend into a system of 43 amazing state parks. Located in virtually all corners of the Beehive State, Utah’s state parks take visitors from the mountains and lakes near Salt Lake City to the colorful sand dunes and spooky rock formations in the south.

While the national parks are undoubtedly must-see attractions, I have found the state parks to be perfect accompaniments to Mighty 5 road trips. They’re where locals escape the national park crowds to take in the state’s many beauties.

Based on my travels through Utah as well as recommendations from Visit Utah, here are nine Utah state parks that should be on your bucket list.

1. Dead Horse Point State Park

Just a half-hour drive from the world-famous rock formations of Arches National Park is another not-to-be-missed Utah experience: the overlook at Dead Horse Point State Park, which provides a big-picture view of the Colorado River meandering through the area’s canyons and mesas.

The parkland towers 2,000 feet above the Colorado River, offering seemingly infinite views of not just the Colorado River, but the area’s distinctive rock spires and buttes as well.

A number of stellar hiking trails traverse the park’s desert and rocky landscape. The overlook is the main attraction of the park, and it can be reached along a very easy, 200-foot paved pathway. The park also offers an easy 1-mile roundtrip Colorado Overlook Trail, an easy 2-mile East Rim Trail, and a moderate 2.5-to-3.5-mile West Rim Trail.

Pro Tip: The fun town of Moab is the perfect base for exploring many of southeastern Utah’s national and state parks, including Dead Horse Point. Here’s how to spend a perfect long weekend in gorgeous Moab, Utah.

2. Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park

If sand dunes are as fascinating to you as they are to me, Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park is definitely one for the bucket list. Located in the midst of the Navajo sandstone formations of southwestern Utah, the state park features an otherworldly sea of shifting, rose-tinted sand.

On my recent June visit, the ruddy sand was beautifully set off by fields of vivid yellow rough mule’s ear wildflowers. The colorful landscape is irresistible, and the state park is among the seven must-visit sand dunes in the Southwest.

With few permanently designated trails, the dunes are generally open to hikers and ATVs. The shifting nature of the sand can make hiking a bit difficult, but gorgeous views await at the top of the dunes.

Pro Tip: Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park is located just a half-hour drive from the town of Kanab, a cool and convenient spot to stay for many of southern Utah’s treasures. For inspiration on a visit to Kanab, see my article on the best things to do in Kanab, Utah.

3. Kodachrome Basin State Park

For a wonderful stop on the drive to or from Capitol Reef National Park, consider making a short detour to Kodachrome Basin State Park, a veritable wonderland of rock pinnacles and colorful cliffs.

Boasting 67 monolithic stone spires, the basin is a part of the Grand Staircase-Escalante National Monument and is among the best experiences in the massive parkland. Owing to the basin’s photogenic qualities, a National Geographic Society expedition in 1948 is said to have named the area Kodachrome after the popular color film of the time.

The state park can be enjoyed from three scenic campgrounds and two bunkhouses, as well as a number of trails that take hikers and horseback riders deep into the basin. For unbeatable views, check out the easy 3-mile Panorama Trail and the moderate 1.6-mile Shakespeare Arch Trail.

Pro Tip: Don’t miss the short drive to the park’s largest rock spire, Chimney Rock, which rises dramatically out of its rocky surroundings to a height of 170 feet.

4. Wasatch Mountain State Park

Located at nearly 6,000 feet elevation, Wasatch Mountain State Park offers year-round recreation in a mountain setting.

A 45-minute drive southeast of Salt Lake City, Wasatch Mountain State Park’s Soldier Hollow was the host of the 2002 Winter Olympics. The park’s website notes that the venue remains open to the public and offers cross-country skiing, tubing, summer and winter biathlon, and inline skating. (Be sure to check ahead for the availability of snow and winter sports.)

The state park, which was established in the 1960s, also offers camping, picnicking, hiking, mountain biking, golf, off-highway vehicle recreation, and horseback riding.

5. Goblin Valley State Park

The name alone is enough to entice travelers in search of an extraordinary experience. Often compared to Mars, Goblin Valley State Park features thousands of mushroom-shaped hoodoos, also known as goblins.

The state park, located about an hour and a half west of Moab in southeastern Utah, is a showcase of geologic history, featuring cliffs that reveal parallel layers of rock that have been exposed by erosion.

Made up of three distinct valleys, Goblin Valley features a system of trails with a range of difficulty levels. An easy hike is available on the 1.5-mile one-way Curtis Bench Trail, while a moderate trek can be found on the 1.5-mile round trip Carmel Canyon Loop. For a strenuous excursion to a massive, cavernous formation, head to the Goblin’s Lair.

Pro Tip: While Goblin Valley’s rock formations are stunning sights during the daylight, they are also recommended under the night skies. The park reportedly features one of the darkest skies on earth, making for unparalleled views of the Milky Way.

6. Historic Union Pacific Rail Trail State Park

Billed as one of Utah’s most unique state parks, the 28-mile-long Historic Union Pacific Rail Trail follows an old route starting near Park City and on to the towns of Wanship and Coalville, then the Echo Reservoir.

Abandoned since 1989, the train route, located less than an hour northeast of Salt Lake City, was converted into a non-motorized recreational trail and dedicated in 1992. It offers a great option for a bike ride or hike through Utah’s railroad and mining history, as well as some of the state’s most scenic terrain. The trail’s surface is primarily gravel but also includes paved sections. It is rated as easy.

Pro Tip: For places to access the trail, see Visit Utah’s Trail Guide.

7. Utah Lake State Park

For a lake setting with urban amenities nearby, it’s hard to beat Utah Lake State Park in the Provo area. Sitting at the mouth of the Provo River, Utah Lake is one of the largest freshwater lakes in the west.

The state park offers boating, fishing, hiking, and camping. It also has a day-use area for swimming in the outer marina, picnicking under one of the beach cabanas, and disc golf.

Pro Tip: A major perk of a visit to Utah Lake State Park is its close proximity to the trailhead for the beautiful Provo River Parkway. The 15-mile rail-trail begins at the state park and ends near the base of the Bridal Veil Falls.

8. Sand Hollow State Park

Among Utah’s newest and most popular state parks is Sand Hollow State Park, a 20,000-acre park in southwestern Utah, about a 25-minute drive northeast of St. George and about 45 minutes southwest of Zion National Park.

With Sand Mountain providing 15,000 acres of dunes, the park is a favorite destination for local off-highway vehicle (OHV) enthusiasts. The dunes also create a beautiful backdrop for the Sand Hollow Reservoir. Along with OHV recreation, the park also offers opportunities for boaters, bikers, and equestrians.

9. Goosenecks State Park

Sweeping views are the name of the game at Goosenecks State Park located in the far southeastern corner of Utah.

The park sits at the edge of a deep canyon above the curve in the San Juan River known as a gooseneck. The river twists and turns for six miles on its way west to Lake Powell.

Activities at Goosenecks include gazing at the spectacular views, photography, stargazing, and camping. There are no hiking or biking trails within the park, and bikes are permitted on public roads only.

Pro Tip: The best seasons to visit Goosenecks are fall, winter, and spring. The park’s website notes that Goosenecks can be intensely hot during the summer (well into the 90-degrees Fahrenheit range), and there is no shade.

National Parks, those majestic portions of land, preserved and protected to retain the natural values of the land and preserve the wildlife that calls it home. When an area is deemed a national park, you know you’ll find wild areas that retain their natural beauty.

While some may say that all national parks, because of their very existence, are bucket-list destinations, here are three especially awe-inspiring ones to visit this winter — starting with the first national park and ending with the most recent addition.

1. Yellowstone National Park

Designated as the world’s first national park on March 1, 1872, Yellowstone National Park consists of 1,221,773 acres of public land that straddle the states of Wyoming, Montana, and Idaho. When President Grant signed the bill into law, he designated the region as a public “pleasuring ground,” allocated to preserve its natural wonders.

The area is particularly a winter wonderland, ideal to explore during the winter months.

Best Things To See Or Do In Yellowstone National Park

Already a magical destination, Yellowstone National Park is even more majestic in the winter months. The chill of the air mixed with the exhilaration that comes from snowshoeing in the winter — plus smaller winter crowds — makes Yellowstone National Park a bucket-list winter destination.

With snow for spending the day snowshoeing, skiing, or riding a snowmobile or snowcoach, and steam coming off the hot springs, it’s truly a spectacular sensory experience. As there’s restricted vehicle access in the winter, you will need to access Old Faithful and other popular destinations by guided or non-commercially guided snowmobile or snowcoach. Roads reopen to automobiles in mid-April, but it’s worth the extra effort to see Yellowstone National Park and it’s steaming geyser basins in the winter months.

The winter months are cold, averaging from zero to 20 degrees during the day, often dipping to sub-zero temperatures at night, so keep the frigid temps in mind when packing for the adventure.

Interest piqued? Here’s why this winter is a great time to try snowshoeing.

Learn The History Of The Park

The history of the area isn’t limited to its famous geysers. There’s historic architecture such as the Old Faithful Inn and the buildings in Mammoth Hot Springs, plus stories about explorers and connivers, Native American history, and much more.

Pro Tip: Before you enter the park, visit the Draper Natural Science Museum at the Buffalo Bill Center of the West in Cody, Wyoming, where the museum showcases the ecosystem of Greater Yellowstone. With five museums in one, you’ll learn the history of the area before you set off to explore the park.

Discover Nature’s Beauty And Geothermal Features

Yellowstone National Park became the first national park because of its many dimensions, including geothermal features as well as natural beauty. There’s nothing like seeing the varying degrees of thermal features from ongoing volcanic activity to the scenic canyons, cliffs, and ridges, especially in winter. Visit Old Faithful, for sure, but also take in the dense collection of geysers at Upper Geyser Basin.

See Wildlife

There is an abundance of wildlife to be seen in its natural habitat. Some possibilities include bison, elk, deer, pronghorn, eagles, wolves, herons, fox, coyotes, and many more species in the wild. The park’s Lamar Valley, located in the northern region, is called America’s Serengeti because of the great density of wildlife.

Pro Tip: The National Parks Service warns that wild animals, especially females with young, are unpredictable and dangerous and reminds visitors to keep a safe distance. People are injured each year from not keeping a safe distance from wildlife. Bring binoculars to view wildlife from a distance and read up on our expert tips for safely viewing wildlife in national parks.

Classic Western Experiences In Buffalo Bill Cody’s Cody, Wyoming

This year the town of Cody, named after its founder, Buffalo Bill Cody, celebrates 125 years. Cody is part of Cody Yellowstone, which in addition to Cody, includes the towns of Powell and Meeteetse as well as the valley east of Yellowstone National Park.

One of the gateways to the park, Cody provides access to two of the park’s five entrances.

Take part in Western experiences at the Cody Nite Rodeo, a dude ranch experience with trail rides and roping lessons, plus chuckwagon dinners.

Where To Stay In Yellowstone National Park

All but two in-park lodging options close for the winter. If you visit between May and October, you might be lucky enough to stay at Old Faithful Inn, built in 1903-1904, and considered the largest log structure in the world. Note that Old Faithful Inn has the most requested lodging in the park.

For a winter stay, Mammoth Hot Springs Hotel and Cabins is also open. Built in 1936, the hotel is located at the North entrance to the park by the former Fort Yellowstone buildings. Renovated in 2019, you’ll find luxury accommodations in the rustic park.

Pro Tip: To see more of this wilderness territory, consider taking a guided tour of Yellowstone. With so many dimensions, it’s hard to know where to start, and a knowledgeable guide can help you better see and understand the park. An interesting winter tour is the Winter Wolf Discovery Package.

2. Saguaro National Park

If escaping the winter cold and snow is your ideal bucket-list vacation, then you’ll want to head to the 92,000-acre Saguaro National Park near Tuscan, Arizona. The saguaro is the nation’s largest cacti and it’s protected by the Saguaro National Park where you can view the enormous cacti in its desert setting.

Best Things To See Or Do In Saguaro National Park

Perfect weather for those wishing to get away from chilly winter weather, day temps in the cooler season average 65 degrees, falling to an average of 45 degrees at night. Bring a light jacket and pack your hiking boots.

Hike The Desert Trails

You’ll find several trails on which to explore. One of the easiest is the one-mile Freeman Homestead Trail that includes interpretive signs teaching about history and plant life as you walk. For a more strenuous hike — but worth the effort for the views — take the Sendero Esperanza Trail to the Ridge that climbs to the high point of the park at 4,687 feet for panoramic scenery of the valley.

Visit The Cactus Gardens

Both visitors centers have cactus gardens where you can see the plants up close, take photos, listen to ranger-led talks in the gardens, and view the iconic saguaro.

Go Backcountry Camping

There aren’t any accommodations for vehicle or RV camping, but with a permit, you can backpack in for backcountry camping.

Where To Stay In Saguaro National Park

If backcountry camping isn’t your style, stay nearby at the Tanque Verde Ranch. With indoor and outdoor pools, tennis courts, pickleball, sand volleyball, and basketball courts, there’s lots to do when you’re not exploring the park. Located on 645 acres, the ranch offers all-inclusive getaways that include meals, horseback riding, mountain biking, fishing, guided hikes, yoga, and more.

Editor’s Note: See why Tanque Verde Ranch made our lists of 7 Fantastic Dude Ranches Perfect For A Winter Getaway and Eating Local In Tucson: 7 Best Foods And Drinks To Experience.

3. New River Gorge National Park And Preserve

The country’s newest national park, New River Gorge National Park and Preserve is located in southeastern West Virginia amid areas already notorious for rock climbing and white-water adventures. As part of the omnibus package passed by Congress, this adventure-filled area is now a protected national park. Located 58 miles from Charleston, the park encompasses 70,000 acres along the New River and is ideal for hiking, backcountry expeditions, river rafting, and spotting wildlife. The gorge is the largest in the Appalachian Mountains.

Best Things To See Or Do In New River Gorge National Park

Although the weather still reaches winter temperatures of near 40 during the day and dips into the 20s at night, the often-dry sunny weather leaves plenty of opportunities for snow activities and also mountain biking and hiking.

Walk Across The New River Gorge Bridge Walk

The bridge is a popular shot in photos, and I’ve taken many myself as the train crawled through West Virginia. It’s one thing to take a photo from afar — another to walk across and view the gorge from above.

There’s a guided tour during which you can walk the catwalk that’s located 25 feet below the bridge. A 2- to 3-hour tour will include a shuttle ride to the Canyon Rim Visitor’s Center where you’ll walk along a path to the bridge’s catwalk entrance. You’re entombed in this massive metal structure. The catwalk is two feet wide and contains railing, but there’s no fear of falling as you’ll also be securely fastened to a safety cable.

You’ll walk the 3,030 feet of bridge at a leisurely pace, stopping often to take photos and learn from your guide about the history of the bridge, the gorge, and the national park.

Rafting On The New River

Since the 1970s, the area has been established as a premium river rafting destination. Adventures on the Gorge offers guided rafting expeditions for every interest and skill level.

Beginner rafters will want to stick to the upper part where the water is calmer. Upper New River Rafting is a family favorite (and kids raft free) with its gentle rapids and spectacular views of the New River Gorge.

A Variety Of Outdoor Activities

With a 12.8-mile system of mountain bike trails and more than 1,500 climbing routes, your limits are determined only by skill and courage. In addition, there are ziplines, hiking, horseback riding, fly fishing, and kayaking options.

Pro Tip: An easy trail is the Endless Wall Trail at 4.4 miles.

Where To Stay In New River Gorge National Park

While the only options in the park are primitive camping, Adventures on the Gorge is located on the rim of the canyon that overlooks the New River, with the National Park Service visitor center just two miles away. Camp in the woods or sleep in one of the cabins. There are even four-bedroom luxury cabins with kitchens, private hot tubs, and all the niceties.

Friend and PR professional Mona Mesereau says of her experience, “I’ve been working in and around national parks for almost three decades, and this is one of them that has really gotten under my skin. One of my favorite things to do is watch the sunset over the gorge — there’s a seating area at the resort where guests line up to do just that, sipping on drinks while watching the sun go down. The first time I did this, I noticed how quiet the chatting guests became as the sun went down. You could hear the birds and wind rushing through the hemlock forest. I remember feeling like I was the only person in the world even though I was surrounded by other visitors.” That, in itself, may be part of the biggest draw of national parks.

When you think of a beautiful beach on the coast of Italy, you likely think of the Amalfi Coast — even if you aren’t familiar with the name.

The Amalfi Coast, a 25-mile stretch between the Gulf of Naples and the Gulf of Salerno in southern Italy, is a popular tourist destination known for its blue skies, steep coastal mountains on the edge of blue seas, and colorful villages, as well as olive groves, vineyards, and lemon terraces. The Costiera Amalfitana, Amalfi Coast, is so pretty that it’s even listed by the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO) as a World Heritage Site that has “exceptional cultural and natural scenic values.”

Let’s take a look at some of the villages along the Amalfi Coast.

1. Positano

The Ancient Romans built villas on the coast of Positano, and it continues to be a major resort area — only now it’s known for drawing intellectuals, artists, actors, and celebrities, Positano.com notes.

Spiaggia Grande, the main beach of Positano, is one of the largest on the Amalfi Coast. The town itself, however, is well known for its pastel-colored houses perched on the sides of cliffs, Walks of Italy explains. While that makes for beautiful views, note that it also makes for a difficult walk from the beach up through the village.

2. Ravello

While Positano is known for its large crowds, Ravello calls itself the “hidden treasure” of the Amalfi Coast. Located on a hilltop more than 1,200 feet above the sea and three miles from Amalfi, Ravello is also known for its Duomo (Cathedral), and Villa Cimbrone and Villa Rufolo.

It also has attracted visitors, including actors, authors, composers, and artists seeking inspiration, for centuries. For instance, Lonely Planet explains Richard Wagner visited the area to cure his writer’s block, DH Lawrence plotted Lady Chatterley’s Lover there, and the area so impressed American writer Gore Vidal that he stayed for 30 years.

3. Praiano

If you’re interested in Positano but want to skip the crowds, the neighboring town of Praiano is the place to visit. About a 10-minute drive from Positano, Praiano is described as a quiet fishing village.

Praiano is known for its “crystal-clear seas that are awarded the Bandiera Blu Blue Flag for cleanliness, and the encompassing views,” Summer in Italy explains. While it is a resort, the area has also been able to maintain its quiet atmosphere, which is “friendly and laid back.”

Praiano is also ideal for a base during a vacation to the Amalfi Coast because other towns can be easily reached from there by bus or boat.

4. Amalfi Town

From the middle of the 9th century until the 13th century, Amalfi was an important trading center. Today, however, Amalfi is more known for its medieval architecture, including the 11th-century Cathedral of Sant’Andrea and the statue of St. Andrew sculpted by Michelangelo, Touropia notes.

Amalfi was also a maritime powerhouse, and every four years there is a Regatta of the Ancient Maritime Republics, which includes historic boat races and a parade.

5. Atrani

Sitting between sheer cliffs and the blue sea near the so-called Valley of the Dragon, Atrani was once the summer residence for noble families, Summer in Italy explains. The mostly level village is within walking distance of Amalfi and is a short drive from Ravello, Charming Italy notes.

The center of Atrani, which sits among ancient houses and a maze of lanes, is well known for its open-air venues and pastel-colored buildings stacked on top of each other. The beach can be reached by following a path.

Atrani is also known for the Collegiata di Santa Maria Maddalena, which features a yellow and green majolica tile dome and bell tower, and an arched bridge built in the 1800s.

6. Minori

A little over two miles from Amalfi and a 45-minute walk from Ravello, Minori is a small town that’s popular with Italians, an article on Lonely Planet notes. The area is known for its seafront, beach, and shopping streets.

Minori’s cathedral, which is dedicated to Santa Trofimena, was restored in the 19th century, Positano.com explains. The cathedral has three light-filled aisles and a 17th-century marble pulpit. What’s more, its lower basilica houses the relics of the town’s patron saint.

Interestingly, Minori is also famous for its pasta factories, and its specialty is scialatielli, thick ribbons of fresh pasta, which feature prominently on many local restaurant menus.

7. Furore

Furore is a little-known town spread over a vertical stretch of hillside above the Mediterranean Sea. It’s even called paese che non c’e, the “town that doesn’t exist,” an article on Fodors explains. That’s because there isn’t a real piazza in the town.

And yet, the town also calls itself the paese dipinto, or “painted town,” because the buildings’ walls are home to murals painted by local and international artists, Fodors continues. This open-air “gallery” of sorts began with three murals in 1980 — and has been added to regularly since then.

The main tourist attraction is the Fiordo or fiord, where a cluster of old fishermen’s houses perches on the side of a rocky gorge, according to an article on Italy Heaven.

Now that you’re familiar with Amalfi Coast, you can — hopefully — begin planning your bucket-list vacation soon. Also consider our other Amalfi Coast and quaint Italy content here:

• How To Spend A Magical Long Weekend In Beautiful Positano, Italy
• How To Visit The Blue Grotto In Italy
• 15 Delicious Types Of Pasta To Try In Italy And Where To Get Them
• 7 Fast And Fascinating Facts About Italy’s Cinque Terre

Women’s winter escapes are the perfect remedy for the winter blues. Not only do you get to travel to fun destinations, try new adventures, and possibly learn new skills, you get a chance to bond with fellow women travelers in a way that’s not always possible when traveling solo or with a romantic partner.

Wellness and adventure are often top themes of women’s retreats. If it’s adventure you seek, there’s something for every skill level, whether you want to snowshoe, tackle cross country skiing, or go glamping off-grid. Or if a luxury weekend is more your style, there are relaxing retreats to indulge in some pampering and perhaps experience a Zen moment in Hawaii or Lake Tahoe.

With organized tours, the guide takes care of all the planning beforehand. You choose the destination, and the tour guide does the work of booking lodging, organizing activities, food planning, and arranging for other amenities. If you’re wanting to get away, but prefer a group environment where you can try something new — without all the work of travel planning — a women’s winter escape may be for you.

From rugged to relaxing, here, in no particular order, are four fabulous women’s winter escapes in the U.S.

1. Women’s Canaan Valley Winter Weekend

Canaan Valley, West Virginia

Explorer Chick creates small group tours designed to offer challenging adventures and uncommon experiences combined with the magic that comes from traveling with like-minded women.

The Women’s Canaan Valley WV Winter Weekend is an invigorating journey to the Canaan Valley with cross-country skiing, snowshoeing, and visits to nearby towns for live music and microbreweries.

It starts with snowshoeing in Canaan Valley Resort State Park where you’ll get up close to winter nature and view the ice curtains, frozen waterfalls, and rivers. Then you’ll learn to cross-country ski to travel a nearly 40-mile cross-country ski trail.

In the evenings, you’ll have a chance to bond with your fellow travelers. Visit the nearby towns of Thomas and Davis to eat like a local, listen to live music, and sample some microbreweries. This long weekend is filled with rugged outdoor adventures mixed with relaxing evenings in town.

You’ll sleep in a lodge at Blackwater Falls State Park with views of Blackwater Gorge and enjoy hiking in the park, an indoor pool, a fitness center, and a restaurant. Rooms are double occupancy.

The trips include 4 days and 3 nights plus a travel guide, lodging, meals, transportation, a commemorative shirt, tipping, ski instruction, equipment rentals, and snowshoe rentals. The group is intimate and limited to 12 women. Items not included: airfare, airport transportation, alcoholic beverages, tour guide tips, and travel insurance.

Pro Tip: This adventure is rated moderate and includes physical, outdoor activities. The facilitator recommends training your body in advance to be outside for hours at a time and having the physical endurance for snowshoeing and cross-country skiing.

Inspired by the Canaan Valley getaway? Consider

• 10 West Virginia Towns That Feel Like You’re In A Hallmark Movie
• 7 Things To Do In West Virginia With The Whole Family
• Why This Winter Is A Great Time To Try Snowshoeing
• The Best Snowshoes Review 2020

2. Lake Tahoe Winter Wellness And Adventure Retreat

Lake Tahoe, California

Vanessa Rivers says her passion for travel and sustainability led her to create an eco-bikini line and to cofound the We Are Travel Girls travel community along with Becky van Dijk. What started as a global travel community designed to empower female travelers led to the creation of Travel Girls Getaways and a variety of trips for women.

Their Lake Tahoe Winter Wellness and Adventure Retreat is a chance for eight women and two female hosts to spend 5-7 nights on a luxury, wellness, adventure in Lake Tahoe.

You’ll spend your nights in a newly remodeled six-bedroom, six-bathroom cabin in North Lake Tahoe, California. Each bedroom has its own bathroom and views of the lake. The cabin includes a sauna, bar, movie theatre room, and a lake view hot tub.

Days are spent skiing and snowboarding at two world-class ski resorts, Olympic Valley and Northstar. There’ll be a snowshoe wilderness walk, daily private yoga at the cabin, movie nights, chef-prepared dinners, journaling and growth sessions, plus plenty of opportunities to relax at the cabin.

Heather Mitchell joined a We Are Travel Girls Austria trip in 2019 and says, “I can honestly say it was one of the best trips I have ever been on (and after 83 countries, I’ve been on a lot!). Vanessa thinks of everything and manages to make each guest feel like a good friend. From the most beautiful setting and accommodation, from the amazing food to the best itinerary maximizing ski time, downtime, and fun time, it was the perfect getaway. I can’t wait to go on another trip with her!”

View Vanesa and Becky’s other trips or follow @LakeTahoeCabin to get booking announcements for the Lake Tahoe trip.

If Lake Tahoe is calling your name, consider

• 5 Best Things To Do In Lake Tahoe In The Winter
• The Best Bike Path In Lake Tahoe
• 9 Things To Know About The North Lake Tahoe Ale Trail
• Best Hikes In Lake Tahoe
• Scenic California Road Trip: San Francisco To Lake Tahoe

3. ROAM Beyond Glamping, Winter In Montana

Whitefish, Montana

ROAM Beyond isn’t an organized trip, but it’s still a great destination for a group of women wanting to explore Montana in the winter. They recently opened two new secluded glamping destinations, Whitefish and Glacier National Park.

ROAM Beyond provides fully equipped roaming cabins to use as your basecamp in various locations, making it a unique, sustainable, and secluded way to explore in comfort.

At the new Glacier County location, you’ll stay near Glacier National Park in one of the furnished cabins. The Dinette sleeps from 1 to 3 people, or choose The Bunk, which sleeps from 1 to 4 people with a queen-size bed and bunk beds. Each cabin has everything you’ll need for a winter getaway including down pillows and comforters, a kitchenette with cookware and a two-burner induction stove, and private bathrooms with hot showers.

Outdoors, play in the snow, head to Whitefish for skiing, huddle around the fire pits, or hit the trails for hiking. The new location opens in early 2021 and will be open year-round.

For more Whitefish, Montana, and Glacier National Park inspiration, consider

• Whitefish, Montana: The Best Things To See And Do
• Michigan’s Best Food And Drink: What To Try And Where To Find It
• Why We Can’t Stop Dreaming About Montana
• East Glacier Vs. West Glacier: 6 Key Things To Know
• Stunning Hikes In The North Fork Area Of Glacier National Park
• All the rest of our Glacier National Park content here

4. Women’s Hawaii Relaxation And Yoga Retreat

Big Island, Hawaii

Women’s Quest’s vision is to provide rejuvenating adventures to “renew the spirit and strengthen the body.” The programs are appropriate for any age or athletic ability and revolve around creating vibrant health and personal empowerment. During one of the “quests,” you’ll learn methods to challenge yourself and explore self-discovery while spending time at play.

The Women’s Hawaii Relaxation and Yoga Retreat is hosted on the Big Island, Hawaii, and is a swimming, SUP (stand-up paddleboard), hiking, yoga, journaling, and adventure retreat. During this retreat, you’ll escape the cold of winter and relax in the tranquility of Hawaii. You’ll spend a full week investing in fun, adventure, and a chance for restoration and reflection.

You’ll stay at Hale Kai, a yoga retreat center located on the secluded waters of Hookena Bay. The bungalows are hand-built and set in a garden of tropical fruits and flowers. When you’re not swimming with dolphins or taking a yoga class, sit in the yoga pavilion and watch for whales.

The retreat center reflects sustainable practices, is located off-grid, and utilizes solar energy. It’s an immersive retreat to connect not only within but with the rhythm of nature.

The food is fresh and prepared from local fruit, fish, and vegetables. The chef-prepared meals are even tastier eaten on the veranda with a view of the ocean.

Each day includes yoga practice, guided journaling, and creative exercises using Women’s Quest’s trademarked Heart’s Desire process, created to help you visualize your dreams and unlock your true potential. And what better setting than Hawaii to get in touch with your deepest desires?

Some of the activities include snorkeling the coral reefs, swimming with dolphins, whales, and turtles, hiking to sacred sites, hula dance lessons, art classes, and exploring Volcano National Park.

Start your day with a jog, hike, or morning swim followed by breakfast. Then there’s time for group outings, exploring the ancient site of City of Refuge, the undersea Honaunau, hiking to a hidden beach, or kayaking to the Captain Cook Monument. After lunch on the terrace, relax with a book in a hammock or take a nap. Before dinner is a yoga class, then sunset dinner that includes an inspirational talk by one of the staff. After dinner, quest participants have time to circle up for connection and sharing.

Want to experience the Big Island? Read up on

• The Best Coffee Farms On Hawaii’s Big Island
• 8 Fantastic Reasons To Visit Beautiful Mauna Kea
• All the rest of our Big Island content here

Our quest to find quaint towns and islands doesn’t stop in the U.S., as our writers have some fantastic suggestions on charming and unique international islands to add to your 2021 travel plans. These islands offer the perfect escape from the hustle and bustle of the mainland, and any one of them would be a fantastic day trip or weekend getaway to tack onto an international adventure. A quieter pace, fewer crowds, well-preserved history, and gorgeous scenery are just a few of the things we love about the islands on our list. Take a look at our top recommendations for quaint international islands to visit in 2021, and start your planning today!

Isla Mujeres, Mexico

Just 20 minutes off the coast of Cancun you’ll find this island paradise surrounded by clear turquoise waters and blindingly white sand beaches. Isla Mujeres is tiny, just 4 miles long and less than a half-mile wide, so it’s easy to explore by foot or by bike. Don’t let its tiny footprint fool you though, here you’ll find Playa Norte, known as one of the most beautiful beaches in the world, along with rich Mayan culture, delicious local cuisine, and plenty of opportunities for snorkeling in the colorful reefs. Check out our full list of fantastic experiences on Isla Mujeres here.

Madeira, Portugal

A true hidden gem, Madeira is a 90-minute flight off the coast of Lisbon and feels like stepping into an entirely different world. Madeira is extremely walkable, but there are other unique options to try, including wicker sledge cars and gondolas to lift you up and down the hills. While on the island wander through Old Town Funchal, the central hub of the island for shopping and dining, and be sure to sample the fortified Madeira wine the island is known for. For more Madeira inspiration, check out all the reasons why Madeira is Portugal’s best kept secret here.

Salt Spring Island, British Columbia

The rugged, natural landscape of Salt Spring Island is the perfect backdrop for a relaxing weekend getaway. With ferry service from nearby British Columbia and Vancouver Island, Salt Spring Island is a must-visit destination. Depending on the time you visit, you may be able to schedule a whale watching tour, and it’s worth trying to schedule your trip during peak whale watching season. No matter when you visit, you’ll be greeted by fresh pine air and the view of ferries and sailboats on the water, and have the opportunity to explore tidepools looking for treasures. Check out all of our recommendations for how to spend the perfect weekend on Salt Spring Island.

Christmas Island, Australia

A visit to far-flung Christmas Island is guaranteed to be one of the most unique travel experiences you can have. The island was uninhabited for thousands of years and changed hands many times during its history, creating the perfect backdrop for rich history and even richer biodiversity. Similar to the Galapagos Islands, there are species here you won’t find anywhere else in the world, and you’ll find countless chances to take in colorful fish while snorkeling, seabirds during a birdwatching session, and, if you’re really lucky and time your visit just right, the annual red crab migration. If you need even more convincing, check out our full list of all the fantastic reasons to visit memorable Christmas Island.

Cape Breton Island, Nova Scotia

Gorgeous highlands, mountains, lakes, and ocean views will greet you during your trip to Cape Breton Island, as will the unique mix of cultures — the island is home to people of Scottish, British, Irish, Acadian, and Mi’kmaq heritage and is one of the largest Gaelic-speaking regions in the world. Take in the unspoiled scenery during a drive or hike along the 185-mile long Cabot Trail where you may spot eagles, moose, and bears. For a truly local experience, dine at a church or community dinner, where visitors are always welcome. Check out all of the fantastic things you can experience on Cape Breton Island here.

Paxos, Greece

When most people think of Greek islands, Mykonos, Santorini, and others tend to come to mind, but don’t overlook quaint Paxos, where you’ll find fewer crowds and lots to explore. Paxos is actually easier to get to than the more popular Greek islands, just a short boat ride from the major airport in Corfu. Once you arrive, you’ll find that Paxos is chock full of charming villages, quiet beaches, and enticing dining options for you to sample. We have many more recommendations on where to eat, stay, and play on this beautiful Greek island.

Nevis

Tucked into the West Indies region of the Caribbean, on Nevis you’ll find a relaxing, slower pace to life. The island does not allow large cruise ships to port and limits the number of visitors, so you’ll get a more authentic experience than elsewhere in the Caribbean. To get to Nevis you’ll have to fly into neighboring Saint Kitts and then take a water taxi or ferry, but we promise the visit is worth the effort. The island is a natural paradise, with sparkling waters and sandy shorelines, and it’s also a seafood lover’s dream, with endless amazing restaurants to experience. Here are our top recommendations on what to eat and where to stay during your trip.

Sri Lanka

Traveling to Sri Lanka is an unforgettable adventure thanks to the island’s lush green tea plantations, national parks filled with elephants, eight UNESCO World Heritage Sites, and other amazing experiences you won’t be able to get anywhere else. You can book a jeep safari to see amazing wildlife up close and personal, or explore the ancient city of Polonnaruwa with its massive carved Buddha statues. Keep in mind that you’ll need to apply for a 30-day tourist visa before visiting, and we also recommend checking local travel advisories before booking your trip. Ready for your Sri Lankan adventure? Consider our list of the best things to see and do in magical Sri Lanka.

Zanzibar, Tanzania

Situated off the coast of East Africa, Zanzibar (which is actually an archipelago of four islands) offers a unique blend of African and Arabian cultures that you’ll experience in the food and architecture around the island. Known for its heady spices, the spice plantations and local markets are a feast for the senses. Head inland for a guided tour of the Jozani Forest, home of the rare red colobus monkeys that can only be found on Zanzibar. When you’re ready to relax, hit one of the many pristine white-sand beaches lined with gorgeous turquoise waters. For all you need to know, check out our list of what to do and where to stay while visiting Zanzibar.

A three-day tour of the Bolivia Salt Flats is an unforgettable experience. Starting in Uyuni, Bolivia, the tour includes the surreal expanse of the Bolivia salt flats. Beyond the Salar de Uyuni are colorful lakes, steaming geysers on the Siloli Desert, and plenty of flamingos all viewed with the stellar backdrop of the Andes. The unique natural spectacles witnessed on a three-day tour through this remote region of Bolivia make a vivid and lasting impression.

Read More: New to the Bolivia Salt Flats? Consider our article to find out everything you need to know about How to Visit the Bolivia Salt Flats before you consider planning your three-day trip, then consider these nine fantastic experiences that are included on most three-day tours of the flats.

Know Before You Go

There are plenty of tour operators in Uyuni. It is important to know your non-negotiables before booking. How many people are you comfortable traveling with in the jeep? Are you set on having a double room each night?

In my experience, you have to be willing to go with the flow, but it is important to be clear about your needs when booking. Asking questions about the age of the vehicle you will be traveling in and hotel specifications may help you get a more customized tour. My jeep had seven passengers and one driver/mechanic who spoke no English.

As stated in this article, even if you book with one agency, you may end up traveling with another. It is worth doing some research and reading reviews before booking your tour. Full disclosure: I can’t personally recommend my tour agency as there were many things that went askew but this agency, Late Bolivia, gets strong reviews. So yes, it takes a bit of gumption to head out on this tour as there are some long hours in the 4×4 jeep bouncing along dirt tracks through deserts and the Eduardo Avaroa Andean Fauna National Reserve, past landscapes that are stark and unique. Don’t expect luxury on this tour but the trip of a lifetime that you will be telling tales of for years to come.

Please note that this trip is not wheelchair accessible, and keep in mind that the rainy season on the Salar de Uyuni is from January through April.

1. Play With Perspective On The Bolivia Salt Flats

The Salar de Uyuni is the largest salt flat in the world at 4,086 square miles. Imagine an endless expanse of blinding whiteness, with hexagonal shapes designed on the salt. This vast whiteness leads to a total lack of perspective that offers photographic opportunities galore! Bring your imagination and a few props such as a plastic dinosaur or a Pringles can, and create some astonishing photos. There are few places in the world to have this much fun playing with perspective!

Pro Tip: In the rainy season, the reflections of the sky and clouds on the flooded salt flats make for another unique way to photograph the Salar de Uyuni.

2. Climb Isla Incahuasi, Fish Island

As the 4×4 jeep zooms along the expansive white flat floor of the ancient sea, an island comes into view. This island, Isla Incahuasi, is a rocky outcrop covered in giant cacti and rock formations made of petrified coral. Pay a small fee to climb the steep path to the top of the island. Make sure you are wearing running shoes or hiking boots as the path is narrow and rocky. The path leading to the summit of Isla Incahuasi is full of ideal nooks and crannies to take marvelous photographs across the Salar de Uyuni. Not surprisingly, the sweeping views in all directions from the peak are spectacular.

Pro Tip: During the rainy season (January through April), the Salt Flat is flooded and Isla Incahuasi is inaccessible. Organized tours often replace this stop on the tour with a night of stargazing.

3. Photograph The Stone Tree, Arbol De Piedra

The Siloli Desert at 14,927 feet is the highest and driest desert on the planet. It is known for its unique rock formations, and unbelievably and strangely rising from the shifting sand below is the Stone Tree, or Arbol de Piedra. The stone tree is impressive for both its size, at just over 16 feet tall, and its shape. Erosion and wind, over millions of years, have sculpted this lava rock formation into an unforgettable tree shape with its thin “trunk.” Stand beside one of the most iconic locations in Bolivia and snap away.

4. Observe Flamingos And Other Desert Wildlife

Seeing hundreds of flamingos in their natural habitat is a highlight on this three-day tour through remote Bolivia. Three species of flamingos can be spotted: the Chilean, Andean, and James. The flamingos are seen feeding at the lakes on the algae. Flamingos are born with white and grey feathers which turn pink from a natural pink dye in the food that they eat. No wonder they love the Red Lake, Laguna Colorada!

In the Siloli Desert, the viscacha is another species to be on the lookout for. Its appearance is rather adorable — like a cross between a chinchilla and a rabbit. How on earth do these animals survive in a landscape so dry and stark? Viscachas survive on the water contained in their food and eat lichen, moss, and grass. They are well camouflaged, but if you happen to have a picnic on the Siloli Desert, I bet a viscacha will be curiously peering at you from behind a rock!

5. Stand In Awe By Laguna Colorada, The Red Lake

The most stunning sight on this tour of the Uyuni Salt Flats, besides the salt flats themselves, is the Laguna Colorada. It’s absolutely jaw-dropping. The expanse of colored water reflecting the sky and the Andes is a photographer’s dream. The Laguna Colorada attracts the three types of flamingos mentioned above, which love to feed on its algae. The water, flamingos, and mountains make for a hypnotic sight that is hard to pull yourself away from, despite the howling winds.

The water in the Laguna Colorada changes color between deep blue and dark red. Legend has it that the water is the blood of the Gods, even though scientifically the color is known to be caused by sediments and algae. It is hard not to pause and ponder this legend standing before blood-red water in this isolated location in southwestern Bolivia.

Pro Tip: Protect your camera and cover your legs and arms, as the blasting winds will cover you in a layer of sand.

6. Stay Overnight In A Salt Hotel

Imagine staying in a hotel made of salt blocks where the furniture, walls, and floors are all created from the local environment. The most luxurious of the Salt Hotels, Palacio de Sal, is on the edge of the Bolivia Salt Flats, not too far from Uyuni.

On the three-day Salar de Uyuni tour, the accommodation each of the two nights is in a salt hotel. The floors are made of loose salt, which is reminiscent of walking through sand, and the walls are clearly made of solid blocks of salt. It is quite the experience and one not to be missed in this part of the world.

When booking your tour, inquire about the quality or set up of the salt hotels where you will be staying. The more remote the town, the less luxurious the salt hotel. The sleeping arrangements, ranging from double rooms to dorm rooms shared with other jeep0loads of travelers, make for part of the adventure. Each stay in a salt hotel contributes to the livelihood of the locals in these remote communities.

Pro Tip: Upon arrival each evening, there is a welcome snack, tea, and coffee. Dinners at the hotel are included in the price of the tour.

7. Marvel At Shooting Geysers At Sol De Manana

Named after the morning sun, these geysers are best viewed as the sun rises. Be prepared to rise very early in the morning to arrive just in time to marvel at this geyser and geothermal area at 16,145 feet. The spectacle and sound of hissing steam shooting up from the ground to 50 feet high are remarkable. Bubbling mud pots and the smell of sulfur complete this otherworldly experience.

Pro Tip: There are no boardwalks at Sol de Manana, thus it is up to the visitor to carefully navigate walking past the mud pools and fumaroles.

8. Be Amazed By Laguna Verde, The Green Lake

Laguna Verde, a striking emerald green lake, is in the extreme southwest corner of Bolivia close to Chile and is the last stop before the jeep drops travelers off at the Chilean border and heads back to Uyuni.

This glistening emerald lake is yet another picturesque landscape on the trip made even more remarkable by the massive Volcano Licancabur looming behind. The color of the water is once again created by a concoction of minerals it contains. One of those elements is in fact arsenic which is the reason you won’t find any flamingos at Laguna Verde.

Marvel at Volcano Licancabur, which soars skyward and reaches a peak of 19,409 feet. NASA experiments have been carried out on its peaks, as scientists believe that the atmosphere and temperatures here are similar to those on Mars.

9. Get Surreal In The Salvador Dali Desert

It’s the colors. Gorgeous ridges along the mountains with shades of gold, purple, and rust. The Salvador Dali Desert is found within the Eduardo Avaroa Andean Fauna National Reserve and is just like a Dalí painting. Surreal. Stand in the barren wind-swept desert and marvel at the shades of color.

Pro Tips

• Water: Bring water and a water bottle. Water is available at mealtime, but it is a good idea to bring a 5-liter bottle from Uyuni so that you can replenish your water bottle as needed.
• Language: Make sure that your guide speaks some English.
• Return Trip: Some travelers make the long, bouncy journey directly back to Uyuni while others cross into Chile. Entering Chile is an option that is prearranged when booking the tour.
• Border Crossing And Leaving Bolivia: Make sure you have the piece of paper from Immigration that you received on entering Bolivia and a small amount of Bolivian money left to exit the country. At this remote border crossing, all the travelers exiting Bolivia were asked to pay 15 BOB ($2 USD).
• Entering Chile: The Chilean driver will meet you, guide you through the border crossing, and drive you to San Pedro de Atacama, Chile.

There are many islands in the Indian Ocean, and each has something special to offer visitors. The island nation of Mauritius, with its 16 islands altogether, has long worn the tag of Honeymoon Island, but while it is perfect for a romantic beach getaway, it is also just as exciting as an action-packed vacation, a cultural and historical hotspot, a foodie destination, or, best of all, really, a mixed-bunch sort of trip where you can enjoy a little of everything.

Getting to Mauritius is a time-consuming undertaking. It is a lengthy trip from wherever you are setting off from, so make it worth your while. You can either combine Mauritius with a safari trip in Africa, or maybe make it an extension to a cultural city-hopping trip to Europe — either way, make sure you have time to spare and time to relax here. Block out at least one week, better two, otherwise you will feel as if you barely stepped off a plane. There is plenty in Mauritius to keep you occupied.

I loved lazing on the beach most days, taking either day- or half-day trips to the capital and to the forest, exploring other beaches rather than “just” the local beach, enjoying various water sports, and taking road trips across the varied island. There is enough to do, but not so much that you cannot relax in your resorts without feeling guilty. Best of all worlds.

How To Get To Mauritius

Flights from the U.S. will require at least one transit hub, with the easiest being either in Europe or the Middle East. From, say, London, flights are around 12 hours long. You will get a tourist visa on arrival, allowing you to stay for 60 days.

Best Time To Visit Mauritius

Mauritius has only two seasons: summer and winter, opposite to our seasons, as the island lies in the southern hemisphere. It has no distinct rainy seasons, and pretty steady temperatures throughout the year make any time a good time to visit Mauritius. The hottest temperatures are in January, reaching mid-80s, and coolest in August, reaching mid-60s.

Things To Know

Languages spoken are French and English; the currency is the Rupee, which is readily available at exchange kiosks at the airport, the cities, or the hotel receptions, but is easiest to obtain through the ATMs. Healthwise, the good news is that you will not need to take malaria prophylaxis. However, your regular vaccinations such as MMR and diphtheria should be up to date, and vaccinations against hepatitis (A and B) and typhoid are recommended but not mandatory. A yellow fever vaccine is not necessary if you are just visiting Mauritius. If you are combining the trip with a safari, then other vaccinations will be necessary.

Best Things To Do In Mauritius

While there are plenty of things to do, I don’t want to take away from your relaxation time on the beach. Many of the sights and activities can easily be combined and put together in a one-day trip, or even a half-day excursion, saving you time and money. Here are some of my must-do things in Mauritius.

Port Louis

The colorful capital of Port Louis is great for meandering and exploring the bustling streets, but for some structure for your day’s explorations, start at the Caudan Waterfront. There are shops, cafes, restaurants, the Blue Penny Museum detailing the history of Mauritius, a craft market, and more. Plan for at least an hour or two. Then there is the Central Market (more of that in the “Where To Eat In Mauritius” section below). Learn about the dark history of Mauritius at the Aapravasi Ghat, and don’t miss the La Citadelle, or Fort Adelaide, rising above the city.

The Botanical Gardens

Not far outside of Port Louis toward the north, in the rather nicely named district of Pamplemousses, you will find the Sir Seewoosagur Ramgoolam Botanical Gardens. Exotic plants, indigenous and foreign; medicinal and herbal gardens; a superb display of enormous water lilies and gigantic trees vie for your attention. There is also a plethora of birds, bats, turtles, and fish to see, so allow plenty of time. The Cafe Mon Plaisir, just opposite the gardens, has a pleasant terrace for a drink or snack before you head on.

The Southern Forests And Parks

There are three spectacular natural wonders quite close to each other in the south of the island. The Black River Gorges National Park protects the island’s rainforest full of indigenous flora and fauna and nearly 40 miles of hiking trails. The Ebony Forest is a haven of indigenous hardwoods with the tallest waterfall on the island, the Chamarel Waterfall. It offers great hikes and views over the ocean and interior of the island. Then there is the colored earth valley, La Vallee des Couleurs. Here you can spot 23 different colors of soil, and you can look out over them from a superb selection of ziplines, which are safe for nearly all ages, and such good fun. After ziplining, take a well-deserved swim in a natural pool by a waterfall.

You can arrange tours to all these places individually, with guides or simply drivers, depending on your preference. All hotel receptions offer a variety of trips, or you can book in advance for tours of the many other delights of the southern edge of Mauritius along the way.

Grand Baie

This small seaside town in the north of the island is both picturesque and perfect for an afternoon away from the beach. It offers beachy shopping, with pareos, jewelry, sunglasses, and colorful towels. Local arts and crafts are available from market stalls and small individual boutiques that line the beachside promenade. There are cafes and restaurants for relaxing and people watching, and some small art galleries.

Explore The Underwater World

You cannot come all the way to Mauritius and not enjoy what the ocean has to offer, whether on the surface or below it. If you are a scuba-diver or would like to learn, this is a perfect location for it, with a colorful underwater world and currents that are not too strong. If you would like to have a look underwater but prefer to stay dry, then there are glass-bottom boat rides or even trips on a submarine. On top of the water, most beach resorts offer water skiing, kite surfing, sailing, donut or banana rides, and more, making Mauritius a veritable watersports hub.

Eureka Mansion

One of the many colonial buildings on the island, Eureka Mansion tells about the regrettable era of colonialism, when Mauritius was ruled by British and/or French governors. Both left a huge legacy on the island, some good and some bad. Today, Eureka is a beautifully kept Creole-style building with lovely gardens. Inside offers a look at what life was like in the 1800s — for the colonists — while outside, the vast grounds, complete with a river and green hills, offer lovely trails past waterfalls and through fruit-bearing trees and wildflowers.

Where To Eat In Mauritius

Mauritius has several superb, even world-class-standard restaurants, but there are some much more interesting ways to sample the local cuisine. Chances are that you will be enjoying some sit-down dinners in your chosen resort, so I will include a selection of quirkier options for you.

Food Tour: I love going on locally guided food tours, where you learn about the culture, history, and traditions of your destination through its food. You can even go on a full-day tour across the island experiencing all sorts of interesting titbits.

Grand Market, Port Louis: My second favorite way of discovering my destination is by visiting the local market. This covered market in Port Louis not only sells fresh and locally grown produce, but also has food stalls where you can sample the snacks and street food popular on the island.

Underwater Lunch: Okay, this is a sit-down meal, but one that is a little different. Blue Water offers a special lunch for two in a submarine cruising at 100 feet below the surface. Just don’t order the fish — you’ll feel guilty.

Best Places To Stay In Mauritius

Mauritius has 100 miles of beaches stretched around its coastline, and each beach offers beach resorts which might just be the perfect one for you. Whether you want to stay on the north, south, east, or west side of the island is pretty much up to you — each side is great, and distances are always manageable. Just to get the ball rolling, I chose three that are great for their own reasons.

For golfers, the Dinarobin Beachcomber Golf Resort and Spa in the southwest is a five-star resort set in lush gardens, and it has all the usual amenities, from restaurants to a spa and numerous pools. Plus its very own golf course.

For interior design aficionados, the LUX Grand Gaube Resorts and Villas was beautifully styled by celebrity designer Kelly Hoppen and is a feast for the eyes. You can choose hotel rooms or your own private villa set in the garden by the beach.

For special occasions, the One and Only Le Saint Geran is a super luxury resort on its own private peninsula on the east coast. It is perfect for honeymoons, romantic getaways, anniversaries, or any excuse you can come up with to splash out. Just stunning.

Pro Tip

It is a great idea to hire a car to explore the island’s many sights, but bear in mind that Mauritians drive on the left. If you prefer not to chance it, then hiring a driver for the day is a reasonably priced option that also gives you a chance to chat and find out more about life on the island.

Further Reading:

• Our 8 Favorite Islands To Visit In The Indian Ocean
• 10 Reasons To Visit Reunion Island
• 6 Once-In-A-Lifetime Animal Experiences In Africa

So many places, so little time. The world is filled with locations and attractions that will take your breath away. While everybody has their preferences for what a world-class travel adventure entails, here are nine places that will never disappoint.

Greek Islands

You get a little bit of everything when you visit Greece, which boasts 6,000 islands and islets, of which only 227 are inhabited. The beach and water are pristine, the climate ideal and the short distances between ports and coasts make it a must-visit destination. And you can’t forget about the food, some of the finest in the world.

Great Barrier Reef, Australia

If you are into diving or snorkeling, the Great Barrier Reef should be at the top of your list for travel destinations. If you’ve never snorkeled, this should be your introduction. It is the largest living reef system and the largest living structure on earth, filled with abundant marine life. One visit will convince you why it is one of the seven wonders of the world.

Auckland, New Zealand

It may be New Zealand’s largest city, but it has more beaches than most of the nation’s coastal towns, and they are fantastic. You’re also a short distance from botanical gardens, nature reserves, and dormant volcanoes. At the same time, you’re in a big city filled with culture, great restaurants, and anything you would ever need to make a great vacation.

Cappadocia, Turkey

Cappadocia is one of the most underrated cities to visit. It features endless hiking opportunities, historic towns, a chance to stay in a cave, and one of the world’s best locations for hot air balloons. The natural columns and peaks of the landscape are something to behold, from the ground or the air.

Cliffs Of Moher, Ireland

You’ll never find anything else quite like the Cliffs of Moher, which stretch for about 5 miles along the coast. The rocky sea cliffs stand 700 feet above the ocean at some points. The drive to get to the cliffs is spectacular in itself, with the limestone hills of the Burren around you and the dozens of centuries-old towns and villages along the way.

The Maldives

The white sand beaches and the sunsets on the Indian Ocean are breathtaking in this area where you’ll feel secluded and part of nature. The Maldives boast world-class diving and marine life, plenty of water sports for those looking for activity, including some great surfing, and plenty of fantastic fresh food taken from the waters daily.

The Beaches Of Italy

When people think of beaches, Italy doesn’t always come to mind. But it should. There are 5,000 miles of coastline in Italy and every kind of beach you can imagine. There are pristine dunes virtually untouched near Tuscany and other rocky, picturesque areas more for looks than swimming. Sardinia has 500 beaches, some with clubs and restaurants and others just for a peaceful getaway.

Thingvellir National Park, Iceland

In many ways, Thingvellir is the birthplace of Iceland, founded in 930, about 50 years after the first settlers arrived. So there’s lots of history. But there’s also lots of beauty, from the rocky cliffs, the interesting waterways, Oxararfoss waterfall, views of the northern lights, and so much more. There are plenty of faults, including Flosagja, which divers explore to depths of 75 feet.

Denali National Park, Alaska

You’ll see the tallest mountain in North America, but there’s so much more to take in at Denali National Park. It covers a massive 6 million acres and is home to all kinds of flora and wildlife. You’ll see a field of flowers that look like a painting, and in wanders a moose. There are bridges and zip lines to give you an overhead view of the magnificent forests below.

Related articles:

• 10 Overlooked U.S. Cities To Add To Your Bucket List
• Antarctica Bucket List Trip: What To Do And Where To Go
• Climbing Mount Everest: What To Know About The Ultimate Bucket List Experience
• 6 Once-In-A-Lifetime Animal Experiences In Africa

There are only a few places on earth where the word marvel is appropriate to describe the literal experience one may have. Chile and Argentina’s Patagonia region is one such place. A living landscape painting yielding natural wonders such as coastal fjords with dazzling views of icebergs biding their time, glacial lakes and forests, the grandeur of soaring, snow-capped mountain peaks, and of course, penguins.

Spectacular Wildlife

The vast Patagonia region is home to multiple forms of visible wildlife, including pumas, grey foxes, guanacos, wild horses, pink flamingos, and, of course, the sea lions and the penguins. Ah, the penguins. The area’s natural beauty aside, the penguins of Isla Magdalena are among the most popular attractions in the region. To see them, you’ll need to include Punta Arenas on your itinerary. Punta Arenas is a large city in the southernmost part of the Patagonia region.

Passengers embark on boats from the pier at Laredo Bay toward Santa Marta and Magdalena Islands, according to Welcome Chile. Santa Marta is home to a large sea lion colony. After a stop there, it’s on to the main event. Magdalena is home to more than 150,000 Magellanic penguins. You’ll need to dress warm and have some good shoes because you’ll be hiking inland to get as close to the penguins as possible.

Breathtaking Scenery

Patagonia is home to some of the most breathtaking natural wonders on earth. A must visit is Los Glaciares National Park. Top to bottom, you’ll see a glorious storyline of mountains, including a large portion of the Andes buried under centuries of ice and snow, as well as icebergs, glaciers, glacial lakes, and lush wood valleys.

The most famous of the glaciers, Perito Moreno, is located in the southern part of the park. “It towers above the turquoise glacial water of Patagonia’s Los Glaciares National Park,” writes Atlas Obscura, “beaming a blinding white and exuding cold blue hues. Unlike most of earth’s other glaciers, Perito Moreno is still growing.”

Up in the northern part of the park, you’ll find Monte Fitz Roy. Originally known by its aboriginal name, Chalten, which means “smoking mountain,” Fitz Roy is a favorite for hikers, climbers, and photographers. A rare cloud-phenomenon oftem makes the mountain look like a smoking volcano.

Hike On Glaciers

For many travelers, a visit to Patagonia is for one reason: to hike the glaciers. In addition to Los Glaciares National Park, you can also hike the glaciers in Torres del Paine National Park.

Some say Torres del Paine National Park is “the reason people fall in love with Patagonia.” This park is dominated visually by the three granite peaks that create the mountain range, all of which can be seen best by hiking the famous W Trek. Normally a four- to five-day hike, it offers some of the best views possible of the Base of the Towers, the French Valley, and Grey Glacier.

The Grey Glacier is a part of the larger Southern Patagonian Ice Field and is the highlight of hiking Torres del Paine. At its highest, the ice reaches 100 feet and is nearly 4 miles across. Hiking on the ice itself does not require any special training, according to Swoop Patagonia. Just grab some crampons and an ice ax. “If you relish an adventure and have never before walked over the top of a glacier, this is a fantastic place to start.”

Los Glaciares National Park is home to more than a dozen glaciers. The best of these can be found at Chalten. Here, you can take day hikes to the Torre and Grande glaciers. Another option is a multi-day trek to Pasa del Viento, where you can get views of the Patagonian Ice Cap. Another popular trek is to see the Tronador (thunder) Glacier, which gets its name from the sound of falling ice crashing hundreds of feet below.

The Night Sky

Patagonia has been called an astronomers’ dream come true and possibly the best place on Earth to observe the stars. Because of the sparse population in the region, light pollution is low, allowing for excellent viewing year-round. Star trekking is now as popular as glacier trekking.

There are professional observatories all across the area that provide public viewings at specific times during the week, so plan ahead. But there are also plenty of tourist observatories. Mamalluca Observatory is among the best. It’s located six miles from the town of Vicuna and offers guided tours and views of the stars and planets from dozens of small telescopes. If you’re bringing your own equipment, Panque Observatory, ten miles south of Vicuna, allows anyone to set up on or rent equipment.

Star trekking tour packages are also available, and many observatories offer them in conjunction with hotels in Pisco Elqui, Vicuna, and Ovalle.

Before You Go

Technically, the Patagonia region spans two nations, Chile and Argentina, so make sure you are clear about what parts of the region you want to visit, and plan accordingly.

Unless you are planning to camp, the lodging in this area is more on the luxurious side than you might think. One idea is to check out the villas designed by Chilean architect Felipe Assadi, Awasi. They are built into the hillsides facing the Torres del Paine. From here, you’ll have plenty of options to plan guided or solo adventures.

Finally, be sure to check the difficulty-levels of any excursions you plan to go on. Bring the necessary equipment, clothing, and provisions.

Further Reading:

• Explore Chile’s Beautiful Color-Changing Marble Caves
• Visiting Argentina: 6 Things To Know Before You Go
• 5 Adventures That Await You In Chile

I met Mary Pochez through a friend at an art opening about 12 years ago, and although we had a brief conversation, I knew I liked her. We kept in touch by email occasionally through the blog I write, but we never saw each other again physically until 2013. Mary is an American expat who’s lived in France for over 30 years and owns an 18th-century chateau in the Loire, which I always wanted to visit.

My wish came true when Mary emailed me to announce that she was starting to give cooking classes at the chateau. She invited me to come overnight to experience her first class and also to give her feedback. In the beginning of December 2013, I took the train to Le Mans and then a bus to La Fleche, the closest town to the chateau. Mary showed me around the medieval village and shared the history of how King Henri IV started a Jesuit college and then a cadet school there. In 1808 Napoleon had a military academy constructed.

After the visit to La Fleche, we headed to the chateau, driving through the 1,200-acre property, which has forests of tall trees and a pristine lake. We arrived at the chateau, an impressive building with moss-eaten steps, white weather-beaten shutters, a stone facade, and a fountain with a water sprout shooting up the height of the chateau. On the side of the chateau were a private chapel, an orangerie, and servant and workers’ buildings.

I met Mary’s husband Xavier, who was warm and welcoming, and he and Mary gave me a tour of the expansive chateau with its procession of endless rooms, long hallways, backstairs, and hidden passageways. Xavier explained Chateau de la Barbee has been in his family since it was originally built in 1790 by architect Louis-Adrien Lusson. The chateau is listed on the official historic French register because of its age and authenticity — and also having been built during the revolution.

My room on the second floor had a lovely countryside view. The decor of the room was cool, shabby chic: two beds with wood headboards and white linens, wood plank floors, and an old-fashioned white bathtub with decorative claws.

Later that afternoon, after I settled into my room, we had tea in the cozy library. Mary shared with me her eye-opening past, about how she was a California surfer girl from a big family and was “discovered” by a model agent, becoming an international model in her 20s. Globetrotting all over Europe and hanging out with supermodels like Janice Dickinson, she was introduced to Xavier at a dinner party in Paris. It took him a long time to win her over, and they have now been married for 35 years with two grown children. They lived in Paris until 2009 and then moved to the chateau permanently.

After Mary got married, she learned the ins and outs of French cooking and entertaining from her mother-in-law and her many French girlfriends and soon began having guests all the time at her spacious apartment in Paris. She loved the challenge of cooking for large groups, and her children would often invite a group of their friends over for dinner at the last minute. After moving to the chateau, she didn’t cook or entertain as much as her children were at university and most of her friends still lived in Paris. Having a desire to pass on her French cooking and entertaining skills and expertise, she came up with the idea of starting her classes.

Early the next day, we visited the local food market, where we shopped for some of the ingredients for the lunch we were going to prepare later that morning. We tasted the freshest oysters, rolling the salted water on our tongues. We also bought locally made foie gras and some produce, including pears, a massive cabbage, and salad greens.

We returned to the kitchen, put on our aprons, and rolled up our sleeves. The first task was to roll out the pastry for a pear almond tart. Next was preparing a simple but unique dish of foie gras wrapped in cabbage leaf. While Mary boiled the cabbage leaves to soften them, I cut up the raw foie gras into pieces, stuffed them inside the cabbage leaves, and baked them.

After cooking for about two and a half hours, we sat down for lunch. Mary had set the table with some of the family heirlooms including the original china, flatware, and crystal glasses from the early 1800s. The cabbage-wrapped foie gras was fantastic, and I have since impressed my own dinner guests with it. Since it was winter, the main course was tender slices of wild boar served with a cranberry and mushroom sauce. The pear almond tart was a divine finish, and I had a second slice. Xavier served a hearty Chinon red wine, a perfect accompaniment to the boar.

After lunch, I had about an hour left before my train departed, so Xavier took me on a tour of the grounds and also showed me the inside of the chapel, where he and Mary got married. Mary stuffed a lovely parting gift, a jar of her homemade jam, in my bag as I was leaving.

Fast forward to 2020: Mary has hosted dozens of classes at Chateau de la Barbee and is doing so well, she renovated the spacious original chateau kitchen in the cellar so she could accommodate more guests.

There are three programs available at La Vie du Chateau/Chateau de la Barbee.

The first is a one-day program during which you visit a market to shop for ingredients, then go back to the chateau to prepare lunch and dinner. She offers the possibility to spend the night if desired. There’s a minimum of four people for this class. Cost: 300 euros per person

The second program consists of four days of cooking, a visit to the open market, and excursions to discover local sites, plus spending three nights at the chateau. Cost: 1,800 euros per person

The third program consists of five days of cooking, open market and other local visits, and lunch by the Loir riverside. Cost: 2,400 euros per person

The overnight programs include the following

• All food and drinks (wine, champagne, cognac, et cetera)
• All entrance tickets and transportation for excursions
• Accommodations in the family’s chateau
• Cooking tuition
• A recipe booklet
• A complimentary Chateau de La Barbee apron

Sample menus are listed on the website.

Mary loves to share her passion for cooking and preparing beautiful meals but says that what she loves the most is that the people arrive as cooking guests and often leave as good friends!

Mary is also happy to host private groups at La Vie du Chateau/Chateau de la Barbee.

Pro Tip

Le Mans is an hour and 15-minute train ride from Montparnasse station in Paris, then you’ll take a connecting bus from Le Mans station to La Fleche, where someone from Chateau de la Barbee will pick you up. Inspired? You’ll also want to consider

• The 7 Best Cooking Classes In Paris
• The 7 Best Castles To Visit In The Loire Valley
• The 6 Best Wine Regions To Visit In France
• 7 Historic Chateaus In The Loire Valley Where You Can Spend The Night

Social media reminded me one morning that I had been to a bunch of Indian Ocean islands several years apart yet on the same date. It made me look at why I keep returning to the Indian Ocean for some island R and R. I think it is because the islands in the Indian Ocean are remarkably diverse, and there are so many more to choose from than in any other ocean. Stretching all the way from Africa, nudging the Middle East, all the way past Asia, and then hitting Australia, this is a vast ocean that offers an island for everyone, whether you like nature, beaches, history, action-packed breaks, or wildlife. So, I picked a few of my personal favorites to highlight the wide variety found in this ocean and to offer you some inspiration for vacations to come.

1. Zanzibar, Tanzania

Zanzibar is a small archipelago off the Tanzanian coast in East Africa. A mix of African and Arab influences throughout history formed the capital, Stone Town, into a unique and picturesque destination. Because there are no direct flights from the U.S., or indeed from many places, this is an off-the-beaten-track island. Zanzibar is perfect for a two-stop vacation — a historic and shopping-heavy city break in Stone Town, followed by some relaxing in a beach resort. Both locales are perfect for enjoying the very special Zanzibar cuisine. When in Stone Town, start your day with breakfast at the Stone Town Cafe in the heart of the city, and finish each day off with cocktails at sunset on the terrace of the Zanzibar Serena Hotel.

Pro Tip: Close to the equator, Zanzibar enjoys roughly the same temperature all year, but there is a slightly more pronounced rainy season between March and May.

2. Mauritius

Twelve hundred miles off the southeast coast of Africa, over 500 miles further east than Madagascar, lies Mauritius, a popular island for honeymooners and beach lovers. Surrounded by 100 miles of white, sandy beaches, the island’s interior is green, mountainous, and has endless fields full of sugarcane. Its capital Port Louis is a cosmopolitan city with a buzzing restaurant scene and a fabulous waterfront. One of Mauritius’ main attractions is that any time is a good time to visit, with a pretty uniform temperature throughout the year in the mid-70s, with December to April being a little hotter than June to September.

Mauritius has an amazing array of resorts, ranging from the super luxurious to the more budget-conscious end. They all offer superb water sports facilities, from scuba diving and water skiing to catamaran sailing and glass-bottom boat excursions. And on an occasional day away from the beach, must-sees include the rugged Black River Gorges National Park with its jungle forest and waterfalls and the stunning botanical garden with its huge water lilies and plants you are desperately trying to raise at home.

Pro Tip: For a special dinner, visit the stunning Flamboyant restaurant, and for a snack on the go, don’t miss the Port Louis Central Market for typical local treats.

3. Seychelles

An archipelago of some 115 islands, the Seychelles are best known for their private resort islands attracting celebrities and royals from around the globe, the large, smooth rocks lining brilliant white beaches, and those cheeky-looking coco-de-mer nuts that are even found on the passport stamps. Landing on the main island Mahe, where the tiny capital Victoria can be found, you can easily spend the rest of your vacation there, as it has plenty of resorts, plenty of activities, and plenty to see. But you can move on to the larger La Digue or Praslin Islands, or some of the private resort islands such as Fregate, or North Island, depending on what your budget and occasion are. But whichever area you choose, you will find stunning flora and fauna, a sea that is as clear as spring water, and a cuisine that is a tasty mix of creole, French, Indian, African, and then some.

Pro Tip: Year-round good weather makes it easy to choose, but in summer, the resorts get very busy, so the best times are probably from April through May and October through November.

4. The Maldives

The Maldives are as picturesque as a beach vacation can possibly be. When you are about to land, you will see many of the roughly 1,200 islands from your airplane window, and the magic begins right then. From the airport island, you will be whisked away either by boat or by seaplane or helicopter to your very own island, as most islands are only big enough to accommodate one hotel resort at a time. The problem is which resort island to choose. All offer amazing scuba diving, and all have restaurants, bars, and cafes on the island. The main difference between islands is the accommodation and the distance from the airport, as the two atolls stretch for hundreds of miles and some transfers can be quite lengthy, if beautiful. The Maldives are also very expensive, probably because everything has to be shipped in, apart from fresh fish and coconuts, and visitors are a truly captive audience, so whilst you might sniff at all-inclusive deals normally, here it might just save you dollars.

Pro Tip: Southwest of Sri Lanka by 430 miles, many people combine Sri Lanka tours with a beach vacay in the Maldives. They are close enough together to make it worthwhile, giving you a chance to soak up history and culture in Sri Lanka and then just sit back and relax on an island resort.

5. Sri Lanka

Sri Lanka is an island full of history and full of gems, quite literally. Colombo is a bustling capital, but inland, towns like Kandy are well worth visiting, as is the famous Sigiriya or Lion Rock. Then there are the various beach resorts along the coasts, especially in the south, and the beautiful old town of Galle. Despite being only half the size of Florida, Sri Lanka has a very varied climate north to south and coast to inland. Still, roughly speaking, if you travel in the summer months of late July to early October, you will be just in between the two monsoon seasons with a few showers at the tail ends.

With so much to see, the best advice is to start in Colombo, get your bearings, then go on a tour of the inland sights and move on southwards, staying a night or two in Galle before retreating to a beach resort or hopping across to the Maldives.

Pro Tip: In Galle, stay at the wonderful Galle Fort Hotel, which also offers great local cuisine, including hoppers for breakfast; and when in Colombo, make sure you have cocktails on the terrace of the old Galle Face Hotel overlooking the sea.

6. Bali, Indonesia

Bali is a little like Zanzibar when it comes to alluring names, with Bali’s magic reaching you before you even get there. The island is home to lush green countryside dotted with high volcanoes, from the top of which you can catch unparalleled views; serene rice paddies worked on by ducks; artist communities, yoga and meditation retreats, and stunning beach resorts, full of water sports and fun. Bali is also home to the only Hindu majority in Indonesia, resulting in many beautiful temples and having to step over lovely little offerings left along pavements outside shops.

Depending on what you wish to get out of your vacation, there are several centers where you could base yourself. Ubud is the artistic inland town brimming with galleries, retreats, and great restaurants, all surrounded by swaying green rice fields. In contrast, resort towns such as Kuta are loud, fun, and young, with fabulous surfing waves beckoning. Smaller and more traditional seaside towns such as Sanur might not have the nightlife, but that can be a good thing. In Sanur, you get the best of both worlds: traditional Bali and a good beach resort, plus great little restaurants such as Soul in a Bowl, perfect for breakfast, and the tasty traditional street food at the Sindhu Night Market.

Pro Tip: Best time to enjoy Bali is in the summer months, June, July, and August, when there is also less rain.

7. Rottnest Island, Australia

Rottnest Island is not your typical palm-fringed Indian Ocean Island, but that is exactly why I have included it. Rottnest, Dutch for rat’s nest, simply called Rotto by locals, lies 11 miles off the coast of Perth in Western Australia and is a protected nature reserve with a permanent population of 300 humans and some 10,000 quokkas. The wildlife brings around 800,000 visitors each year, who come mostly for the adorable quokkas. A small member of the marsupial family, really a bush wallaby, quokkas are indigenous to this island and are known as the friendliest animals in the world because they seem to have a constant smile on their little faces. While the island won’t offer you a Maldives-style luxury beach vacation, and the majority of visitors come over by ferry just for the day, there is a range of accommodation and a handful of restaurants and cafes on the island, allowing you to stay a night or a few. Activities include quokka-spotting and hikes and bikes around the island, watersport activities, and yes, beautiful beaches. While there, go for a typically Aussie breakfast at Geordie’s Cafe and Art Gallery and later pop over to Frankie’s on Rotto for a decent sourdough pizza.

Pro Tip: The weather is generally fine throughout the year, but if you can, avoid visiting over a weekend, as the island gets busy with day-trippers.

8. Madagascar

Madagascar must be one of the most fascinating islands in the world. The sheer diversity of things to see and experience is incredible, but so is its size: it is the fourth largest island in the world, just slightly smaller than Texas. It is also officially considered megadiverse, enjoying some of the world’s most biodiverse habitats with roughly 200,000 species, of which 150,000 are endemic. Just think aye-ayes and lemurs and then some. Add to that the fascinating Avenue of the Baobabs and the amazing rock formations in the Tsingy de Bemaraha Strict Nature Reserve and you will be kept busy. Because of the island’s size and the (luckily) still basic infrastructure, it is difficult to get around and see everything, so the best way is by an organized tour.

If you are going alone, base yourself in the capital Antananarivo in the central highlands. Once there, head for the historic Analakely district for their ever-changing cafes and restaurants.

For a perfect stay with grand views, head to the Grand Hotel Urban, whose roof terrace is a perfect spot for drinks.

Pro Tip: The best time to visit is between April and October when there is less rain, and the roads are in better condition. Ready to learn more? Here’s everything you need to know before visiting Zanzibar.

Say it with us: Norway. That sounds nice, doesn’t it? Close your eyes — it looks nice, too, huh? Yeah, you should go to Norway.

Why wouldn’t you? It’s unwaveringly happy — measurably happy, in fact, routinely ranking near the peak of the United Nations’ World Happiness Report — and it’s uniquely beautiful, offering sights only visible in a country carved by glaciers and marked with an artist in practically every town. Every view holds wonder. The skies, seen through jagged mountains, hold wonder; the waters, passing through gouges in the polished bedrock, hold wonder.

Norway is most famous, perhaps, for those gouges. Fjords, as we know them. Even their names are captivating. Take its most famous fjord, Geirangerfjorden. Say it with us: Geiranger — okay, we’ll come back to that one.

Norway is a must-visit Nordic destination, and it deserves a spot on your travel bucket list. We’ve compiled the main reasons why.

1. The Northern Lights

Between late September and late March, northern Norway is an ideal destination to view the northern lights. We can’t put it any better than the folks at Visit Norway do: “It’s like a celestial ballet of light dancing across the night sky.” Green, blue, pink, and violet sashay beyond stark mountain views all through the night. At twilight, during “blue hour,” the colors undulate before a glassy blue backdrop.

Prediction apps like NorwayLights crunch real-time data to give travelers a precise idea of when it’s best to fix their gazes at the sky. Generally, though, the northern lights are best viewed on clear nights in northern towns with low light pollution — maybe one of these hotels will strike your fancy.

2. The Fjords

Speaking of unique scenery, Norway’s fjords provide sights you’ll forever cherish.

Millenia ago, massive glaciers trudged through what is now Norway’s coastline. The icy behemoths simultaneously dug into and polished the bedrock, and today, the country contains more than 1,000 unique fjords to prove it. They’re deep, u-shaped inlets with soaring cliffs on either side — many run for several miles.

Geirangerfjorden (or Geirangerfjord), along with Naeroyfjord, are listed as UNESCO World Heritage sites.

Norweigian fjords even host cruises. When the time is right — the summer brings sun while the winter brings northern lights — here are a few Norweigian cruises we recommend.

3. You Can Sleep In An Igloo

This needs no elaborate introduction. In Norway, amidst its heart-stopping scenery, you can snooze in igloo hotels.

At Lyngen North in the northern town of Rotund, you rest your head in the Glass Igloo 360. The Lyngen Alps and Lyngenfjord are right outside your glass walls. The northern lights put on a show in the sky above.

If you want a more natural-feeling igloo experience, consider the Tromso Ice Domes in Overbygd. They’re actual ice structures rebuilt every fall. They’re filled with ice sculptures, and you sleep on reindeer-skin mattresses. Your guide cooks your meals over an open fire and leads snowshoe tours.

4. The Wildlife

The Scandinavian wonderland hosts plenty of Arctic animals — you’ll see reindeer, wolverines, elk, and lemmings throughout its 47 national parks. You might spot a bear, wolf, or lynx up north, and you’re bound to run into a badger or beaver just about anywhere. Marine and freshwater fish populate its waters, and the abundance of salmon in Norweigian rivers attracts fishing enthusiasts from far and wide. Thick forests pack its valleys and climb into its mountains, hosting partridges and grouse, and its coastal islands are filled with nesting birds. Bring a camera and admire.

5. The Midnight Sun

In the Arctic Circle, there are weeks at a time where the sun never sets. The axis of the Earth is tilted so that even at midnight, the sun is low but still leaks its light out over the land. In the U.S., you can witness this phenomenon in Alaska. In Norway, you can witness it in the far north — in some towns, the Midnight Sun visits from May to August, while in others it only visits for a few weeks. Visit Norway has more information here.

We’ve written about the best ways to witness the Midnight Sun before — in Norway, you can even whale watch while basking in the low midnight glow. And if you do plan to make a visit, here are 7 ways to visit the Arctic Circle responsibly.

6. It’s A Winter Wonderland

And if you think Norway shines in the summer, you should see it in the winter.

Norway’s Lofoten Islands made our list of storybook winter towns in Europe. Reine, a town within them, “is located above the Arctic Circle, which means snowy landscapes and frosty views with yellow, stilted buildings edging the mountains.” Magical winter towns can be found throughout the northern landscape, and even in the more temperate areas, Christmas is celebrated for weeks on end. Picturesque (and downright holly-jolly) Christmas markets and fairs are everywhere. If you’re interested in planning a Christmas-market road trip throughout Europe, we’ve got you covered.

Skiing, no surprise, is their national sport, with particularly fantastic ski resorts in the central and eastern mountains. (If you need ski boots, we reviewed the best here. Same goes for ski gloves.) And if you’d rather not ski, book a dog-sledding tour.

A reminder: Especially if you’re visiting a colder part of Norway, bring plenty of wool layers, thermal underwear, and water-resistant outerwear. That’ll make this bucket-list trip a lot more enjoyable.

Before You Go

No matter the season, Norwegians strive to attain kos, a difficult to define but all-encompassing coziness. You can read up on it here. Get this place on your bucket list. Get there, then get kos.

It’s the adventure of a lifetime: a journey through the chilly depths to the wreck of the RMS Titanic. The Titanic has captivated us since April 14, 1912, when the “unsinkable ship” collided with an iceberg in the North Atlantic and was lost beneath the chilly waves.

She wasn’t discovered until 1985, and now, 36 years later, the OceanGate Titanic Survey Expedition is making it possible for you to see the Titanic with your own eyes. Starting in 2021, you can descend to the wreck site in a state-of-the-art submersible and explore the remains of the most famous ship in modern history.

How Much Does It Cost Per Person?

If you want to explore the Titanic firsthand, planning ahead is key. You need to apply to be a Mission Specialist, OceanGate’s term for someone who is part of the submersible team. You’ll also have to pay $125,000 for the entire journey. Although the cost is arguably steep, what OceanGate is offering is an experience that has been impossible until now, and space will likely be very limited.

Your adventure starts in St. John’s, Newfoundland. You will be trained and coached before and during the entire 10-day journey. As a Mission Specialist, you will have multiple opportunities to help crewmembers onboard, support the expedition and diver operations team, and be a team member to all onboard.

The crew consists of mission specialists, content experts, pilot and support crew, vessel crew, technical experts, film crew, and a doctor, all totaling about 50 or 60 people on board during the mission.

What Do You Get For The Price?

Every Mission Specialist will have their own private room. Dive Support Ships are built for comfort and efficiency, but they are also fairly spartan. OceanGate’s Titanic Survey Expedition is focused on giving Titanic enthusiasts a meaningful, personal interaction with the wreck, and the dive support ship will reflect that singular goal.

You’ll have all of your meals covered on the dive support ship, as well as accommodation, gear, and ground transportation in St. John’s. Your airfare to St. John’s is not included in the price. You’ll be intensely briefed on how to support the mission, have a chance to chat one-on-one with Titanic experts and enthusiasts, and — the highlight of the trip — dive down to the Titanic itself. OceanGate offers cancellation credits that vary depending on the circumstances.

What Else Will You See During A Dive?

The waters surrounding the Titanic are home to many bioluminescent animals that glow brighter as you get away from the light at the water’s surface, and one of the most interesting aspects of the Titanic dive is how the wreck itself has been repurposed.

Several different species have taken up residence in the wreck, transforming it into a deep-sea reef. In a way, it’s a lovely footnote to the Titanic story — that life can flourish in her corridors and rooms once again.

The inaugural OceanGate Titanic Survey Expedition promises to be an incredible adventure, a chance to see the monumental sunken Titanic before she succumbs to the harsh environment of the ocean floor. If there was ever a bucket list trip, this is it!

Want to visit magically eerie waters closer to home? Explore Florida’s glowing coastline in a see-through kayak.

I woke early. I looked around my hotel room and wondered why there were snowflakes drifting through a six-inch hole in the ceiling. I rubbed my eyes to make sure I wasn’t dreaming. Sure enough, in the early morning light, I could see a few snowflakes gently floating into my room. I smiled.

In any other circumstance, I would have been concerned. Today, I lay back and watched. This was so cool … literally. I was in the world’s coldest hotel room, had a hole in my ceiling, there was no heating and no TV, but I wasn’t complaining. I was in Valcartier, a 20-minute ride from Quebec City, spending a night at the Hotel de Glace, affectionately known as the Ice Hotel and the only one of its kind in North America. If you’re looking for a unique experience, this is it. I was one of only about 160 people who would spend a night in this particular hotel room — ever. A couple of months after my visit, the hotel and my room with it would become a very large puddle. Now, if that’s not unique, I don’t know what is.

1. Book Early

The original Ice Hotel was created in northern Sweden some 30 years ago. Today there are over a dozen dotted around the world. Hotel de Glace has been built and rebuilt almost 20 times since its first construction in 2001. It takes 500 tons of super-pure ice blocks, 40,000 tons of snow, and about 32 days (depending on the weather) to build this 42-room hotel, which has the shortest opening season (early January to late March) and super-high occupancy rates. So book early, and know that since the season is so weather dependent, it’s best to avoid the very end of March.

2. Arrive Early And Take A Guided Tour

The ice hotel itself is just one of a number of ice buildings in Valcartier. There is also an ice chapel, an ice bar, a Grand Hall, and an indoor and outdoor ice slide. Visitors who are not staying at the hotel can pay to visit the ice buildings, and there are guided tours available. This is worth doing to see the different themed hotel rooms and suites which, once guests start checking in, are no longer available for viewing.

The ice hotel itself is a single-story building with 42 rooms, most of which contain a double bed (a wooden box-spring and mattress covered with animal skins and sitting on blocks of ice), have no door (just a curtain), no closet, and no en-suite. But you do have beautiful one-of-a-kind wall carvings. It really is just a place to lay your head.

A much more spectacular building is the ice chapel. Complete with altar, pews, statues, and carvings made from nothing but frozen water, this is a marvelous piece of artwork whose beauty is enhanced by subtle lighting (yes, there is some electricity here). And it’s functional. The pews are covered with animal furs so you don’t stick to them, and the chapel can be booked for private weddings. The chapel is open all night and once the day visitors had left, the solitude of sitting in the subtly lit freezer was like having an art gallery to myself.

The Grand Hall is similar but larger — an ice hall filled with exquisite ice sculptures and a showcase of what talented artists can do with frozen water.

The buildings are lit with accented blue and mauve lighting, which makes them particularly striking once the sun has gone down.

There is a modern, permanent (and heated) lodge on site which houses changing rooms and lockers, an auditorium, restrooms, and a restaurant where breakfast is served. It is open around the clock, so if you get cold at any time, you know you have an escape room and a place to reconnect with your fingers and toes.

3. Learn How To Stay Warm

This is key to making your stay enjoyable rather than miserable. In a warm and bright theater auditorium, we were instructed on how to remain comfortable during our stay. Each guest is given a sleeping bag in which to sleep — it was more of a cocoon than a sleeping bag with only your eyes and nose visible when used correctly. The secret — the most important thing we would learn — is to make sure you go to bed warm and dry. Your cocoon will not dry or make you warm if you start off cold or, worse still, damp.

4. On The Rocks?

Ice bars can be found in many major cities around the globe — from New York to Barcelona — but here is the real deal. This is as authentic as it gets — a bar where the ceiling, walls and floor, and everything inside is made of ice. Like your beer cold? You’ve come to the right place.

I preferred a brightly colored and ingeniously named cocktail for the most unique experience. It was served in a four-inch cube of ice with a one-inch hole drilled in it. It was awkward to hold to start but after one or two, strangely it became much easier. Ski gloves are an absolute must and no, the drink did not seem to get diluted during the evening as the room temperature was nicely below zero. We stood at the bar marveling at the intricate ice sculptures, chatting with fellow intrepid experience seekers, and wondered just how a fire log could keep burning without the place melting. Additional drinks did not help us solve this conundrum.

5. Get Warm Before Heading To Bed

There’s only one way to end the evening before turning in: getting warm. One fun activity to enjoy beforehand is whooshing down the outdoor ice slide. There are two parallel slides, so you can safely race your partner to the bottom. It’s a straight run and not very long so even us boomers can replay being a kid again. Then it was into the hot tub or sauna to get nice and toasty before heading to the Lodge to change into sleepwear. I wish I owned one of those head-to-toe cotton onesies that my grandpa wore back in the early 1900s. Short of that, a cotton tee shirt and thermal longjohns did the trick. I brushed my teeth, used the restroom — this is vital — jumped into my snow boots, slipped on my ski pants and ski jacket, popped a fresh pair of socks in my pocket, and headed to my room. Once there, I followed the advice of our instructors, slipping on a dry pair of socks before shimmying into my sleeping bag. The reason: Your feet tend to sweat and the damp will make you feel cold all night. Good advice.

6. Book A Second Hotel

Breakfast was served in the lodge, after which we checked out and were on our way by 9:30 a.m. We found it really useful to already have a room in a local hotel to which we could return and get changed for the day ahead. If you’re staying in the area, it’s also useful to check in before heading to the Ice Hotel and take only what you will need for the one night. The lockers in the lodge aren’t designed to hold large suitcases.

7. Visit Quebec City And Go Dog Sledding

Although there is no need to spend more than a single night here, there are other things to see and do in the area that will make a visit to the area worthwhile. Quebec City, with its Old Town European ambiance and quintessentially French cuisine in cozy restaurants that retain their tasteful Christmas decorations until the beginning of February, will make you feel you have been transported 3,000 miles east to the west bank of the Seine.

Another popular option is to try dog sledding 45 minutes from Quebec City with Au Chalet en Bois Rond. You can choose to drive the dog sled or simply sit back and enjoy the ride through the snowy woods. If you have never tried this, don’t pass on this terrific opportunity. Just remember you are in Quebec, so the dogs speak French. En avant! (Or “Onward!”)

If you don’t like the cold, you might think this is not for you. But with good planning, you will stay warm and have an experience others will envy — and that will be the basis of many a dinner party story. You can find a helpful preparation guide here. I woke warm after a surprisingly good night’s sleep. Those colored cocktails obviously did the trick. Just don’t forget to visit the restroom before turning in.

When it’s the journey that you seek, not necessarily the destination, modern train travel offers travel seekers a relatively slow, unique, and luxurious experience that can’t be found any other way. Meandering up a mountainside, or rolling along a powerful river, the nation’s rails can bring you a view of the world you miss 30,000 feet in the air. Coupled with world-class cuisine and decadent lodgings, the train traveling today may remind some of what it was like on board luxury cruise ships in days gone by.

What Is The Rocky Mountaineer?

Rocky Mountaineer is a Canada-based travel company that provides just such experiences. They currently run trips along three routes, offering travelers varying ways to travel between Vancouver, Banff, and Jasper. The trips vary in direction, so you can choose which city to start and end your journey. Traveling aboard a luxury train is unlike any other travel experience. First of all, you will appreciate the 360-degree views thanks to their custom-designed glass-domed coaches and spacious outdoor viewing porches.

Train Routes

The original three routes allow each traveler to choose their own adventure.

First Passage To The West begins in Vancouver, and travels northeast to Kamloops, British Columbia, and then east to Banff and Lake Louise. Along the journey, you’ll travel through the legendary Spiral Tunnels and wind along mountain passes and gorgeous canyons.

Journey Through The Clouds also begins in Vancouver and travels northeast to Kamloops but then travels northeast to Jasper. Along the journey, you’ll travel through breathtaking valleys, along the Fraser River, and through an area called Hell’s Gate. You will also get an amazing glimpse of Mount Robson, the Canadian Rockies’ highest peak.

Rainforest To Gold Rush begins in Vancouver but travels north to the mountain area of Whistler. The tracks will take you to see hidden lakes and canyons few get to experience. You will see Mount Robson as well. From Whistler, you continue north along the Fraser River Valley toward Quesnel. From here you’ll travel southeast to Jasper, passing through some of the roughest and wildest areas of northern British Columbia.

In 2021, Rocky Mountaineer is ready to debut its fourth route — and its first in the United States. Rockies to the Red Rocks will take you from Denver, Colorado, to Moab, Utah, over two days, with an overnight stay in Glenwood Springs, Colorado. Initially, the route will launch with preview trips that will run for 10 weeks beginning in August of 2021.

Accommodations

As you travel, you’ll be treated to a first-class experience, and that means eating well. Rocky Mountaineer plans each trip’s menu with the route’s destinations in mind, treating you to local-inspired cuisine. For example, while rolling along the Fraser River, you may be served salmon from the river itself along with wines from the Okanagan region.

You’ve probably heard of train sleeper cars, and there are probably some first-class cabins all over the world, but on this journey, seeing the most beautiful views is the goal, so all the touring is done by day and passengers sleep in beautiful hotels at each stop at night.

As for the services available, Rocky Mountaineer offers you two levels to choose from. The SilverLeaf option features engaging hosts with stories about historic sites, gourmet breakfasts and lunches, complimentary alcohol and nonalcoholic beverages, and all the views you can handle from a single-level domed car.

The GoldLeaf option features the same but also includes access to a bi-level dome car with seating above and dining below, plus gourmet a la carte meals in the lower-level dining area.

How Much Does It Cost And How To Buy Tickets

Depending on the package you select, the number of days traveled, and the level of service you require, prices range from as low as $1,287 USD, to as high as $5,500 for a multi-week experience. Ticket packages and promotional offers are plentiful, and your cost is only limited by your creativity. All prices and promotions can be found on the Rocky Mountaineer website.

Know Before You Go

Rocky Mountaineer understands that luxury train travel may be new to many American travel enthusiasts. They have a page on their website that’s dedicated to guiding you through the pre-trip experience, highlighted by the following:

• Make sure your travel documents are in perfect order. This includes your itinerary, hotel information, and possibly your passport.
• Pack for the region. Alberta, British Columbia, Colorado, and Utah all have temperatures that will vary by time of day and season.
• To ensure that everyone has a perfect journey, each guest is assigned a specific seat and coach while on board the train.
• With the addition of the Rockies To The Red Rocks route, there are now three towns where overnight lodging will take place. All guests will need to overnight in the assigned towns to ensure that rail journey takes place in daylight.
• The company encourages all guests to travel with comprehensive insurance including cancelation and medical coverage. Be sure to check your coverage before departure.

I went on my first safari when I was about 11 and was so excited with every animal I saw, that I very soon got through rolls and rolls of photos on my little Kodak Instamatic camera. Of course, when we got home and had the photos printed, they consisted of endless shots of animals so far in the distance it was impossible to see them at all, and the only creatures close enough to be identifiable were endless parades of monkeys and baboons! Decades later with many safaris under my belt, I have become a little more discerning and have spent quite a lot of time traveling to see the more unusual, rare, or special animals that Africa has to offer.

1. Straw-Colored Fruit Bat Migration

See Them In Kasanka National Park, Zambia

Despite what most people think, Africa’s largest wildlife migration does not take place in East Africa’s Serengeti or Masai Mara. In fact, it takes place in the skies over the Congo and Zambia. Annually, between October and December, more than 10 million straw-colored fruit bats descend into a tiny patch of evergreen swamp forest, appropriately referred to as The Bat Forest inside Kasanka National Park in Northern Zambia. This natural phenomenon is unique to Kasanka and is the largest mammal migration on earth. While Kasanka’s bat migration may not be well known, it tops many of Africa’s more famous migrations for the sheer numbers of mammals participating.

In bat season, during the day, you can see squeaking masses of bats clinging to tree canopy, but come sunset, in a spectacular display, the bats leave the forest, flying off to feed, only returning in the early hours of the morning. At sunset you can stand, sundowners in hand, watching the bats set out for their nocturnal activities. I can also highly recommend the very early (3:30 a.m.!) wake-up call and viewing of the bats as they return from their night time feeding; seeing millions of bats silhouetted against the rising sun is a sight you will never forget.

From hides (wooden platforms built in trees) to public viewing areas, there are several places to view the bats. The climb up to the tree hides is not for the faint-hearted, so for those who prefer to keep their feet firmly on the ground, the ground-based public viewing areas are recommended.

In addition to the millions of straw-colored fruit bats, Kasanka is home to nearly 500 bird species and 114 mammals, including the special, secretive, semi-aquatic and least known of Africa’s large fauna, the sitatunga antelope. To book your visit, contact Kasanka National Park directly.

Editor’s Note: To see bats stateside, read up on the five things you need to know before you visit University of Florida’s amazing bat houses.

2. Brown Hyenas

See Them In The Central Kalahari Game Reserve, Botswana

The shy brown hyena, with its shaggy dark brown coat, short tail, and pointy ears, is the rarest of the hyenas. Listed as near-threatened, with a global population estimated to be less than 10,000, this is a special animal to see. In Botswana’s Central Kalahari Game Reserve (CKGR) catching sight of one of these elusive creatures is a fantastic experience, and as they are only active during the night, they can be a challenge to find.

For my 21st birthday, I had been given Mark and Delia Owen’s book, Cry of the Kalahari, about their seven years spent researching the brown hyenas of the Kalahari. The book had filled me with a real desire to visit and see for myself what they had seen. My opportunity came more than 20 years later when my family and I spent several days in the CKGR. Finally, on our last night, we caught sight of the animal I had been waiting so many years to see. The day had been hot and we had stopped for sundowners on the open plains, to watch giraffe and springbok graze. As the sun sank low in the sky, lightning illuminated the vast clouds, far away on the horizon. As we headed back to camp and dinner, we saw, trotting away from us and only just visible in the fading light, two brown hyenas. I could hardly believe my eyes, and whilst it wasn’t the clearest sighting, having waited so many years, it will always be very special to me.

The CKGR is also home to a variety of other terrific wildlife including lions, magnificent oryx, and the endearing bat-eared fox. The best way to see the park is on a mobile luxury tented safari, like the ones offered by Island Mobile Safaris.

3. Chimpanzees

See Them In Mahale Mountain National Park, Tanzania

The Mahale Mountains on the shores of Lake Tanganyika, halfway between the Burundi and Zambian borders, are home to a thriving population of some of the last wild chimpanzees in Africa. The only way in or out of Mahale is by charter flight with the last stretch done by boat. In the entire park, there is not a single road, so your entire experience will be on foot. This is a wholly unique wilderness and a long way off the beaten track. But the lake, the beaches, the extraordinary forest, and of course the chimpanzees all make it a journey well worth undertaking.

If trekking 5 or 6 hours a day up very steep inclines in humid jungle conditions is not for you, then perhaps cross Mahale off your destination list! The group of chimps that can be visited here have a territory of approximately 24 square miles, which covers beach, lowland forest, hills, and valleys, much of which is almost impenetrable.

For us, day one was a long trek. Two hours hiking straight uphill, by which time the entire group was dripping with sweat and our clothes clung to our damp bodies. But nothing can describe the adrenalin rush that kicked in when we first heard the calls of the chimpanzees in the forest. Exhaustion and aching legs were instantly forgotten, as the shrill calls echoed through the forest. Carrying on through the dense vegetation, getting closer to our target, anticipation growing until suddenly there they were.

Humans are supposed to maintain a minimum distance of 30 feet from the chimpanzees at all times, though this is sometimes easier said than done. Constantly on the move and indifferent to human presence, the chimps do occasionally get quite close. We were warned not to be startled or to run if charged at by any of the chimps and whilst this seemed good advice, it was not as easy as it sounds! Chimpanzees are many times stronger than humans and rather intimidating when charging downhill, whooping, and screaming — holding my ground as six young males rushed past close enough for their hair to brush against my bare legs took considerable willpower!

Chimpanzees are not immune to human diseases, which in some cases can be fatal. Consequently, everyone in proximity to the chimps must wear surgical masks and no eating or drinking is allowed in proximity to the animals. To prevent interference with natural behavior, time in close proximity to the chimps is limited to one hour. Mondays and Thursdays are rest days for the chimps and no trekking is allowed on these days. Rest days coincide with the twice-weekly flights at the Mahale airstrip (a 90-minute boat ride away).

Pro Tip: The place to stay in Mahale is Greystoke Mahale.

4. Whale Sharks

See Them Around Saint Helena Island

The tiny volcanic island of Saint Helena could provide the key to whale shark reproduction. Located quite literally in the middle of nowhere, over 1,000 miles due west of Angola and nearly 2,500 miles from Rio de Janeiro, this is one of only a handful of locations around the world where whale sharks gather in any number.

With great excitement we tumbled into the water, masks askew and snorkels barely clasped in our mouths. We had come to Saint Helena at the tail end of the whale shark season and after a morning spent looking for this most enticing of species, we had finally found one. As we entered the water and adjusted our snorkeling gear, we found ourselves face to face with an alarmingly large and wide-mouthed creature. Whale sharks’ vestigial teeth are so small you can see little more than their gums, and their gullets are only the size of your fist, but it is still quite disconcerting to be so close to one of these rare and extraordinary filter-feeding sharks.

There are very few wildlife encounters that can rank as high as your first whale shark sighting. Swimming and snorkeling are the best way to interact with these magnificent creatures around Saint Helena, as here they are normally found near the surface. Whilst whale sharks are generally undeterred by swimmers, they can, at times, be quite curious about strangers visiting their realm. This can be a little intimidating, and we did find ourselves frequently “back-peddling” in an attempt to maintain the required 9-foot buffer distance between us.

Whale sharks are listed as endangered by the International Union for Conservation of Nature (IUCN), but visit Saint Helena annually from November until around April, peaking in January and February.

Only one airline, Airlink, offers flights to Saint Helena (from Johannesburg and Cape Town). On the island, I recommend staying at the Mantis Hotel, and for whale shark tours, I recommend Dive Saint Helena.

Editor’s Note: For more on bucket-list underwater encounters, consider swimming with manta rays in Hawaii: eight things to know.

5. Ethiopian Wolves

See Them In The Bale Mountains, Ethiopia

Ethiopia’s Bale Mountains are home to the rarest canid in the world, the elusive Ethiopian wolf, Africa’s most threatened carnivore. With its thick, brick-red coat, white belly, narrow snout, long legs, and lithe body, it looks more like a large fox or a jackal than a wolf. Ethiopian wolves are highly social creatures, living in family packs, but remaining solitary hunters. Decimated by habitat loss and infectious diseases carried by domestic dogs, there are now fewer than 500 of these wolves left in the wild, marooned in a handful of isolated pockets in the mountains of Ethiopia.

The Bale Highlands are home to 20 endemic Ethiopian mammals (including the magnificent and endangered Mountain nyala), 12 endemic amphibians, 12 endemic reptiles, 16 endemic birds, and all the Bale monkeys and big-headed mole-rats in the world. The star of the show though is undoubtedly the Ethiopian wolf (Canis simensis). The Bale Mountains are home to about half the world’s total population of Ethiopian wolves.

Only about 150 or 200 people a year trek in the Bale Mountains, and on our visit we pretty much had the place to ourselves. This is a trip for the more adventurous. Accommodation is in tents, which are tiny but snug and warm. Many mornings we awoke to find the outside of the tent covered with a layer of ice! Traveling to the Bale Mountains is an amazing opportunity to visit Ethiopia’s most important biodiversity hotspot and see some of the rarest creatures in the world.

Pro Tip: Simien Trek can organize your entire Ethiopian itinerary.

6. Wild Dogs

See Them At The Mana Pools, Zimbabwe

Currently listed as endangered by the IUCN with only 6,600 remaining in the wild, African wild dogs are one of the continent’s most captivating carnivores and one of its most endangered species. Once found all over Africa, their numbers have drastically declined over the last 100 years. At Mana Pools, the wild dogs thrive in the park and can regularly be seen hunting, generally in the early morning and late afternoon when temperatures are a little cooler. There are six main wild dog packs in the park, numbering around one hundred. Three of these packs live on the flood plains and have become relatively accustomed to human visitors.

Late afternoon we sat silently watching a pack of 16 wild dogs. They lay napping in a shady depression, camouflaged by their mottled coats. The air was warm and still. The only sound to be heard was a distant birdcall. Aside from the occasional flick of a tail, the pack lay inert. We were transfixed. The sun sank lower in the sky. One by one the dogs woke, yawned, and stretched. Getting to their feet, the pack members exchanged elaborate greetings — whimpering as they sniffed, smelled, and licked one another. The dogs became livelier, prancing, and playing. There was a definite light-hearted atmosphere amongst the pack as they gamboled together, waiting for the last few deep sleepers to stir. Playtime over, it was time to get to work, and the pack readied themselves for the night’s hunt. As they set off the hunt, a hyena, previously hidden from sight, appeared, obviously intending to follow the dogs, hoping to cash in on their hard work and score himself a free meal.

Pro Tip: African Bush Camps offers three different locations within Mana Pools that provide excellent options for accommodation and a safari to see wild dogs.

Africa is home to an array of exotic, special, and endangered animals. This list merely skims the surface, so perhaps on another occasion, I will have a chance to tell you more of what I have seen and what else you should add to your bucket list. See more of my Africa and safari recommendations here.

I was 11 when my parents took me on my first safari. We traveled from Australia to Zimbabwe for what was to be the most memorable and life-changing of family holidays. I fell in love with safari life. I fell in love with Africa. I still remember my first game drive, first elephant, first rhino, first giraffes and zebras. Returning to Australia, I wept inconsolably to my father, telling him how much I longed to be back in Africa. He made all the right fatherly “noises,” assuring me that one day I would return to Africa and go on safari again. Little did he know that 10 years later, I would indeed be back in Africa, and this time I would make it my home.

I have been on countless safaris. I have worked in safari lodges. I have traveled extensively through Southern, Central, and Eastern Africa. As a travel writer, I am probably on safari, somewhere in Africa, 10 times a year. I have never lost my love for the wide-open spaces, the bush, and all the wonderful creatures in it.

Your first safari can be a daunting experience, but with a little research and a bit of advice, it can be the most memorable journey you ever make.

Why Go On An African Safari

Safari life is vast horizons, open skies, immersing yourself in the wilderness, getting up close and personal with wildlife, meeting people of different cultures and ways of life, and contributing to the conservation of the very places and animals you’ve come to see.

You may have seen a lion or elephant in an enclosure at a zoo or in a wildlife documentary on the National Geographic channel, but there is a world of difference when you come upon a herd of elephants or a pride of lions in their natural habitat with no fences between you and no commercial breaks to interrupt the action.

A safari is a chance to experience African cultures. Whether through traditional foods that might appear on the menu or perhaps interacting with local tribespeople, safaris can leave you with a new perspective on life as you witness different ways of living.

Tourism is essential to conservation. It generates much-needed income to fund conservation efforts. Park fees contribute to conservation funding, local communities see the financial benefits of conservation, and the presence of tourists also serves as a deterrent to poachers.

Going on safari is a break from the hustle and bustle of daily life, it’s a change of scenery, an adventure, and maybe even a culture shock. As the sun rises over the Serengeti or sinks below the horizon in the Okavango, you will catch your breath and embrace the silence of these moments, knowing that they will remain in your memory long after you have returned home.

Where And When To Go

Africa is an enormous continent with a great many countries to visit, each with its own charms and attractions.

As a general rule, the continent is warm and sunny throughout the year. But different countries, and even regions within those countries, experience a variety of climates and weather conditions. When it comes to safaris, the best time to travel depends very much on the destination you’ve chosen. Generally, it’s best to go during the dry season, when water is scarce and animals tend to gather in the places where the water hasn’t dried up. Dirt roads are also easier to navigate during the dry season, and so you can expect to see a lot more animals during “the dry.” Note though, that since the dry season is considered peak season for safaris, it will likely come with a heftier price tag. If you’re expecting to observe wildlife migration, be sure to also take the time of the year into consideration. Here are five African safari destinations for first-timers to consider:

1. Kruger National Park, South Africa

For many travelers, South Africa means Kruger National Park, the oldest and most popular park in Africa. Kruger offers a high chance of spotting the “Big Five” animals (lion, leopard, elephant, rhino, and buffalo), but aside from these animals, 200 species of mammals, as well as more than 500 species of birds, can be found here. Kruger is the most popular park in South Africa, and many choose to combine a safari here with visiting Cape Town or driving along the Garden Route.

Kruger is a good choice for a family safari. It can be challenging to find safaris that offer enough activities for the kids whilst still being an easily accessible location, but Kruger fits the requirements perfectly. The area is almost entirely malaria-free, has excellent roads, and many lodges have a children’s play area, nanny service, and child-friendly activities. In addition, many lodges offer Junior Ranger programs where children learn to track animals.

The best time to go on a Kruger safari is June to September (dry season).

2. The Great Wildebeest Migration

If there’s only one safari you can plan during your lifetime, it should be a Great Migration safari, which can be enjoyed in Ndutu Plains in Serengeti National Park, Tanzania, or along the Mara River in Masai Mara National Park, Kenya. The Wildebeest Migration circles from Tanzania to Southern Kenya and back and is one of the world’s most magnificent natural events. During the course of the year, and covering 1,800 miles, herds of over a million wildebeest, as well as thousands of gazelle and zebra, cross crocodile-infested rivers to reach greener pastures. Prides of lions often follow the herds, as do cheetahs, wild dogs, and hyenas, all making attempts to take down vulnerable members of the herd. If you’re lucky, you might even see a wildebeest or zebra giving birth.

There are numerous points to observe this mass wildebeest movement, but the most recommended spots are the Mara River on the plains of the Masai Mara National Park, and the Ndutu Plains of Tanzania’s Serengeti.

The precise timing is dependent upon rainfall patterns each year, meaning you can see different aspects at different times: the mass birthing of calves between January and March in the southern Serengeti and river crossings between July and August. The best time to go to Tanzania for a Wildebeest Migration safari in the Serengeti is July to October. For the Wildebeest Migration in the Masai Mara, you need to be there between June and November.

3. The Okavango Delta, Botswana

A World Heritage Site, the Okavango Delta is a vast and virtually untouched freshwater wetland in the heart of Botswana’s arid Kalahari Desert. Home to huge numbers of plains game, plus unusual antelope like puku, sitatunga, and red lechwe, the Okavango is good for game viewing all year round.

The Okavango Delta is one of Botswana’s most popular wildlife destinations. A combination of permanent wetlands and abundant resident wildlife means the delta is a year-round safari destination. June to August is high water season, with more moderate temperatures, and is the best time for boating and canoe safaris.

Hot and dry, September and October are also good months to visit the Okavango, as thirsty animals concentrate in enormous numbers on its fringes, while the November to April summer rainy season turns the Okavango Delta into a sensational bird-watching destination.

4. Victoria Falls (On The Border Between Zambia And Zimbabwe)

Victoria Falls is one of the Seven Natural Wonders of the World. Whilst it is neither the highest nor the widest waterfall in the world, Victoria Falls is classified as the world’s largest sheet of falling water, based on its width of 5,604 feet and height of 354 feet. The spray from the falls can be clearly seen from almost 20 miles away, hence its local name, Mosi-oa-Tunya, “the smoke that thunders.”

On the Zambian side, the Victoria Falls is located within the Mosi-oa-Tunya National Park, and on the Zimbabwean side, it’s in Victoria Falls National Park, which means to see the entire length of falls, you will need to enter via two gates, in two different countries.

Around two-thirds of the falls lie in Zimbabwe, so if you are short on time, this is the side to visit. But while Zimbabwe might have more viewpoints, Zambia has a wilder feel and gets you right up close to the rushing water. If the Zambezi is in full flood (February to July) prepare to get thoroughly soaked as the spray comes at you from all directions. Downstream of the falls, the river has carved a tortuous zigzag route through the basalt rock for miles, making a fantastic place for white water rafting. There is a platform on the side of the Victoria Falls Bridge, in the no man’s land between Zambia and Zimbabwe, which is a popular place for bungee jumping.

Whether you stay in Zambia or Zimbabwe, I’d recommend seeing both sides of the falls, which, thanks to the introduction of the KAZA UNIVISA, is easy. A single visa covers Zambia, Zimbabwe, and day trips to Chobe National Park in Botswana, costs $50 USD, and is available to about 40 nationalities including British, Americans, and Australians.

5. Gorilla Trekking, Rwanda

Rwanda is a country of outstanding natural beauty and is a great place to go on a gorilla trekking safari. Gorilla trekking in Rwanda is a year-round activity. But as you’re hiking through the rainforests, the drier and cooler months of January and February and June to September are recommended.

There is a reason why it’s called gorilla trekking. There is no way to predict where the gorillas will be on any given day. You need to come prepared for anything, from a 15-minute walk in the jungle to six hours of tortuous trekking. Mountain gorillas are wild animals. They cover a wide territory, and the guides have to rely on their tracking skills and not GPS tags. Keep in mind that the trek is in a jungle, so being fairly fit is a good idea! But, it’s all worth it, as spotting a gorilla in the wild can be a life-changing experience.

Whilst gorilla trekking permits are more expensive than in neighboring Uganda, Rwanda is perfect for a short safari. Volcanoes National Park is only a two-hour drive from Kigali International Airport, and the trek is generally less physically demanding. July and August are right in the midst of Rwanda’s dry season (June to September) and very popular for gorilla trekking because of clear skies and sunny conditions. Keep in mind though that the gorilla’s rainforest habitat is very wet, and you can’t avoid rain completely.

The permits are currently a flat price, year-round, of $1,500 USD. So, when is the best time to go? Now, before it gets too expensive!

What To Expect

There are a few things first-time safari-goers should know before embarking on a big African adventure, no matter where they’re headed…

1. Cost

A safari does not have to break the bank. There is a common misconception that safaris are reserved for high-flyers or honeymooners. With careful research, you can find safari experiences that aren’t prohibitively expensive. As most lodges or camps will include your accommodation, meals, drinks, and guided experiences, a safari can actually be a good value.

2. Early Rising

The early bird catches the worm, so expect to get out of bed bright and early for optimal game viewing. Animals are most active at first light and again around dusk, meaning you can expect some very early starts to your game drives. Even if you’re not a morning person, force yourself to be one for those early morning drives. You will usually be given tea or coffee and a few biscuits to start your day and will have breakfast when you return to camp after your drive.

3. Sundowners

Sundowners is a word you will happily become acquainted with on safari. These are the drinks you will enjoy during the golden hour as the sun sinks over the horizon, usually in a suitably picturesque and photogenic location.

4. Between Activities

On safari, there is always downtime. Between your morning and afternoon game drives you will have plenty of time to soak up your surroundings, relax, nap, or read. Dinners will often be served by the campfire — a three-course meal under the stars followed by sitting around the fire swapping safari stories.

5. Manage Your Expectations

You’re not guaranteed to see anything. There are no guarantees when it comes to safaris. We are talking about wild animals in huge national parks, most of the time without any fences or barriers to hamper their movements. While most animals do have a general territory that they stick to, it doesn’t necessarily mean that you’ll see them in it.

How To Prepare

1. Visas

Check far ahead of time to see if you need a visa. In some countries, you can get a visa on arrival, but others require you to have one ahead of time. Check the list of visa requirements of the country you are visiting on a reputable site. To ensure that you have ample time, it is advisable to apply at least 60 days prior to your travel date.

2. Vaccinations And Medicines

Make sure you have your shots and medications in order. You will usually need a few vaccinations as well as antimalarials and obviously any prescriptions. Vaccinations you will require usually include yellow fever, hepatitis A and B, and typhoid. Some vaccinations take several weeks to take full effect, so get your shots done way in advance. For more information on vaccines that are destination-specific, consult the Centers for Disease Control’s destination list. Speak to your GP or a travel medicine clinic three months in advance.

3. Travel Insurance

Get travel insurance! Buying full coverage, including trip cancelation insurance, is recommended. Comprehensive travel insurance is important for an African safari. Your adventures are likely to take you off the beaten track and away from easily accessible medical care. Should something happen, it is important to have a travel insurance plan that covers healthcare, lost or stolen luggage, and canceled or delayed flights. Whichever option you go for, make sure it covers all activities you plan on taking part in while you are in Africa.

3. What To Pack

Wondering what to wear? There are a few things to consider when dressing for the African bush. Morning game drives can be chilly, no matter the time of year, so pack some warm layers that you can peel off as the day starts to warm up. Avoid brightly colored clothing; stick to beige, green, and brown to blend in better to your surroundings. Sun protection is a must, so pack a good hat and sunglasses. Long pants and boots are essential if you are planning any trekking or walking. It’s also often a good idea to pack a swimsuit for by the pool in the heat of the day. Pack a sturdy pair of binoculars, they will make a huge difference to your trip. Last but not least, pack plenty of insect repellent and spray yourself liberally with it, especially at dusk.

4. Cameras And Photography

Be sure to bring a camera with extra memory cards, extra batteries, and/or a power pack to make sure you’ll be able to capture all the action.

A word of advice though, leave the dedicated wildlife photography and filming to NatGeo. Put the camera down occasionally and really absorb your experience. It will make the photos you do take that much more memorable.

More Pro Tips Before You Go

• When out on a game drive, keep your voice down. Don’t be the person hollering across the vehicle when everyone else is trying to keep quiet and avoid scaring off the animals.
• Go out on a night drive if you can, but don’t expect to get good pictures (unless you bring professional equipment). Night drives are the time to put the camera away and just watch.
• Bring a headlamp! You will use it every time you need to walk outside after dark, and maybe even for reading in bed.

By going on a safari, you will embark on the adventure of a lifetime, exploring faraway places surrounded by unique landscapes and spectacular wildlife. There are plenty of great reasons to go on a safari. Whether you want to see the Great Migration, get up close and personal with wildlife, take your family on a once-in-a-lifetime adventure, or just relax in nature, a safari in Africa will never disappoint.

Want more safari inspiration? Consider 9 Reasons To Experience A Safari On The Luxurious Zambezi Queen and the many ways in which this writer’s Tanzania bucket-list trip was worth the wait.

Tanzania, known for Mount Kilimanjaro, the tallest peak in Africa, Ngorongoro Crater, the world’s largest concentration of wildlife, and Serengeti National Park, was at the top of my bucket list. Traveling in August to Serengeti National Park would be a prime time to witness the Great Wildebeest Migration.

Why I Wanted To Go

As a child, I poured over the latest issue of National Geographic the minute it arrived, dreaming of far-off lands. As an adult, I have been to every continent, except Antarctica; but I had only been as far as an airport layover in South Africa. Africa was still almost as much a mystery to me as when I was a child.

As an amateur photographer, I wanted to go on a photo safari to improve my photography skills and learn to take photos like those in National Geographic. I hoped to add the Big Five, the African elephant, Cape buffalo, black rhinoceros, lion, and leopard, to my photography portfolio. At the same time, this trip could only begin to unveil the secrets of the vast continent of Africa.

What The Challenges Were

Climbing Mount Kilimanjaro was out of reach for me physically. I needed a knee replacement, so standing was difficult for me. A photo safari where I photographed the images from a Land Rover, was the perfect solution. I focused on what I could do.

Deciding the best time to go to reach a maximum number of photo opportunities was critical. I decided that going during the Great Wildebeest Migration, when the animals are active, would provide me with a lot to photograph. But going to Arusha, Tanzania, in August is prime time due to the Great Wildebeest migration, so finding flights that met my schedule was challenging.

Our safari started in the isolated and private Northern Serengeti. It was a challenging trek. We flew into remote Tanzanian Serengeti National Park on a 12-passenger bush plane. We peered into the full mouth of the Ol Doinyo Lengai volcano as the pilot circled. We continued over the soda lake, Lake Natron, where that day, the pink flamingos were missing.

The roads, which seemed non-existent to me, were packed dirt and as bumpy as an old-fashioned washboard. In a race to see the wildebeest crossing the Mara River, we had a ride that resulted in my tailbone throbbing and others complaining of backaches.

A big part of this trip was witnessing the wildebeest crossing the Mara River. With over two million wildebeest migrating from the northern Serengeti plains back to Kenya’s Maasai Mara, taking along thousands of zebras and Thompson’s gazelles as their traveling companions, it shouldn’t be that difficult to see a crossing. Yet, with many crossing points, being in the right place at the right time was a challenge.

And yet, while that was a challenge, our Topguides Safaris guides managed to make it seem almost effortless. Our tour had three land rovers, and we often spread out, so that when one group spotted something the rest of us needed to see, they radioed the other groups, increasing our sightings. These guides were also well connected within the community, and we often stopped to get the latest intel.

Taking images of wildlife is a challenge. Waiting for the right frame takes patience as there’s no posing those cute lion cubs. One thing that struck me was you’re not at the zoo. They can’t map out and schedule what you’ll see. It is unpredictable. Will you see that black rhino?

How I Made It Happen

While I can plan and pack for a domestic trip in a couple of hours and in a day for a European trip, the remote Serengeti took a lot more planning. The key to the success of this trip was research.

I need to discuss with the trip’s sponsor to determine the amount of walking and standing required. If there were places to sit and not much walking, it was within my ability. However, I didn’t want to make the trip and have an issue for the trip’s coordinator or myself.

Packing required specific colored clothing and heeding advice on the right photographic equipment to purchase or bring.

Finally, to begin the safari in the distant Northern Serengeti, I flew seven hours to Amsterdam from the United States. My layover in Amsterdam lasted several hours, and then I flew several more hours to Arusha. One of our guides met us at Kilimanjaro International Airport late in the evening, and from there we drove about an hour to the African Tulip Hotel. Early the next morning, our adventure started to take shape. We flew in a 12-passenger bush plane to meet our drivers. The safari began as we took several hours to drive to our camp, stopping for photos along the way.

What Made It Worth The Wait

I came back with over 8,000 photos and lessons from our instructors who had published in National Geographic. Their photo reviews allowed me to improve my photography skills times two. I incorporated some of these photos into my stock photography portfolio.

Our guides were top in their field, and during the 10-day safari, we saw the rare black rhino twice. One thing I didn’t expect was the dozens of bird species. I had focused on the large game animals, but there was so much more to photograph.

Things to Know Before Your Safari

To prepare the best Tanzania safari experience, here are some tips.

Choose Your Clothing Colors Carefully

The neutral colors, like beige, olive, and gray, work best for safaris because they help you blend in and be less noticeable to the animals. If you plan for a walking safari, though, wear bright colors to keep the animals away. A Tanzania safari involves a lot of dust. Avoid white. In Tanzania’s Ngorongoro Crater, avoid dark blue and black clothing as these colors attract biting tsetse flies.

Dress In Layers

Tanzania isn’t always hot. On the early morning drives, it can start chilly, and by mid-day, it’s scorching hot, so dressing in layers to peel off through the day works best.

The Best Time To Go

August and September are the months to witness Great Wildebeest Migration because October begins the rainy season when the herds start their return trip. February and March are the best for predator and prey interactions.

Considering a safari experience? Read up on these nine reasons to experience a safari on the luxurious Zambezi Queen, plus nine things to know before booking a long safari.